Manual Panasonic DC-G100 (page 12 of 512) (English)

734626

Zoom out

Zoom in

1/512

Operating Instructions

Digital Camera

Model No. DC-G100

DC-G110

Please read these instructions carefully before using this product, and

save this manual for future use.

DVQP2176ZA

M0620KZ0

Dear Customer,

We would like to take this opportunity to thank you for purchasing this Panasonic

Digital Camera. Please read this document carefully and keep it handy for future

reference. Please note that the actual controls and components, menu items,

etc. of your Digital Camera may look somewhat different from those shown in the

illustrations in this document.

Carefully observe copyright laws.

Recording of pre-recorded tapes or discs or other published or broadcast material for

purposes other than your own private use may infringe copyright laws. Even for the

purpose of private use, recording of certain material may be restricted.



Finding the Information You Need

You can find the information you need by looking at the following pages in this

document.

Contents

6

Contents by Function

16

Names of Parts

26

Menu Guide

309

Index

502

About Operating Instructions



Symbols Used in This Document

Black icons show conditions in which these can be used, and gray icons show

conditions in which these cannot be used.

Example:

Recording mode Pictures · Videos

Operating symbols

Front dial

Cursor button up/down/left/right

[MENU/SET] button

Control dial

• Other symbols, such as icons shown on the camera screen, are also used in

explanations.

• This document describes the procedure for selecting menu items as follows:

Example) Set [Quality] of the [Rec] menu to [

[ ] [Quality] Select [ ]

About Operating Instructions

Notification classification symbols

To confirm prior to using the function

Hints for better use of the camera and tips for recording

Notifications and supplementary items regarding specifications

Related information and page number

• The images and drawings of this document are an illustration to explain the

functions.

• Description in these operating instructions is based on the interchangeable lens

(H-FS12032).

1. Introduction 20

2. Getting Started 30

3. Basic Operations 50

4. Recording Mode 76

5. Image Recording 119

6. Focus/Zoom 126

7. Drive/Shutter/Image Stabilizer 159

8. Brightness (Exposure)/Coloring/

Picture effect

209

9. Flash 228

10. Recording Videos 240

11. Playing Back and Editing of Images 272

12. Camera Customization 293

13. Menu Guide 309

14. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth 373

15. Connecting to Other Devices 434

16. Materials 449

Chapters

About Operating Instructions .....................................................3

Chapters ....................................................................................5

Contents by Function ...............................................................16

1. Introduction 20

Before Use ...............................................................................20

Standard Accessories .............................................................. 22

Lenses That Can Be Used .......................................................23

Memory Cards That Can Be Used ...........................................24

Names of Parts ........................................................................ 26

Camera ............................................................................................26

Lens .................................................................................................28

Tripod grip ........................................................................................29

Monitor Displays ..............................................................................29

2. Getting Started 30

Attaching a Shoulder Strap ......................................................30

Charging the Battery ................................................................31

Battery Insertion ............................................................................... 31

Charging battery ..............................................................................33

Notifications Regarding Charging ....................................................35

[Economy] ........................................................................................ 37

Inserting Cards (Optional) ........................................................39

Formatting Cards (Initialization) ....................................................... 40

Attaching a Lens ...................................................................... 41

Extending/retracting the lens <when the interchangeable lens

(H-FS12032/H-FS35100) is attached> ............................................43

Attaching the Lens Hood..........................................................44

To attach the lens hood (flower shape) that came with the

interchangeable lenses (H-FS35100) ..............................................44

Adjusting the Monitor Direction and Angle ...............................46

Setting the Clock (When Turning On for the First Time) .......... 47

Contents

3. Basic Operations 50

Basic Recording Operations .................................................... 50

How to Hold the Camera ..................................................................50

Taking Pictures .................................................................................52

Recording Videos .............................................................................53

Selecting the Recording Mode .........................................................54

Camera Setting Operations .....................................................55

Display Settings ....................................................................... 57

Adjusting the Viewfinder Diopter ...................................................... 57

Switching Between the Monitor and Viewfinder ............................... 58

Switching the Display Information ....................................................60

Quick Menu ..............................................................................63

Monitor recording information screen ......................................65

Menu Operation Methods ........................................................67

[Reset] ..............................................................................................69

Recording Using Touch Functions ........................................... 70

Touch AF/Touch Shutter ................................................................... 70

Touch AE ..........................................................................................71

Recording with the Tripod grip ................................................. 72

Attaching the Hand Strap .................................................................72

Attaching the camera to a tripod grip ............................................... 73

Using as a grip ................................................................................. 74

Using as a tripod .............................................................................. 75

Contents

4. Recording mode 76

Intelligent Auto Mode ...............................................................76

[Intelligent Auto] menu .....................................................................81

Taking pictures with different color tones, degrees of blurriness,

and brightness .................................................................................83

Self Shot Mode ([Self Shot]) ....................................................85

Built-in microphone setting ([Self Shot]) ...........................................88

4K Selfie ...........................................................................................89

Program AE Mode....................................................................93

Aperture-Priority AE Mode ....................................................... 95

Shutter-Priority AE Mode .........................................................98

Manual Exposure Mode .........................................................100

Live View Composite Recording ....................................................103

Preview Mode ........................................................................ 106

Scene Guide Mode ................................................................ 107

Types of Scene Guide Mode ..........................................................109

Creative Control Mode ........................................................... 112

Types and adjustments of filter effects ........................................... 113

Taking pictures with different degrees of blurriness

and brightness ............................................................................... 117

5. Image Recording 119

[Aspect Ratio]......................................................................... 119

[Picture Size] ..........................................................................120

[Quality] ..................................................................................121

[Folder / File Settings] ............................................................123

[No.Reset] ..............................................................................125

Contents

6. Focus/Zoom 126

Selecting the Focus Mode .....................................................126

Using AF ................................................................................128

[AF Sensitivity(Photo)] ...................................................................130

Selecting the AF Mode ...........................................................131

[Face/Eye Detection] ......................................................................133

[Tracking] .......................................................................................135

[49-Area] ........................................................................................137

Custom Multi (Horizontal, Vertical, Center) ....................................138

Custom Multi (C1 to C3) ................................................................140

[1-Area] ..........................................................................................141

[Pinpoint] ........................................................................................ 142

Moving the AF Area by Touch ................................................ 144

Optimizing the focus and brightness to the touched position .........144

Moving the AF Area during Viewfinder Display .............................. 146

Record Using Manual Focus..................................................148

Recording with Zoom .............................................................153

Extended Tele Conversion ............................................................. 154

[Digital Zoom] (DC-G100 only) .......................................................157

Power Zoom Lens .......................................................................... 158

Contents

7. Drive/Shutter/Image Stabilizer 159

Selecting the Drive Mode .......................................................159

Taking Burst Pictures ............................................................. 160

4K Photo Recording ...............................................................164

Selecting Pictures from a 4K Burst File .................................170

Picture Selection Operations .........................................................172

Post-Focus Recording ...........................................................178

Selecting the Focus Point for the Picture to Save ..........................181

Focus Stacking ..............................................................................183

Recording Using the Self-timer ..............................................186

Recording with Time Lapse Shot ........................................... 189

Recording with Stop Motion Animation .................................. 192

Time Lapse Shot/Stop Motion Animation Videos ...................195

Bracket Recording .................................................................197

[Silent Mode] ..........................................................................203

[Shutter Type] .........................................................................204

Image Stabilizer ..................................................................... 206

Image Stabilizer Settings ...............................................................207

Contents

8. Brightness (Exposure)/Coloring/Picture effect 209

[Metering Mode] .....................................................................209

Exposure Compensation........................................................210

Locking Focus and Exposure (AF/AE Lock) .......................... 212

ISO Sensitivity........................................................................214

White Balance (WB)...............................................................217

Adjusting the White Balance .......................................................... 221

[Photo Style]...........................................................................223

[Filter Settings] .......................................................................226

[Simultaneous Record w/o Filter] ................................................... 227

9. Flash 228

Using a Flash .........................................................................228

Setting Flash ..........................................................................229

[Flash Mode] ..................................................................................229

[Flash Adjust.] ................................................................................233

[Flash Synchro] .............................................................................. 234

[Auto Exposure Comp.] .................................................................. 235

[Red-Eye Removal] ........................................................................ 235

Recording Using a Wireless Flash .........................................236

Contents

10. Recording Videos 240

Recording Videos ...................................................................240

Taking pictures while a video is being recorded .............................244

Creative Video Mode .............................................................246

[4K Live Cropping] .........................................................................249

Slow & Quick Mode................................................................252

Slow & Quick Menu ........................................................................255

Snap Movies .......................................................................... 257

Video Settings (Auto Focus) .................................................. 261

[Continuous AF] .............................................................................261

[AF Custom Setting(Video)] ...........................................................262

Video Settings (Brightness) ...................................................263

[Luminance Level] .......................................................................... 263

[ISO Sensitivity (video)] ..................................................................264

Video Settings (Audio) ........................................................... 265

[Sound Rec Level Disp.] ................................................................265

[Sound Rec Level Adj.] ...................................................................265

[Wind Noise Canceller] ..................................................................266

[Lens Noise Cut] ............................................................................266

[Built-in Mic] ...................................................................................267

[Built-in Mic Indicator] .....................................................................268

Video Settings (Display) .........................................................269

[Zebra Pattern] ............................................................................... 269

[Frame Marker] ..............................................................................270

Log Recording........................................................................271

Contents

11. Playing Back and Editing of Images 272

Playing Back Pictures ............................................................ 272

Playing Back Videos ..............................................................274

Extracting a Picture ........................................................................ 276

Switching the Display Mode ...................................................277

Enlarged Display ............................................................................ 277

Thumbnail Screen .......................................................................... 278

Calendar Playback ......................................................................... 279

Group Images ........................................................................ 280

Deleting Images .....................................................................281

[Light Composition] ................................................................ 282

[Sequence Composition] ........................................................284

[Clear Retouch] ......................................................................286

[RAW Processing] .................................................................. 288

[Video Divide] .........................................................................292

12. Camera Customization 293

Fn Buttons..............................................................................294

[Dial Operation Switch] ..........................................................299

Quick Menu Customization ....................................................301

Custom Mode.........................................................................305

My Menu ................................................................................ 307

Contents

13. Menu Guide 309

List of Menu ...........................................................................310

Menus displayed in specific recording modes ....................... 314

[Intelligent Auto] menu ...................................................................314

[Creative Video] menu ...................................................................314

[Slow & Quick] menu ......................................................................315

[Scene Guide] menu ......................................................................315

[Creative Control] menu ................................................................. 315

[Rec] Menu.............................................................................316

[Motion Picture] Menu ............................................................329

[Custom] Menu.......................................................................333

[Setup] Menu..........................................................................354

[Playback] Menu ....................................................................362

Entering Characters ...............................................................372

14. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth 373

Connecting to a Smartphone ................................................. 375

Operating the Camera with a Smartphone ............................ 388

Displaying still pictures on a TV ............................................. 400

Sending Images from the Camera .........................................402

Wi-Fi Connections..................................................................420

Send Settings and Selecting Images .....................................426

[Wi-Fi Setup] Menu ................................................................ 429

15. Connecting to Other Devices 434

Viewing on a TV ..................................................................... 436

Recording while monitoring camera images .................................. 439

Importing Images to a PC ...................................................... 440

Copying Images to a PC ................................................................ 440

Installing Software ..........................................................................442

Storing on a Recorder ............................................................445

Printing ...................................................................................446

Contents

Index ...................................................................................... 502

Trademarks and Licenses ...................................................... 509

16. Materials 449

Using Optional Accessories ................................................... 449

External Flash (optional) ................................................................ 449

External Microphones (Optional) ...................................................450

AC Adaptor (Optional)/DC Coupler (Optional) ...............................453

Monitor/Viewfinder Displays ...................................................454

Recording Screen ..........................................................................454

Playback Screen ............................................................................ 459

Message Displays ..................................................................462

Troubleshooting ..................................................................... 465

Cautions for Use .................................................................... 476

Number of Pictures That Can Be Taken and

Available Recording Time with the Battery ............................486

Number of Still Images That Can Be Taken and

Video Recording Time with Cards ..........................................489

List of Functions That Can Be Set in Each

Recording Mode.....................................................................490

Specifications .........................................................................494

Power Source

Charging

31

Charging error

34

Battery indication

35

Power save function

37

Number of pictures that

can be taken, available

recording time

486

Card

Cards that can be used

24

[Format]

40

Folder structure

441

[Folder / File Settings]

123

[No.Reset]

125

Entering characters

372

Number of pictures, length

of recording time

489

Lens

Attaching

41

Lens hood

44

Tripod Grip

Attaching, usage

72

Basic Settings

[Language]

360

[Clock Set]

47

[World Time]

354

[Beep]

356

[Reset]

69

Viewfinder

Diopter adjustment

57

Eye sensor

58

[Eye Sensor AF]

334

Display

Recording screen

454

Playback screen

459

Monitor/Viewfinder

29

454

Monitor recording

information screen

65

458

Switching display

60

Monitor/viewfinder

adjustment

358

Monitor/viewfinder

luminance

358

Display speed

357

Level gauge

61

Grid lines

345

[Histogram]

345

[Highlight]

346

AF/MF

Focus mode

126

[Continuous AF]

261

Selecting the AF mode

131

Face/eye detection

133

Movement tracking

135

[AF-ON]

213

Setting the AF sensitivity

130

329

AF/AE Lock

212

Touch AF

70

144

[Touch Pad AF]

146

[AF Assist Lamp]

335

[MF]

148

[MF Guide]

347

[MF Assist]

338

[Peaking]

344

Contents by Function

Image Stabilizer

[Stabilizer]

206

[E-Stabilization (Video)]

207

Drive

Drive mode

159

[Burst]

160

[4K PHOTO]

164

[Post Focus]

178

[Self Timer]

186

[Time Lapse Shot]

189

Recording with Stop Motion

Animation

192

Image Quality

[Picture Size]

120

[Quality]

121

RAW

121

JPEG

121

[Aspect Ratio]

119

[White Balance]

217

[Photo Style]

223

[Filter Settings]

226

[Color Space]

317

[Highlight Shadow]

318

[i.Dynamic]

319

[i.Resolution]

319

[Long Shtr NR]

322

[Shading Comp.]

322

[Diffraction Compensation]

323

[HDR]

325

Taking Pictures

Self Shot Mode

85

Recording mode

54

Quick menu

63

Zoom

153

Extended Tele Conversion

([Rec])

154

Bracket recording

197

Time recording

102

Live View Composite

Recording

103

[Multi Exp.]

327

[Shutter Type]

204

[Silent Mode]

203

Screen display

454

Exposure

[Exposure Comp.]

210

Program Shift

94

Preview mode

106

[Metering Mode]

209

AE Lock

212

[One Push AE]

296

[Touch AE]

71

ISO Sensitivity

214

[Extended ISO]

333

Flash

[Flash Mode]

229

[Flash Adjust.]

233

[Flash Synchro]

234

[Wireless Flash Setup]

236

External flash

449

Contents by Function

Video Recording

Video recording

240

Taking pictures while a

video is being recorded

244

[Ex. Tele Conv.]

([Motion Picture])

156

Creative Video mode

246

[4K Live Cropping]

249

Slow & Quick Mode

252

[Snap Movie]

257

Log recording (V-Log L)

271

Display (Video)

[Zebra Pattern]

269

[Frame Marker]

270

Image Quality (Video)

[Rec Quality]

241

[Flkr Decrease]

331

Exposure (Video)

Exposure settings

246

[S&Q Exposure Mode]

255

[Luminance Level]

263

Audio

[Sound Rec Level Disp.]

265

[Sound Rec Level Adj.]

265

Mute

265

Wind noise reduction

266

Built-in microphone setting

([Self Shot])

88

[Built-in Mic]

267

[Built-in Mic Indicator]

268

External microphone

450

[Wind Cut]

452

Playback

[Auto Review]

342

Playing back pictures

272

Playing back videos

274

Thumbnail display

278

Calendar display

279

Enlarged display

277

Group images

280

Saving 4K photos

170

Viewing on a TV

436

Deleting

281

Screen display

459

[Slide Show]

363

Editing of Images

Focus Stacking

183

[Light Composition]

282

[Sequence Composition]

284

[Clear Retouch]

286

[RAW Processing]

288

[Protect]

364

[Cropping]

369

[Rating]

364

[Resize]

368

[Rotate]

369

[Video Divide]

292

Customization

[Custom] menu

333

Function button

294

Custom recording mode

305

My Menu

307

Quick menu

301

Dial operation

299

Contents by Function

Connecting with Other Devices

Sending images (PC)

440

Printing

446

Viewing on a TV

436

HDMI output

434

439

Wi-Fi/Bluetooth

Bluetooth connection

377

Wi-Fi connection

382

420

[Wi-Fi Setup]

429

Smartphone app “LUMIX

Sync”

375

[Remote shooting]

389

Location information

397

Sending images

([Smartphone])

393

406

Sending images ([PC])

409

Sending images ([Printer])

412

Sending images ([AV

device])

414

Sending images ([Web

service])

416

Sending images ([Cloud

Sync. Service])

418

“LUMIX CLUB”

430

Software

“PHOTOfunSTUDIO”

443

“SILKYPIX”

444

Maintenance

[Pixel Refresh]

361

1. Introduction

Before Use



Firmware of Your Camera/Lens

Firmware updates may be provided in order to improve camera capabilities or to add

functionality. For smoother recording, we recommend updating the firmware of the

camera/lens to the latest version.

• For the latest information on the firmware or to download/update the

firmware, visit the following support site:

https://panasonic.jp/support/global/cs/dsc/

(English only)

• To check the firmware version of the camera/lens, attach the lens to the camera

and select [Version Disp.] in the [Setup] menu.

• This document provides explanations for camera firmware version 1.0.



Handling of the Camera

When using the camera, be careful not to drop it, bump it, or apply

undue force. These may cause malfunction or damage to the camera

and lens.

The camera is not dust resistant, splash resistant, or waterproof.

Avoid using the camera in places with excessive dust or sand, or

where water can come into contact with the camera.

If sand, dust, or liquids such as water droplets adhere to the monitor,

wipe them off with a dry soft cloth.

– Touch operations may be incorrectly recognized.

Do not place a hand inside the camera mount.

This may cause a failure or damage because the sensor is a

precision device.

1. Introduction



Condensation (When the Lens, the Viewfinder or Monitor

is Fogged Up)

• Condensation occurs when there are temperature or humidity differences. Take

care as this may lead to soiling, mold, and malfunctions in the lens, viewfinder, and

monitor.

• If condensation occurs, turn off the camera and leave it for approx. 2 hours. The

fog will disappear naturally when the temperature of the camera becomes close to

the ambient temperature.



Be Sure to Perform Trial Recording in Advance

Perform trial recording in advance of an important event (wedding, etc.) to check that

recording can be performed normally.



No Compensation Regarding Recording

Please note that compensation cannot be provided in the event that recording could

not be performed due to a problem with the camera or a card.



Be Careful with Regard to Copyrights

Under copyright law, you may not use the images and audio you have recorded for

other than personal enjoyment without the permission of the copyright holder.

Be careful because there are cases where restrictions apply to recording even for the

purpose of personal enjoyment.



Also Read “Cautions for Use” (476)

1. Introduction

Standard Accessories

Check that all the accessories are supplied before using the camera.

• The accessories and their shape will differ depending on the country or area where

the camera was purchased.

For details on the accessories, refer to “Operating Instructions <Basic>” (supplied).

• Digital camera body is referred to as camera in this document.

• Battery pack is referred to as battery pack or battery in this document.

• The memory card is optional.

• Please dispose of all packaging appropriately.

• Keep small parts in a safe place out of the reach of children.

1. Introduction

Lenses That Can Be Used

This unit can use the dedicated lenses

compatible with the Micro Four Thirds™

System lens mount specification (Micro Four

Thirds mount).

You can also use a lens of any of the

following standards by attaching a mount

adaptor.

Lens Mount adaptor

Four Thirds™ mount

specification lens

Mount Adaptor (DMW-MA1: optional)

Leica M Mount interchangeable lens M Mount Adaptor (DMW-MA2M: optional)

Leica R Mount interchangeable lens R Mount Adaptor (DMW-MA3R: optional)



About the lens and functions

Depending on the lens used, certain functions, such as Auto Focus, Image Stabilizer,

and zoom functions, may be disabled or operate differently.

• Refer to catalogs/websites for most current information regarding supported

lenses.

https://panasonic.jp/support/global/cs/dsc/

(English only)

• The focal length noted on the Micro Four Thirds lens is equivalent to double

when converted to the 35 mm film camera. (It will be equivalent to 100 mm

lens when a 50 mm lens is used.)

1. Introduction

Memory Cards That Can Be Used

You can use the following memory cards with this camera.

• SD memory card, SDHC memory card, and SDXC memory card are referred to by

the generic name of card in this document.

SD memory card

(512 MB to 2 GB)

• The camera supports SDHC/SDXC memory cards

compliant with UHS Speed Class 3 of the UHS-I

standard.

• Operation with the Panasonic cards on the left has

been verified.

SDHC memory card

(4 GB to 32 GB)

SDXC memory card

(48 GB to 128 GB)

When using the following functions, use cards that have the correct SD

Speed Class, UHS Speed Class and Video Speed Class.

• Speed classes are standards to guarantee the minimum speed necessary for

continuous writing.

Function [Rec Quality] Speed Class

Example of

indication

Video recording

[FHD]/[HD] Class 4 or higher

[4K] UHS Speed Class 3

Video Speed Class 30 or

higher

[4K PHOTO]/

[Post Focus]

—

1. Introduction

• You can prevent the writing and deleting of data by

setting the write-protect switch

on the card to

“LOCK”.

• The data stored on a card may be damaged due to

electromagnetic waves, static electricity or a failure

of the camera or card. We recommend backing up

important data.

• Keep the memory card out of reach of children to

prevent swallowing.

1. Introduction

Names of Parts

Camera

Shoulder strap eyelet (30)

[ ] (Exposure compensation)

button (210)/

Fn button (Fn1) (294)

Charging lamp (34)/

WIRELESS connection lamp

(356, 373)

Camera on/off switch (47)

Mode dial (54)

Stereo microphone (265)

• Do not block the microphone

with a finger. Audio will be

difficult to record.

Front dial (55)

Shutter button (52)

Video rec. button (53, 240)

[ ] (Recording distance

reference mark) (152)

Flash (50, 228)

Hot shoe (hot shoe cover) (449)

• Keep the hot shoe cover out

of reach of children to prevent

swallowing.

[LVF] button (58)

Fn button (Fn3) (294)

[ ] ([Send Image (Smartphone)])

button (408)/

Fn button (Fn4) (294)

[MIC] socket (450)

Speaker (356)

Self-timer light (186)/

AF assist light (335)

Lens release button (42)

Lens lock pin

Mount

Sensor

Contact points

Lens fitting mark (41)

23 22 2120 1918 17

10 7

2 4 5

11 12 13 14 1

1. Introduction

• Use [Fn5] to [Fn9] (Touch Icons) (298)

Diopter adjustment dial (57)

Eye cup (478)

Viewfinder (58, 454)

Eye sensor (58)

Cursor buttons (56)

[

] (ISO sensitivity) ( )

(214)

[

] (White balance) ( ) (217)

[

] (Drive mode) ( ) (159)

[

] (AF Mode) ( ) (128)

[MENU/SET] button (56, 67)

[ ] (Delete) button (281)/

[Q.MENU] button (63)/

[

] (Cancel) button (68)/

Fn button (Fn2) (294)

[ ] (Playback) button (272)

Control dial (55)

[DISP.] button (60)

[HDMI] socket (434)

[USB/CHARGE] socket (33, 435)

Card/Battery door (31, 39)

Release lever (31, 39)

DC Coupler cover (453)

• When using an AC adaptor,

ensure that the Panasonic DC

Coupler (DMW-DCC11: optional)

and AC Adaptor (DMW-AC10:

optional) are used.

Tripod mount (72, 483)

• If you attempt to attach a tripod

with a screw length of 5.5 mm

(0.22 inch) or more, you may not

be able to securely fix it in place

or it may damage the camera.

Monitor (29, 454)/

Touch screen (56)

24 2526 27

373839 3640

1. Introduction

Lens

H-FS12032

1 3

5 6

2 4

H-FS35100

1 3

5 6

2 47

Lens surface

Tele

Zoom ring (153)

Wide

Contact point

Lens fitting mark (41)

Focus ring (148)

1. Introduction

Tripod grip

3 4

Camera screw

Camera stand

Fastening knob

Hand strap eyelet

Video rec. button

Shutter button

Sleep button

Grip

Connection cable

• For information on how to attach the camera and operate the tripod grip, refer to

page 72.

Monitor Displays

At the time of purchase, the monitor displays the following icons.

• For information about the icons other than those described here, refer to page 454.

2. Getting Started

Attaching a Shoulder Strap

Attach a shoulder strap to the camera with the following procedure to

prevent it from dropping.

1 2

3 4

• Pull the shoulder strap and check that it will not come out.

• Attach the opposite end of the shoulder strap with the same procedure.

• Use the shoulder strap around your shoulder.

– Do not wrap the strap around your neck.

It may result in injury or accident.

• Do not leave the shoulder strap where an infant can reach it.

– It may result in an accident by mistakenly wrapping around the neck.

2. Getting Started

Charging the Battery

Insert the battery in the camera and charge it.

• The battery that can be used with the camera is DMW-BLG10. (As of

June 2020)

• The battery is not charged at the time of purchase. Charge the battery

before use.

• Check that this unit is turned off.

Battery Insertion

• Always use genuine Panasonic batteries (DMW-BLG10).

• If you use other batteries, we cannot guarantee the quality of this product.

1 2

3 4

Make sure to insert the battery in the correct orientation.

Check that the lever is holding the battery in place.

2. Getting Started



Removing the Battery

Push the lever in the direction of the

arrow.

• Remove the battery after use.

(The battery will drain if left inserted in the camera for a long period of time.)

• To remove the battery, turn the camera off and wait until the LUMIX

indicator on the screen goes off. (Failure to wait may cause the camera to

malfunction and may damage the card or recorded data.)

• The battery becomes warm after use, during charging, and immediately

after charging.

The camera also becomes warm during use. This is not a malfunction.

• Be careful when removing the battery as the battery will jump out.

2. Getting Started

Charging battery

Charging time Approx. 190 min.

• Using the camera body and the supplied AC adaptor.

• The indicated charging time is for when the battery has been discharged

completely.

The charging time may vary depending on how the battery has been used.

The charging time for the battery in hot/cold environments or a battery that has not

been used for a long time may be longer than normal.

• Use the products supplied with the camera for charging.

Set the camera on/off switch to [OFF].

• The camera cannot be charged when it is turned on.

Insert the battery into the camera.

Connect the camera [USB/CHARGE] socket and the AC

adaptor using the USB connection cable.

• Hold the plugs and insert them straight in or pull them straight out.

(Inserting these at an angle may cause deformation or malfunction)

Insert the AC adaptor into the electrical outlet.

• The charging lamp blinks red and charging begins. (34)

2. Getting Started



Charging lamp indications

Charging lamp (Red)

On: Charging in progress

Off: Charging complete

Flashing: Charging error

• You can also charge the battery by connecting a USB device (PC, etc.) and

the camera with the USB connection cable.

In that case, charging may take a while.

• Do not use any other USB connection cables except the supplied one.

This may cause malfunction.

• Do not use any other AC adaptors except the supplied one.

This may cause malfunction.

• After charging, disconnect the connection to the power source.

• When the charging lamp is blinking, the battery is not charging properly.

– The temperature of the battery or surroundings is either too high or too

low. Try charging at an ambient temperature between 10 °C and 30 °C

(50 °F and 86 °F).

– The terminals of the battery are dirty.

Remove the battery and wipe off the dirt with a dry cloth.

• Even when the camera on/off switch is set to [OFF] thus turning the camera

off, it consumes power.

When the camera will not be used for a long time, remove the power plug

from the electrical outlet in order to save power.

2. Getting Started

Notifications Regarding Charging



Power Indications

75% or higher

74% to 50%

49% to 25%

24% or below

Blinking in

red

Low battery

• Charge or replace the battery.

• The battery level indicated on the screen is approximate.

2. Getting Started

• To ensure that safe products are used, we recommend that a genuine

Panasonic battery pack is used. There is a possibility that other

battery packs may lead to fire or explosion. Please be advised that we

are not liable for any accident or failure occurring as a result of use of

a counterfeit battery pack.

• Do not leave any metal items (such as clips) near the contact areas of the

power plug.

Otherwise, a fire and/or electric shocks may be caused by short-circuiting or

the resulting heat generated.

• Do not use the AC adaptor or USB connection cables on other devices.

This may cause a malfunction.

• Do not use USB extension cables or USB conversion adaptors.

• The battery can be charged even when it still has some charge left, but it is

not recommended that the battery charge be frequently topped up while the

battery is fully charged.

(Since characteristic swelling may occur.)

• If there is a power outage or other problem with the electrical outlet, then

charging may not complete successfully.

Reconnect the power plug.

• Do not connect to keyboard or printer USB ports, or to USB hubs.

• If the connected PC enters sleep status, then charging may stop.

2. Getting Started

[Economy]

This is a function to automatically turn the camera to sleep (power save)

status or turn off the viewfinder/monitor if no operation is performed for a

set time. Reduces battery consumption.

[ ] Select [Economy]

[Sleep Mode] Sets the amount of time until the camera is put to sleep.

[Sleep Mode(Wi-Fi)]

Sets the camera to sleep 15 minutes after being

disconnected from Wi-Fi.

[Auto LVF/Monitor

Off]

Sets the amount of time it takes for the viewfinder/monitor

to turn off.

(The camera is not turned off.)

[Power Save LVF

Shooting]

Puts the camera to sleep when the recording screen is

being displayed on the monitor when automatic viewfinder/

monitor switching is active.

[Time]

Sets the amount of time until the camera is

put to sleep.

[Display]

Sets the screen where the camera is put to

sleep.

[Only Monitor Info.]:

Puts the camera to sleep only when the

control panel (60) is displayed.

[All Live View]:

Puts the camera to sleep from any screen

during recording standby.

• To recover from [Sleep Mode], [Sleep Mode(Wi-Fi)], or [Power Save LVF Shooting],

perform one of the following operations:

– Press the shutter button halfway.

– Set the camera on/off switch to [OFF] and then [ON] again.

• To recover from [Auto LVF/Monitor Off], press any button.

2. Getting Started

• [Economy] is not available in the following cases:

– While connected to a PC or printer

– During video recording/video playback

– When recording with [4K Pre-Burst]

– During a [Time Lapse Shot]

– When recording with [Stop Motion Animation] (when [Auto Shooting] is

set)

– When recording with [Live View Composite]

– When recording with [Multi Exp.]

– During a [Slide Show]

– During HDMI output for recording

2. Getting Started

Inserting Cards (Optional)

• Make sure that the camera is turned off.

1 2

Do not touch the card connection

contacts.



Card Access Indications

The access indication displays red while the card is

being accessed.



Removing a Card

Push the card until it clicks and then

pull the card out straight.

Press

Pull out

2. Getting Started

• To remove the card, turn the camera off and wait until the LUMIX

indicator on the screen goes off. (Failure to wait may cause the camera to

malfunction and may damage the card or recorded data.)

• The card may be warm just after the camera has been used. Be careful

when removing.

• Do not perform the following operations during access.

The camera may operate incorrectly or the card and recorded images

may be damaged.

– Turn off the camera.

– Remove the battery or card, or disconnect the AC adaptor (optional) or

DC coupler (optional).

– Subject the camera to vibration, impacts, or static electricity.

Formatting Cards (Initialization)

Format the cards with the camera before use.

• When a card is formatted, all of the data stored in the card is erased

and cannot be restored.

Save a backup of necessary data before formatting the card.

[ ] Select [Format]

• Do not turn off the camera or perform another operation during formatting.

• Take care not to turn off the camera while formatting is in progress.

• If the card has been formatted with a PC or other device, format it again with

the camera.

2. Getting Started

Attaching a Lens

• Make sure that the camera is turned off.

• Change the lens in a location where there is not a lot of dirt and dust. If dirt

or dust gets on the lens, refer to page 477.

• Change the lens while the lens cap is attached.

• When attaching or detaching the interchangeable lens (H-FS12032/H-

FS35100), retract the lens barrel.

Align the lens fitting marks on the lens and camera and

then rotate the lens in the direction of the arrow.

● Attach the lens by rotating it until it clicks.

1 2

• Insert the lens straight in.

Inserting this at an angle to attach it may damage the camera lens mount.

2. Getting Started



Removing a Lens

Set the camera on/off switch to [OFF].

While pressing the lens release button ,

rotate the lens in the direction of the arrow

until it stops and then remove it.

• After removing the lens, be sure to attach the body cap and the lens rear

cap.

2. Getting Started

Extending/retracting the lens

<when the interchangeable lens

(H-FS12032/H-FS35100) is attached>



How to Extend the Lens

Rotate the zoom ring in the direction

of arrow

from position (the lens is

retracted) to position

<12 mm to 32 mm

(H-FS12032), 35 mm to 100 mm

(H-FS35100)> to extend the lens.

• When the lens barrel is retracted, images

cannot be recorded.

The lens is retracted

Example: H-FS12032



How to Retract the Lens

Rotate the zoom ring in the direction

of arrow

from position <12 mm to

32 mm (H-FS12032), 35 mm to 100 mm

(H-FS35100)> to position

to retract the

lens.

• The zoom ring will seem to click into the

12 mm position (H-FS12032) or 35 mm

position (H-FS35100), but continue to rotate

the lens until it reaches position

• When you are not recording images, we

recommend that you retract the lens.

The lens is extended

2. Getting Started

Attaching the Lens Hood

When recording into strong backlight, irregular reflection may occur within

the lens. The lens hood reduces the inclusion of unwanted light in the

recorded images and lowers the drop in contrast. The lens hood cuts off

excess lighting and improves the picture quality.

• The interchangeable lens (H-FS12032) does not have a lens hood.

To attach the lens hood (flower shape) that came

with the interchangeable lenses (H-FS35100)

Hold the lens hood by placing your

fingers as shown in the figure.

• Do not hold the lens hood in such a way that

it will be bent.

Align the mark ( ) on the

lens hood with the mark on the

tip of the lens.

Rotate the lens hood in the

direction of the arrow until it

clicks and then align the mark

( ) on the lens hood with

the mark on the tip of the lens.

2. Getting Started



Removing the lens hood

Turn the lens hood in the direction of the

arrow to detach it.



Temporarily Storing the Lens Hood

Turn the lens hood in the direction of the arrow to detach it.

Align the mark ( ) on the lens hood with the mark on the tip of the

lens.

Turn the lens hood in the direction of the arrow until it clicks into place.

2. Getting Started

Adjusting the Monitor Direction and

Angle

At the time of purchase, the monitor is stowed in the camera body. Turn

the monitor surface out before use.

180°



Free angle shooting

You can rotate 180° towards the lens and 90° downwards.

Taking pictures at a low angle Taking pictures at a high angle



Taking pictures of yourself

If you rotate the monitor as shown in

the figure, the camera will switch to

Self Shot Mode. (85)

• The angles of adjustment are only guides.

• Do not apply an excessive force to the monitor. This may cause damage or

malfunction.

• When not using the camera, close the monitor with the monitor surface

facing in.

2. Getting Started

Setting the Clock

(When Turning On for the First Time)

When you turn the camera on for the first time, a screen to set the clock

and home area appears.

Be sure to set these settings before use to ensure images are recorded

with the correct date and time information.

Set the camera on/off switch

to [ON].

● If the language select screen is not

displayed, proceed to Step

When [Please set the language] appears, press .

Set the language.

● Press to select the language and then press .

When [Please set the clock] appears, press .

Set the clock.

: Select an item (year, month,

day, hour or minute).

: Select a value.

To set the display order and time

display format

● Press to select the time zone

[Style] and then press

, the

screen for setting the display order

and time display format appears.

2. Getting Started

Confirm your selection.

● Press .

When [The clock setting has been completed.] appears,

press

When [Please set the home area] is displayed, press .

Set the home area.

● Press to select your home area

and press

• If you are using Daylight Savings

[

], press . (The time will move

forward by 1 hour.)

To return to the normal time, press

again.

Time difference from GMT (Greenwich

Mean Time)

● When an interchangeable lens (H-FS12032/H-FS35100) is used

and the lens barrel is retracted, recording is not possible (a

message will be displayed). Rotate the zoom ring to extend the

lens. (43)

2. Getting Started

• If the camera is used without setting the clock, it will be set to 0:00:00, 1st

January, 2020.

• Clock settings are maintained for approx. 3 months using the built-in clock

battery even without the battery.

(Leave the fully-charged battery in the camera for approx. 24 hours to

charge the built-in battery.)

• [Clock Set] can be changed from the menu:

– [

] [Clock Set]

3. Basic Operations

Basic Recording Operations

How to Hold the Camera

To minimize camera shake, hold the camera so that it will not move during

recording.

Hold the camera with both hands, keep your arms still at your side,

and stand with your feet shoulder width apart.

● Hold the camera firmly by wrapping your right hand around the camera

grip.

● Support the lens from below with your left hand.

• Do not block the flash, AF Assist Lamp, microphone, or speaker with your fingers

or other objects.

Microphone

AF Assist Lamp

Speaker

3. Basic Operations



Vertical Orientation Detection Function

This function detects when pictures were

recorded with the camera held vertically

orientated.

With the default settings, pictures are

automatically played back vertically

oriented. (370)

• When the camera is tilted significantly up or down, the vertical orientation

detection function may not work correctly.

• Images recorded using the following functions cannot be displayed vertically

orientated:

– Video recording, [4K PHOTO], [Post Focus]

3. Basic Operations

Taking Pictures

Adjust the focus.

● Press the shutter button halfway

(press it gently).

● The aperture value and shutter

speed

are displayed.

(If the aperture value and shutter

speed are shown in red and

flashing, you do not have the

appropriate exposure, unless you

are using the flash.)

● Once the subject is in focus, the

focus indication

lights.

(When the subject is not in focus,

the indication blinks.)

Start recording.

● Press the shutter button fully (press

it further).

3. Basic Operations

• Recorded pictures can be displayed automatically by setting [Auto Review]

of the [Custom] ([Monitor / Display]) menu. You can also change the picture

display duration to your preferred setting. (342)

• With the default settings, you cannot take a picture until the subject is

brought into focus.

If you set [Focus/Release Priority] in the [Custom] ([Focus / Release

Shutter]) menu to [BALANCE] or [RELEASE], you will be able to take a

picture even when the subject is not in focus. (336)

Recording Videos

Start recording.

● Press the video rec. button.

• Release the video rec. button right after

you press it.

Stop recording.

● Press the video rec. button again.

3. Basic Operations

Selecting the Recording Mode

Rotate the mode dial.

Intelligent Auto mode (76)

Intelligent Auto Plus mode (79)

Program AE mode (93)

Aperture-Priority AE mode (95)

Shutter-Priority AE mode (98)

Manual Exposure mode (100)

Creative Video mode (246)

Slow & Quick mode (252)

Custom mode (305)

Scene Guide mode (107)

Creative Control mode (112)

3. Basic Operations

Camera Setting Operations

When changing the camera settings, operate the camera using the

following operation parts.

Front dial (55)

Control dial (55)

Cursor buttons (56)

[MENU/SET] button (56)

Touch screen (56)



Front Dial ( )/Control Dial ( )

Rotate:

Selects an item or numeric value.

3. Basic Operations



Cursor Buttons ( )

Press:

Selects an item or numeric value.



[MENU/SET] Button ( )

Press:

Confirms a setting.



Touch Screen

Operations can be performed by touching the icons, slide bars, menus,

and other items displayed on the screen.

Touch

Operation of touching and then lifting your

finger from the touch screen.

Drag

Operation of moving a finger while it

touches the touch screen.

Pinch (widen/narrow)

Operations of widening the distance

between two fingers (pinch out) and

narrowing the distance between two

fingers (pinch in) while they are touching

the touch screen.

• If you will use a commercially available monitor protection sheet, observe

the precautions for the sheet.

(Visibility and operability may be impaired depending on the type of monitor

protection sheet.)

• Touch operations can be disabled:

[

] [ ] [Touch Settings] (341)

3. Basic Operations

Display Settings

Adjusting the Viewfinder Diopter

Rotate the diopter adjustment

dial while looking through the

viewfinder.

• Adjust until you can clearly see the text on the

viewfinder.

3. Basic Operations

Switching Between the Monitor and Viewfinder

With the default settings, automatic viewfinder/monitor switching is set.

When you look through the viewfinder, the eye sensor

works and the

camera switches from monitor display to viewfinder display.

You can switch to viewfinder display or monitor display with [LVF]

Press [LVF].

Automatic viewfinder/

monitor switching

Viewfinder display Monitor display

3. Basic Operations

• If [LVF Display Speed] is set to [ECO 30fps] when the viewfinder is used,

the camera can be operated for a longer period since battery drainage is

reduced.

• In Self Shot Mode, the display automatically switches to monitor display, and

the [LVF] and eye sensor are disabled.

• The eye sensor may not work correctly due to the shape of eyeglasses, the

way the camera is held, or bright light shining around the eyepiece.

• During video playback or slide show, automatic viewfinder/monitor switching

does not work.

• To focus when looking through the viewfinder:

[

] [ ] [Eye Sensor AF] (334)

• The sensitivity of the eye sensor can be changed:

[

] [Eye Sensor] (358)

3. Basic Operations

Switching the Display Information

You can switch the viewfinder/monitor display method.

Press [DISP.].

● The display information is switched.



Recording Screen

Monitor

With information

Without

information

With information

level gauge

Without

information

level gauge

Turned off

(black)

Monitor recording

information

screen (65)

3. Basic Operations

Viewfinder

With information

Without

information

With information

level gauge

Without

information

level gauge

• You can switch the viewfinder/monitor display method:

[

] [ ] [LVF/Monitor Disp. Set] (347)

Using the level gauge

The yellow line indicates the current angle. Correct the angle of the

camera so that it matches the white line.

Horizontal

Vertical

Green (no tilt)

• Even after correcting the tilt, there may still be an error of approx. ±1°.

• When the camera is tilted significantly upwards or downwards, the level

gauge may not be displayed correctly.

• You can adjust the level gauge and reset the adjusted values in [Level

Gauge Adjust.] in the [Setup] menu. (361)

3. Basic Operations



Playback Screen

With information

Detailed

information

display

Without

information

Display without

blinking

highlights

1/5

100-0001

2020.12.1 10:00

Pressing

switches the display information. (461)

2 This is a screen without blinking highlights display that is shown when [Highlight]

of the [Custom] ([Monitor / Display]) is set to [ON].

In other than this screen, overexposed parts of the screen will blink. (346)

3. Basic Operations

Quick Menu

This menu enables you to quickly set functions that are frequently used

during recording without calling up the menu screen. You can also change

the Quick menu display method and the items to display.

Display the Quick menu.

● Press [Q.MENU].

Select a menu item.

● Rotate .

● Selection is also possible by

touching a menu item.

Select a setting item.

● Rotate .

● Selection is also possible by

touching a setting item.

Close the Quick menu.

● Press the shutter button halfway.

● You can also close the menu by

pressing [Q.MENU].

3. Basic Operations

• Some items cannot be set depending on the recording mode or camera

settings.

• The Quick menu can be customized:

[

] [ ] [Q.MENU] [CUSTOM] (301)

3. Basic Operations

Monitor recording information screen

This screen allows you to view the current recording settings on the

monitor.

• This screen is displayed only when [Monitor Info. Disp.] in the [Custom] ([Monitor /

Display]) menu is set to [ON].

Display the monitor recording

information screen.

● Press [DISP.] several times.

Touch the items.

● The setting screens for each of the

items are displayed.

Change the setting.

Example) Changing the AF Mode

● Touch the setting item.

• Refer to the pages explaining each item

for information on how to change the

settings.

(When [Set] is displayed on the monitor)

Touch [Set].

3. Basic Operations

Steps 2 to 4 can also be changed using

the following operations.

Press [Q.MENU].

Press (or rotate ) to select

an item.

Rotate to change the settings values.

• Some items cannot be set depending on the recording mode or camera

settings.

3. Basic Operations

Menu Operation Methods

In this camera, the menu is used for setting a wide variety of functions and

performing camera customizations.

Menu operations can be performed using the cursors, dial, or by touch.

Display the menu.

● Press .

Switch the menu type.

Press .

Press to select a tab such as

[

• You can also select the tab by rotating

or .

Press .

Select a menu item.

● Press to select a menu item

and then press

● You can also perform the same

operation by rotating

to select

the menu item and then pressing

3. Basic Operations

Select a setting item and then

confirm your selection.

● Press to select a setting item

and then press

● You can also perform the same

operation by rotating

to select

the setting item and then pressing

Close the menu.

● Press the shutter button halfway.

● You can also close the menu by

pressing [

] several times.

• For details about menu items, refer to Menu Guide. (309)



Displaying Descriptions About Menu Items and Settings

If you press [DISP.] while a menu item

or setting item is selected, a description

about the item is displayed on the screen.

3. Basic Operations



Grayed Out Menu Items

Menu items that cannot be set are

displayed grayed out.

In some setting conditions, the reason the

setting is disabled is displayed when you

press

if you select a grayed-out item.

[Reset]

Return each of the following settings to the default setting:

– Recording settings

– Network settings (settings of [Wi-Fi Setup] and [Bluetooth])

– Custom settings ([Face Recog.] and [Profile Setup] settings)

– Setup/custom settings

(except for [Wi-Fi Setup], [Bluetooth], [Face Recog.] and [Profile Setup] settings)

[ ] Select [Reset]

• When the setup/custom settings are reset, the following settings are also

reset:

– The [World Time] setting

– The [Travel Date] setting (Departure date, Return date, [Location])

– The settings of [Rotate Disp.], [Picture Sort] and [Delete Confirmation] in

the [Playback] menu

• Folder numbers and clock settings will not be reset.

3. Basic Operations

Recording Using Touch Functions

Touch AF/Touch Shutter

Touch functions allow you to focus on the point that you touch, release the

shutter, etc.

Touch [ ].

Touch the icon.

● The icon switches each time you

touch it.

Touch AF Focus on the Touched Position.

Touch Shutter Record with focus on the point touched.

OFF —

(When set to anything other

than OFF)

Touch the subject.

• When the Touch Shutter fails, the AF area first turns red and then

disappears.

• Refer to “Operations on the AF area movement screen” on page 134 for

information about operations to move the AF area.

• It is also possible to optimize the focus and brightness on the touched

position:

[

] [ ] [Touch Settings] [Touch AF] [AF+AE] (144)

3. Basic Operations

Touch AE

This function adjusts the brightness according to a touched position.

When a subject’s face appears dark, you can make the screen brighter to

match the face.

Touch [ ].

● The Touch AE settings screen

appears.

Touch the subject to which you

wish to adjust the brightness.

• To return the position to which to adjust

the brightness to the center, touch

[Reset].

SetSet

ResetReset

Touch [Set].



How to Disable Touch AE

Touch [ ].

• When the following function is being used, Touch AE is not available:

– Self Shot Mode

– [Digital Zoom] (DC-G100 only)

– [4K Live Cropping]

• You can also adjust both the focus and brightness to those of the position

you touch. (At this time, Touch AE is not available):

[

] [ ] [Touch Settings] [Touch AF] [AF+AE] (144)

3. Basic Operations

Recording with the Tripod grip

It can be used as a grip for recording while walking. You can take pictures

or record video without operating the camera. It can also be used as a

tripod.

• Use the tripod grip supplied with the DC-G100V/DC-G110V or the tripod grip

(DMW-SHGR1: optional).

• Insert the battery pack and a memory card into the camera before mounting

it to the tripod grip.

• Do not use any other tripod grips except the supplied one or a genuine

Panasonic tripod grip (DMW-SHGR1: optional).

• After usage, remove the tripod grip from the camera.

• Be careful not to get your finger or any other part of your body caught.

• The carrying capacity (total mass of the loading camera body, lens, battery,

and other attached accessories) is 1.2 kg (2.65 lb).

(When the carrying capacity is exceeded, it may cause injuries or damage.)

• Confirm that the tripod grip is securely attached to the camera before using

it.

• Do not carry the tripod grip only with the hand strap while the camera is

attached.

• Depending on the camera angle or the lens and accessories attached, it

may not balance and become unstable. Do not use it as a tripod when the

tripod grip is in an unstable state.

• Do not carry it holding only the legs while the tripod’s legs are open.

Attaching the Hand Strap

Hand strap eyelet

3. Basic Operations

Attaching the camera to a tripod grip

• Hold the camera and tripod grip tightly, and securely attach them so

that they do not drop.

• For removal, perform the steps backwards.

Set the Camera on/off switch to [OFF].

Loosen the camera stand.

● Turn the fastening knob in the direction of .

Camera stand

Fastening knob

Attach the camera to a tripod grip.

● Align the camera screw with the tripod mount

on the camera. Turn the camera stand in the

direction of

, and tighten it firmly.

Lock the camera stand.

● Adjust the orientation of the camera. Turn

the fastening knob in the direction of

, and

tighten it firmly.

• The camera stand can be tilted 40 degrees in any

direction.

Connect the camera with the

connection cable.

● Connect the connection cable

into the camera’s [USB/CHARGE]

socket.

• Check the direction of the terminals and

plug in/out straight holding onto the plug.

(Inserting at an angle can deform the

terminal and cause malfunction.)

3. Basic Operations

Using as a grip

To prevent dropping, be sure to attach the supplied strap and fit it to your

wrist.

Close the tripod grip’s legs, put

your wrist through the hand

strap and grip it.

● Slide adjuster , and secure the

hand strap onto your wrist.

● When adjusting the direction of

the camera, hold the camera with

your hand and loosen the fastening

knob to adjust the direction. After

adjusting, securely tighten the

fastening knob

Press the button and record.



Self-shooting style

If you attach the camera to the direction shown

and rotate the monitor, you can record in Self

Shot Mode. (85)

3. Basic Operations



Taking pictures

Focus on the subject.

• Press the shutter button halfway (press lightly).

Take a picture.

• Press the shutter button fully (push the button all the

way).



Recording video

Start recording.

• Press the video rec. button .

• Immediately release the video rec. button after pressing it.

End recording.

• Press the video rec. button again.



Sleep button ( )

Press: The camera will go into a sleep (power save) status.

• This is the same state as [Sleep Mode] under [Economy]. (37)

• When the camera is under a status where [Sleep Mode] does not work, the camera

will not enter sleep status.

• The camera can enter sleep status even when [Sleep Mode] is set to [OFF].

• To wake the camera up from sleep, press the shutter button halfway down.

Using as a tripod

Open the legs of the tripod grip.

Place it in a level and stable place.

● When adjusting the direction of the camera,

hold the camera with your hand and loosen

the fastening knob to adjust the direction. After

adjusting, securely tighten the fastening knob.

4. Recording mode

For information about the [ ] mode and [ ] mode, refer to pages

246 and 252, and for the [

] mode, refer to page 305.

Intelligent Auto Mode

In the [ ] mode (Intelligent Auto mode), the camera detects the scene to

set the optimal recording settings automatically to match the subject and

recording conditions.

Set the mode dial to [ ].

● In default settings, the mode is set

to Intelligent Auto Plus Mode.

Aim the camera at the subject.

● When the camera detects the

scene, the recording mode icon

changes.

(Automatic Scene Detection)

Adjust the focus.

● Press the shutter button halfway.

● Once the subject is in focus, the

focus indication lights.

(When the subject is not in focus,

the indication blinks.)

4. Recording mode

Start recording.

● Press the shutter button fully.

• Backlight compensation operates automatically to prevent subjects from

appearing dark when there is a backlight.

4. Recording mode



Types of Automatic Scene Detection

: Scenes detected during picture taking

: Scenes detected during video recording

[i-Portrait]

[i-Scenery]

[i-Macro]

[i-Night Portrait]

[i-Night Scenery]

[i-Handheld Night

Shot]

[i-Food]

[i-Baby]

[i-Sunset]

[i-Low Light]

[

]/[ ]

1 Displayed only when using flash.

2 Displayed only when [iHandheld Night Shot] is [ON].

3 Displayed when children (that are registered in the camera with Face

Recognition) under 3 years old are recognized.

• If none of the scenes are applicable, it is recorded with [ ]/[ ]

(standard setting).

• When [Face Recog.] is set to [ON] and if the camera recognizes a face

similar to a registered face, [R] is displayed on the upper right corner of the

[

], [ ], and [ ] icons.

• Different scene types may be selected for the same subject depending on

the recording conditions.

4. Recording mode



Intelligent Auto Plus Mode

[ ] allows you to adjust some settings such as the brightness and

color tone while also using [

] for other settings so that you can record

pictures more suited to your preferences.

( : Available, –: Not available)

Intelligent Auto Plus

Mode

Intelligent Auto Mode

Setting the color tone

–

Setting the brightness

(exposure)

–

Defocus control

function

–

Menus that can be set Many Few

[ ]/[ ] Select [Intelligent Auto Mode]

Settings: [

] (Intelligent Auto Mode)/

[

] (Intelligent Auto Plus Mode)

• It is also possible to display the selection screen by

touching the recording mode icon in recording screen.

4. Recording mode



[AF Mode]

[AF Mode] is automatically set to [ ] ([Face/Eye Detection]).

• If you touch the subject, the camera switches to [ ] ([Tracking]) and the AF

tracking function starts operating.

– The AF tracking function will also work if you press [

] ( ) and then press the

shutter button halfway.

• Each press of [

] ( ) changes the AF mode.

• For information about AF modes, refer to page 133 and 135.



Flash

When recording using a flash, the camera switches to the appropriate

flash mode for the recording conditions.

• When [ ] or [ ], Red-Eye Removal works.

• When Slow Sync. ([

], [ ]), be careful with regard to camera shake

because the shutter speed becomes slow.

• In Intelligent Auto Plus Mode, you can set [Flash Mode] under [Flash] in the

[Rec] menu to [

] (Forced Flash Off) even when the flash is open.

4. Recording mode

[Intelligent Auto] menu



[iHandheld Night Shot]

If a night scene is detected automatically while the unit is being handheld,

[iHandheld Night Shot] can record a still picture with less jitter and less

noise without using a tripod by combining a burst of pictures.

[ ]/[ ] Select [iHandheld Night Shot]

Settings: [ON]/[OFF]

• The flash is fixed to the [ ] (Forced Flash Off) setting.



[iHDR]

When there is, for example, a strong contrast between the background

and the subject, [iHDR] records multiple still pictures with differing

exposures and combines them to create a single still picture rich in

gradation.

[ ]/[ ] Select [iHDR]

Settings: [ON]/[OFF]

• [iHDR] is activated when required. When activated, [ ] will be displayed on the

screen.

• Since a burst of still pictures are combined after they have been recorded, it will be

a few moments before you can record another picture.

• In the case of composition from a burst, afterimages may appear if the subject was

moving.

4. Recording mode

• The angle of view becomes slightly narrow.

• After the shutter button has been pressed, do not move the camera during

the burst operation.

• This function will not work for still pictures while video is being recorded.

• [iHDR] and [iHandheld Night Shot] are not available when using the

following functions:

– Self Shot Mode

– [Burst]

– [4K PHOTO], [Post Focus]

– [Bracket]

– [

], [ ], [ ] ([Quality])

– [Ex. Tele Conv.] ([Rec])

– [Time Lapse Shot]

– [Stop Motion Animation] (when [Auto Shooting] is set)

• [iHDR] does not work when firing the flash.

4. Recording mode

Taking pictures with different color tones, degrees of

blurriness, and brightness



Setting coloring

Press [ ] ( ) to display the setting

screen.

Rotate or to adjust color.

• Press the shutter button halfway to return to

the recording screen.

• The color setting will return to the default

level (center point) when this unit is turned

off or the camera is switched to another

Recording mode.



Setting brightness

Press [ ].

Rotate or to adjust brightness.

• Press the shutter button halfway to return to

the recording screen.

4. Recording mode



Defocusing the background (Defocus control function)

Press [ ], and then press [Fn4].

8.05.64.0

250 125 60 30 15

Rotate or to adjust the

background defocusing condition.

• Press the shutter button halfway to return to

the recording screen.

• AF Mode is set to [

The position of the AF area can be set by

touching the screen. (Its size cannot be

changed)



With touch screen operations

Touch [ ].

Touch the item you want to set.

[

]: Coloring

[

]: Degree of defocusing

[

]: Brightness

Drag the slide bar or exposure meter

to set.

• Press the shutter button halfway to return to

the recording screen.

• Depending on the lens used, you may hear a sound from the lens while

operating Defocus Control. This is due to the aperture operation of the lens

and is not a malfunction.

• Depending on the lens used, operational sound of the Defocus Control may

be recorded during the recording of a video when the function is used.

• At the brightness setting screen you can assign the exposure bracket to

[

] [ ] [Exposure Comp. Disp. Setting] (339)

4. Recording mode

Self Shot Mode ([Self Shot])

You can easily take pictures of yourself while looking at the screen.

Rotate the monitor as shown in

the figure.

● A mirror image will be displayed on

the monitor.

● The touch operation is enabled.

● [Quick AF] is set to [ON]. (334)

Touch the item.

• For details, refer to page 86.

4K Selfie (89)

Built-in microphone setting ([Self Shot])

(88)

Touch [Exit].

Decide on your poses while looking at the monitor.

● The AF area is displayed around the subject’s face by the Face/Eye

Detection function.

• The camera will automatically display a mark indicating the sound pickup

target around the AF area depending on the state of the subject. (268)

• If [

] in AF Mode is not available with the current Recording Mode, an

available focus setting for each Recording Mode will be used.

4. Recording mode

Take the picture.

● For information on how to start

taking a picture, refer to [Shutter]

(87)

• Regardless of the [Shutter] setting,

you can start recording by pressing the

shutter button or video rec. button.

• With the default setting, it will focus automatically after the countdown ends.

([AF After Countdown] (350))



Setting items

: Default settings

[Soft Skin]

OFF/1 to 10

Makes people’s faces look brighter and their skin tones

look softer.

[Filter Select]

[ ] (No effect), [ ] (Expressive), [ ] (Retro),

[

] (High key), [ ] (Monochrome),

[

] (Toy effect)

Add a filter effect appropriate to [Self Shot].

[Background

Control]

[ ] (Off), [ ] (Defocus), [ ] (Clear)

Changes the degree of defocusing for the background

of detected faces.

[Slimming Mode]

OFF/1 to 10

Makes people look slimmer.

4. Recording mode

[Shutter]

[

] (Shutter button only), [ ] (Touch),

[

] (Buddy), [ ] (Face)

Sets the way the shutter is released.

[

] (Shutter button only): Push the shutter button

to take pictures or the video rec. button to record video.

[

] (Touch): Focuses on the touched position before

taking a picture. (Records a video when in [

[

] mode.)

[

] (Buddy): The shutter is released when two faces

detected move closer to each other.

• Even if several subjects are present, Face/Eye

Detection detects only a maximum of two faces.

[ ] (Face): The shutter is released when a face is

covered with a hand or other object and then detected

again.

[Countdown]/

[Shots]

OFF/1 to 10 (

Set the number of seconds before recording

([Countdown]).

[ ] (1 pic.), [ ] (2 pic.), [ ] (3 pic.),

[

] (4 pic.)

Set the number of consecutive shots ([Shots]).

4. Recording mode



Recording self-shot videos with automatically adjusted

settings

The camera records people well-lit and with clear backgrounds by

automatically focusing on them. This is good for recording self-shot videos

to upload to social media.

Set the mode dial to one of the following.

• [ ] mode, [ ] mode, [ ] mode, [ ] mode

• [

] mode (Set [Exposure Mode] to [P])

• [

] mode (Set [S&Q Exposure Mode] to [P])

• You can record videos in recording modes other than the above, but it will

not be set as self-shot videos with automatically adjusted settings.

Built-in microphone setting ([Self Shot])

You can set the sound pickup range when using the built-in microphone

by touching an icon on the screen.

Touch [ ].

4. Recording mode

Select and touch the sound

pickup range.

Settings: [AUTO]/[SURROUND]/

[FRONT]/[TRACKING]/

[BACK]

• For details, refer to page 267.

• This does not work with [Built-in Mic] of the video menu.

4K Selfie

You can switch to 4K Photo Mode and take pictures of yourself.

Touch [ ].

Select and touch the recording

method.

• In Self Shot Mode, you can take pictures

with [4K Burst (Wide-angle)], a setting

that allows you to include a wider

background.

(In modes other than Self Shot Mode, the

setting will switch to [4K Burst].)

4. Recording mode

[4K Burst (Wide-

angle)]

A 4K Photo Mode for taking selfies with an angle of

view wider than that of [4K Burst]

Burst speed: 15 pictures/second

Audio recording: Not available

• For information about other types of 4K Photo Mode and the recording

methods for 4K Photo Mode, etc., refer to (166)

Decide on your poses while looking at the monitor.

(When [4K Burst (Wide-angle)] is selected)

Press the shutter button halfway.

Press and hold the shutter button

fully for as long as you want to

perform recording.

Press and hold

Recording is performed

• Recording will start approximately

0.5 seconds after you press the

shutter button fully. Therefore, press

the button fully slightly in advance.

• [Continuous AF] does not work during

recording. The focus is fixed in the first

picture.

• If you stop recording burst pictures

too soon, the camera may continue

recording until a certain time.

• When recording 4K photos, the angle of view becomes narrower. (Except

when recording with [4K Burst (Wide-angle)])

• For 4K photo recording, only [Filter Select] can be set.

4. Recording mode

• If you set [Self Shot] to [OFF], the mode will not switch to Self Shot Mode

even if you rotate the monitor. (350)

• Be careful not to look at the light from the flash and the AF Assist Lamp

directly.

• When the [Soft Skin] is set

– If you set the strength of the effect to [2] or greater, the recording screen

display will be more delayed than normal like a frame dropping. Also,

when you record, it will require some time to process the image before

the next shot.

– The smoothing effect is applied to the part that has a similar tone to the

complexion of a subject, as well.

– This mode may not be effective under insufficient lighting.

• When [Background Control] is set to [

] (Defocus), the recording screen

display will be more delayed than normal like a frame dropping. Also, when

you record, it will require some time to process the image before the next

shot.

• If the lighting is insufficient when [Background Control] is set to [

]

(Clear), you may not be able to take pictures as desired.

• When the following functions are being used, Self Shot Mode is not

available:

– [Time Lapse Shot]

– [Stop Motion Animation]

– [Multi Exp.]

– [Live View Composite]

• [Soft Skin] and a [

] (Defocus) setting of [Background Control] are not

available when using the following functions:

– Video recording

– [Glistening Water], [Clear Nightscape], [Cool Night Sky], [Warm Glowing

Nightscape], [Artistic Nightscape], [Glittering Illuminations], [Handheld

Night Shot], [Soft Image of a Flower], [Appetizing Food], [Cute Dessert]

([

] mode)

– [

] mode

– Manual Focus

4. Recording mode

• When the following functions are being used, a [Background Control] setting

of [

] (Clear) is not available:

– Video recording

– Any mode for [

] mode other than [Silky Skin]/[Monochrome]

– [

] mode, [ ] mode, [ ] mode, [ ] mode

• When [Filter Settings] in the [Rec] / [Motion Picture] menu is not available,

[Filter Select] in the Self Shot Mode is also unavailable.

• When recording video, [Slimming Mode] and [Shots] cannot be used.

• [

] (Buddy) and [ ] (Face) are not available when using the following

functions:

– [

] mode, [ ] mode

– Recording Modes which do not allow setting to [

] of AF Mode (132)

– Manual Focus

4. Recording mode

Program AE Mode

In [ ] mode (Program AE mode), the camera automatically sets the

shutter speed and aperture value for the brightness of the subject.

You can also use Program Shift to change combinations of shutter speed

and aperture values while keeping the same exposure.

Set the mode dial to [ ].

Press the shutter button

halfway.

● This displays the aperture value

and shutter speed value

on the

recording screen.

• If the correct exposure is not achieved,

the aperture value and shutter speed

blink red.

Start recording.

4. Recording mode



Program Shift

You can change the shutter speed and aperture value combination set

automatically by the camera while maintaining the same exposure.

With this, you can, for example, make the background more defocused

by decreasing the aperture value or capture a moving subject more

dynamically by slowing the shutter speed.

Press the shutter button halfway.

• This displays the aperture value and shutter speed value on the recording

screen. (Approx. 10 seconds)

Rotate or while the values are

displayed.

• This displays the Program Shift icon on

the recording screen.

Start recording.

Canceling Program Shift

– Set the camera on/off switch to [OFF].

– Rotate

or until the Program Shift icon disappears.

• Program Shift is not available when using the following functions:

– Flash

– [4K PHOTO], [Post Focus]

– [

] (ISO sensitivity)

• You can customize dial operations:

[

] [ ] [Dial Set.] [Rotation (F/SS)] (340)

• The recording screen can display an exposure meter indicating the

relationship between aperture value and shutter speed:

[

] [ ] [Expo.Meter] (347)

4. Recording mode

Aperture-Priority AE Mode

In [ ] mode (Aperture-Priority AE mode), you can set the aperture value

before recording.

The shutter speed will be automatically set by the camera.

Smaller aperture values

It becomes easier to defocus the

background.

Larger aperture values

It becomes easier to bring everything

into focus including the background.

Set the mode dial to [ ].

4. Recording mode

Set the aperture value.

● Rotate or .

Start recording.

• If the correct exposure is not achieved

when the shutter button is pressed

halfway, the aperture value and the

shutter speed blink red.



Depth of Field Characteristics

Aperture value Small Large

Focal length of lens Telephoto Wide-angle

Distance to subject Near More distant

Depth of field

(area in sharp focus)

Shallow (narrow)

Example: When you want

to take an image with a

defocused background.

Deep (wide)

Example: When you

want to take an image

with focus as far as the

background.

4. Recording mode

• The effects of the set aperture value and shutter speed will not be visible on

the recording screen.

To check the effects on the recording screen, use [Preview]. (106)

• The brightness of the recording screen and of actual recorded images may

differ.

Check the images on the playback screen.

• When using a lens with an aperture ring, set the position of the aperture ring

to other than [A] to use the aperture value of the lens.

• You can customize dial operations:

[

] [ ] [Dial Set.] [Assign Dial (F/SS)]/[Rotation (F/SS)] (340)

• The recording screen can display an exposure meter indicating the

relationship between aperture value and shutter speed:

[

] [ ] [Expo.Meter] (347)

4. Recording mode

Shutter-Priority AE Mode

In [ ] mode (Shutter-Priority AE mode), you can set the shutter speed

before recording.

The aperture value will be automatically set by the camera.

Slower shutter speeds

It becomes easier to capture motion

Faster shutter speeds

It becomes easier to freeze motion

Set the mode dial to [ ].

4. Recording mode

Set the shutter speed.

● Rotate or .

Start recording.

• If the correct exposure is not achieved

when the shutter button is pressed

halfway, the aperture value and the

shutter speed blink red.

• The effects of the set aperture value and shutter speed will not be visible on

the recording screen.

To check the effects on the recording screen, use [Preview]. (106)

• The brightness of the recording screen and of actual recorded images may

differ.

Check the images on the playback screen.

• Shutter speeds faster than 1/50 of a second are not available when you fire

the flash. (232)

• You can customize dial operations:

[

] [ ] [Dial Set.] [Assign Dial (F/SS)]/[Rotation (F/SS)] (340)

• The recording screen can display an exposure meter indicating the

relationship between aperture value and shutter speed:

[

] [ ] [Expo.Meter] (347)

100

4. Recording mode

Manual Exposure Mode

In [ ] mode (Manual Exposure mode), you can take pictures by manually

setting the aperture value and shutter speed.

In default settings, the ISO sensitivity is set to [AUTO].

As a result, the ISO sensitivity will be adjusted according to the aperture

value and shutter speed.

Exposure compensation can also be used when ISO sensitivity is set to

[AUTO].

Set the mode dial to [ ].

Set the aperture value and

shutter speed.

● Rotate to set the aperture value,

and

to set the shutter speed.

Aperture value

Shutter speed

Start recording.

• If the correct exposure is not achieved

when the shutter button is pressed

halfway, the aperture value and the

shutter speed blink red.

101

4. Recording mode



Available Shutter Speeds (Sec.)

[EFC] [T] (Time, max. approx. 60 seconds), 60 to 1/500

[ESHTR] 1 to 1/16000

• The effects of the set aperture value and shutter speed will not be visible on

the recording screen.

To check the effects on the recording screen, use [Preview]. (106)

You can set the preview mode to operate constantly in [

] mode.

[

] [ ] [Constant Preview] (343)

• The brightness of the recording screen and of actual recorded images may

differ.

Check the images on the playback screen.

• When using a lens with an aperture ring, set the position of the aperture ring

to other than [A] to use the aperture value of the lens.

• Shutter speeds faster than 1/50 of a second are not available when you fire

the flash. (232)

• You can customize dial operations:

[

] [ ] [Dial Set.] [Assign Dial (F/SS)]/[Rotation (F/SS)] (340)

• The recording screen can display an exposure meter indicating the

relationship between aperture value and shutter speed:

[

] [ ] [Expo.Meter] (347)



Manual Exposure Assist

When ISO sensitivity is set to other than [AUTO], Manual Exposure Assist

(Example:

) will be displayed on the recording screen.

You can check the difference between the current exposure value and the

correct exposure (±0) measured by the camera.

• Use Manual Exposure Assist as a guide.

We recommend checking the images on the playback screen when recording.

102

4. Recording mode



[T] (Time)

If you set the shutter speed to [T], the shutter stays open when the shutter

button is pressed fully. (up to approx. 60 seconds)

The shutter closes if you press the shutter button again.

Use this when you want to keep the shutter open for a long time to record

images of fireworks, night scenery or a starry sky.

• We recommend using a tripod or the shutter remote control function (391)

during time recording.

• Time recording may create noticeable noise.

If you are concerned about noise, we recommend that you set [Long Shtr

NR] (322) to [ON] in the [Rec] menu before recording.

• Time is not available when using the following functions:

– When recording using the flash (When [Flash Synchro] is set to [2ND])

– [4K PHOTO], [Post Focus]

– [Time Lapse Shot]

– [Stop Motion Animation] (when [Auto Shooting] is set)

– [Bracket]

– [HDR]

– [Silent Mode]

– Electronic shutter

103

4. Recording mode

Live View Composite Recording

The camera records images at set exposure time intervals, and combines

parts with changes in bright light to save the result as one picture.

• You can check a combined image at each exposure time interval.

• This function is useful for capturing the light trails of stars and fireworks with bright

night scenery in the background.

• Use a tripod to minimize camera shake.

Set the mode dial to [ ].

Start Live View Composite

Recording.

● [ ] [Live View Composite]

[Start]

Set the exposure time per frame (shutter speed) and ISO

sensitivity.

● Rotate to set the shutter speed. (1/2 second to 60 seconds)

● Press and rotate to set the ISO sensitivity.

Obtain an image with reduced

noise.

● Press the shutter button fully.

• A countdown screen is displayed. Wait

until this step completes.

104

4. Recording mode

Start recording.

● Press the shutter button fully.

• Images are combined every time the exposure time set in step 3 has passed.

Histogram display.

5 sec. × 1200

1h40m00s

Exposure time per frame × Number of

pictures combined.

Elapsed time.

• The time is updated with each

increase in the number of pictures

combined.

Stop recording.

● Press the shutter button fully again.

• This will run noise reduction and save the image.

• Live View Composite can record up to 3 hours per recording.

(Recording stops automatically when the recording time exceeds 3 hours.)



[Shutter Delay]

If you want to reduce the jitter that occurs at the start of recording due to

pressing the shutter button, you can set [Shutter Delay] in Step

2. The

shutter will be released when the set time elapses after you press the

shutter button.

Settings: [8SEC]/[4SEC]/[2SEC]/[1SEC]/[OFF]



How to cancel Live View Composite Recording

On the recording screen, press [Fn2].

105

4. Recording mode

• [Long Shtr NR] is fixed to [ON].

• The flash will only fire on the first frame.

• After an image for noise reduction is obtained, some menus are not

displayed.

• The image for noise reduction will be discarded if the following operations

are performed. Follow step

4 again.

– Select [Start] with [Live View Composite].

– Changing the shutter speed

– Changing the ISO sensitivity

– Switching to Playback Mode

• When the shutter button is pressed fully to stop recording, the last image will

not be included in the combined image.

• When the following functions are being used, [Live View Composite] is not

available:

– Self Shot Mode

– [Filter Settings]

– [Silent Mode]

– [Time Lapse Shot]

– [Stop Motion Animation]

– [HDR]

– [Multi Exp.]

– Electronic shutter

106

4. Recording mode

Preview Mode

You can check the effects of aperture on the recording screen by

physically closing the aperture blades of the lens to the aperture value set

for actual recording.

In addition to the effects of aperture, you can check the effects of shutter

speed at the same time.

• Use the Fn button registered with [Preview] to operate. In default settings, this is

registered in the [Fn6].

For information about the Fn button, refer to page 294.

Press [Fn6].

• Each press of the button switches between the

effect preview screens.

Aperture effect: OFF

Shutter speed effect:

OFF

Aperture effect: ON

Shutter speed effect:

OFF

Aperture effect: ON

Shutter speed effect:

• It is possible to record in preview mode.

• Range for shutter speed effect check is 8 seconds to 1/16000 of a second.

• Preview mode is not available when recording with [4K Pre-Burst].

107

4. Recording mode

Scene Guide Mode

If you select a scene to suit the subject and recording conditions with

reference to the example images, the camera will set optimal exposure,

color, and focus, allowing you to record in a manner appropriate to the

scene.

Set mode dial to [ ].

Select the scene.

● Press to select the scene and

press

• Selection is also possible by rotating

• The scene can also be selected by

touching an example image.

● Press [DISP.] to switch the screen

in the order of normal display, guide

display, and list display.

The guide display shows the

description of each scene.

108

4. Recording mode

• It is also possible to display the selection screen by

touching the recording mode icon in recording screen.

• Depending on the scene, the recording screen may seem as if frames are

missed.

• To change the scene, select [Scene Switch] in the [Scene Guide] menu, and

then press

. You can return to step 2.

• Some of the recording menu items cannot be set because the camera

automatically adjusts the settings to the optimal values.

• Although White Balance is fixed to [AWB] for certain types of scenes,

you can fine tune the White Balance or use White Balance bracketing by

pressing [

] ( ) on the recording screen.

109

4. Recording mode

Types of Scene Guide Mode

1: [Clear Portrait]

Setting [Soft Skin] and [Slimming Mode]

You can apply the same [Soft Skin] and [Slimming Mode] settings as

those specified for Self Shot Mode.

Touch [ ] and select the setting item.

[Soft Skin]

Makes people’s faces

look brighter and their

skin tones look softer.

[Slimming

Mode]

Makes people look

slimmer.

Touch the slide bar.

• You can set it to “Off” or a value in the range

[1] to [10]. If you select the left edge of the

slide bar

, it will be set to “Off”.

ExitExit

Touch [Exit]

• If you change AF Mode to a setting other than [

] (Face/

Eye Detection), [Soft Skin] and [Slimming Mode] will become

unavailable.

2: [Silky Skin]

• If a part of the

background etc. is

a color close to skin

color, this part is also

smoothed.

• This mode may not be

effective when there is

insufficient brightness.

3: [Backlit Softness]

110

4. Recording mode

4: [Relaxing Tone] 5: [Sweet Child’s Face]

• When you touch the

face, a still picture is

recorded with the focus

and exposure set for

the touched location

6: [Distinct Scenery] 7: [Bright Blue Sky]

8: [Romantic Sunset

Glow]

9: [Vivid Sunset Glow]

10: [Glistening Water]

• Star filter used in this

mode may cause

glistening effects on the

objects other than water

surface.

11: [Clear Nightscape]

12: [Cool Night Sky] 13: [Warm Glowing

Nightscape]

14: [Artistic Nightscape] 15: [Glittering

Illuminations]

111

4. Recording mode

16: [Handheld Night

Shot]

• After the shutter button

has been pressed, do

not move the camera

during the burst

operation.

• The angle of view

becomes narrow

slightly.

17: [Clear Night Portrait]

• Tripod, self-timer

recommended.

• When [Clear Night

Portrait] is selected,

keep the subject still for

about 1 second after

taking the picture.

18: [Soft Image of a

Flower]

• For close-up recording,

we recommend that you

avoid using the flash.

19: [Appetizing Food]

• For close-up recording,

we recommend that you

avoid using the flash.

20: [Cute Dessert]

• For close-up recording,

we recommend that you

avoid using the flash.

21: [Freeze Animal

Motion]

• Default [AF Assist

Lamp] setting is [OFF].

22: [Clear Sports Shot] 23: [Monochrome]

112

4. Recording mode

Creative Control Mode

You can select the effects to be applied from sample pictures and preview

these effects on the screen.

Set mode dial to [ ].

Select the filter effect.

● Press to select the filter effect

and press

• Selection is also possible by rotating

• The filter effect can also be selected by

touching an example image.

Preview display

● Press [DISP.] to switch the screen

in the order of normal display, guide

display, and list display.

The guide display shows the

description of each filter.

1/8

• It is also possible to display the selection screen by

touching the recording mode icon in recording screen.

• Depending on the filter effect, the recording screen may seem as if frames

are missed.

• [White Balance] will be fixed to [AWB] and ISO sensitivity to [AUTO].

113

4. Recording mode



Creative Control Menu

Select [ ]

[Filter Effect]

Allows you to display the selection screen of

filter effect.

[Simultaneous Record w/o Filter]

Allows you to set the camera to take a picture

with and without a filter effect simultaneously.

Types and adjustments of filter effects

On the recording screen, press

[

] ( ).

Rotate or to set.

• Press the shutter button halfway to return

to the recording screen.

• When the filter effect is adjusted, the filter

icon on the recording screen is indicated

with [+].

114

4. Recording mode

Picture effect Items that can be set

[Expressive] Vividness

[Retro] Coloring

[Old Days] Contrast

[High Key] Coloring

[Low Key] Coloring

[Sepia] Contrast

[Monochrome] Coloring

[Dynamic Monochrome] Contrast

[Rough Monochrome] Grainy picture effect

[Silky Monochrome] Degree of defocusing

[Impressive Art] Vividness

[High Dynamic] Vividness

[Cross Process] Coloring

[Toy Effect] Coloring

[Toy Pop] Range in which peripheral brightness is reduced

[Bleach Bypass] Contrast

[Miniature Effect] Vividness

[Soft Focus] Degree of defocusing

[Fantasy] Vividness

[Star Filter]

Rays of light is short/Rays of light is long

Smaller/Larger

Rotate to the left/Rotate to the right

[One Point Color] Amount of color retained

[Sunshine] Coloring

115

4. Recording mode



Setting the Type of Defocus ([Miniature Effect])

Set Filter effect to [Miniature Effect].

Touch [ ], and then [ ].

Press or to move the in-focus

portion.

• You can also move the in-focus portion by

touching the screen.

• You can also switch the defocus orientation

by touching [

Rotate or to change the size of

in-focus portion.

• The portion can also be enlarged/reduced by pinching out/pinching in the

screen.

• To reset the in-focus portion setting to the default, press [DISP.].

Press to set.

• No audio is recorded in videos.

• The length of the video recorded will be approx. 1/8 of the actual recording

time. The displayed video recording time will be approx. 8 times longer than

the recording time displayed during normal video recording.

Depending on the recording frame rate of the video, the recording time of

the video and the available recording time may differ from the values above.

• If you end video recording after a short time, the camera may go on

recording for a certain period.

116

4. Recording mode



Setting the Color to Be Left ([One Point Color])

Set Filter effect to [One Point Color].

Touch [ ], and then [ ].

Press to move the frame and

select the color you want to leave.

• You can also select the color you want to

leave by touching the screen.

• To return the frame back to the center,

press [DISP.].

Press to set.



Setting the Light Source Position and Size ([Sunshine])

Set Filter effect to [Sunshine].

Touch [ ], and then [ ].

Press to move the center

position of the light source.

• The position of the light source can also be

moved by touching the screen.

Rotate or to adjust the size of the

light source.

• This can also be enlarged/reduced by pinching out/pinching in the screen.

• To reset the light source setting to the default, press [DISP.].

Press .

117

4. Recording mode

Taking pictures with different degrees of blurriness

and brightness



Brightness

Press [ ].

Rotate or to adjust brightness.

• Press the shutter button halfway to return to

the recording screen.



Defocusing the background (Defocus control function)

Press [ ], and then [Fn4].

8.05.64.0

250 125 60 30 15

Rotate or to adjust the

background defocusing condition.

• Press the shutter button halfway to return to

the recording screen.

118

4. Recording mode



With touch screen operations

Touch [ ].

Touch the item you want to set.

[

]: Adjusting the filter effect

[

]: Degree of defocusing

[

]: Brightness

Drag the slide bar or exposure meter

to set.

• Press the shutter button halfway to return to

the recording screen.

• Defocus control operation is not available in [Miniature Effect] ([ ] mode).

• At the brightness setting screen you can assign the exposure bracket to

[

] [ ] [Exposure Comp. Disp. Setting] (339)

119

5. Image Recording

[Aspect Ratio]

You can select the image aspect ratio.

[ ] Select [Aspect Ratio]

[4:3] Aspect ratio of a 4:3 monitor

[3:2] Aspect ratio of a standard film camera

[16:9] Aspect ratio of a 16:9 TV

[1:1] Square aspect ratio

• When the following function is being used, [Aspect Ratio] is not available:

– [Multi Exp.]

120

5. Image Recording

[Picture Size]

Sets the picture’s image size.

[ ] Select [Picture Size]

[Aspect Ratio] 4:3 3:2 16:9 1:1

[Picture Size]

[L] 20M

5184×3888

[L] 17M

5184×3456

[L] 14.5M

5184×2920

[L] 14.5M

3888×3888

[M] 10M

3712×2784

[M] 9M

3712×2480

[M] 8M

3840×2160

[M] 7.5M

2784×2784

[S] 5M

2624×1968

[S] 4.5M

2624×1752

[S] 2M

1920×1080

[S] 3.5M

1968×1968

• When [Ex. Tele Conv.] ([Rec]) is set, the [M] and [S] picture sizes are indicated with

[

• When the following functions are being used, [Picture Size] is not available:

– [4K PHOTO], [Post Focus]

– [

] ([Quality])

– [Multi Exp.]

121

5. Image Recording

[Quality]

Set the compression rate used for storing pictures.

[ ] Select [Quality]

Setting File format Settings details

JPEG

JPEG images that give priority to image quality.

JPEG images of standard image quality.

This is useful for increasing the number of

recordable pictures without changing the picture

size.

RAW+JPEG

This records RAW and JPEG images ([

] or [ ])

simultaneously.

RAW This records RAW images.

122

5. Image Recording

Note on RAW

RAW format refers to a data format of images that have not been processed

on the camera.

Playback and editing of RAW images require the camera or the dedicated

software.

• You can process RAW images on the camera. (288)

• Use software (“SILKYPIX Developer Studio” by Ichikawa Soft Laboratory) to

process and edit RAW files on a PC. (444)

• Pictures taken with [

] cannot be displayed enlarged to the maximum

magnification during playback.

Take pictures with [

] or [ ] if you want to check their focus on the

camera after recording.

• RAW images are always recorded in the [L] size of the [4:3] aspect ratio.

• When you delete an image recorded with [

] or [ ] on the camera,

both the RAW and JPEG images will be deleted simultaneously.

• [

], [ ] and [ ] are not available when using the following function:

– [

] mode ([Handheld Night Shot])

• When the following functions are being used, [Quality] is not available:

– [4K PHOTO], [Post Focus]

– [Multi Exp.]

123

5. Image Recording

[Folder / File Settings]

Set the folder and file name where to save the images.

Folder name File name

100ABCDE

PABC0001.JPG

Folder number (3 digits, 100 to 999)

Color space

([P]: sRGB, [ _ ]: AdobeRGB)

5-character user-defined segment 3-character user-defined segment

File number (4 digits, 0001 to 9999)

Extension

[ ] Select [Folder / File Settings]

[Select Folder] Selects a folder for storing images.

[Create a New

Folder]

Creates a new folder with an incremented folder number.

• If there are no recordable folders in the card, a screen for

resetting the folder number is displayed.

[OK]

Increments the folder number without changing the

5-character user-defined segment (

above).

[Change]

Changes the 5-character user-defined segment (

above). This will also increment the folder number.

[File Name

Setting]

[Folder

Number

Link]

Uses the 3-character user-defined segment (

above) to set the folder number (

above).

[User

Setting]

Changes the 3-character user-defined segment

(

above).

• Available characters: alphabetic characters (upper-case), numerals, [ _ ] (refer to

“Entering Characters” (372))

124

5. Image Recording

• Each folder can store up to 1000 files.

• File numbers are assigned sequentially from 0001 to 9999 in the order of

recording.

If you change the storage folder, a number continuing on from the last file

number will be assigned.

• In the following cases, a new folder with an incremented folder number will

be created automatically when the next file is saved:

– The number of files in the current folder reaches 1000.

– The file number reaches 9999.

• New folders cannot be created when there are folders numbered from 100

all the way up to 999.

We recommend backing up your data and formatting the card.

125

5. Image Recording

[No.Reset]

Refresh the folder number to reset the file number to 0001.

[ ] Select [No.Reset]

• When the folder number reaches 999, the number cannot be reset.

We recommend backing up your data and formatting the card.

• To reset the folder number to 100:

Perform [Format] to format the card. (40)

Perform [No.Reset] to reset the file number.

Select [Yes] on the folder number reset screen.

126

6. Focus/Zoom

Selecting the Focus Mode

Select the focusing method (focus mode) to match subject movement.

Set the Focus Mode.

● [ ]/[ ] [Focus Mode]

[AFS]

This is suitable for recording still subjects.

When the shutter button is pressed halfway, the camera focuses

once.

The focus stays locked while the shutter button is pressed halfway.

[AFF]

This is suitable for recording subjects with movements that cannot

be predicted.

If the subject moves while the shutter button is pressed halfway, the

focus is readjusted automatically according to the movement of the

subject.

[AFC]

This is suitable for recording moving subjects.

While the shutter button is pressed halfway, the focus is constantly

adjusted according to the movement of the subject.

[MF]

Manual focusing. Use this when you want to fix the focus or avoid

activating AF. (148)

1 This predicts the movement of the subject, maintaining focusing. (Movement

prediction)

127

6. Focus/Zoom

• In the following cases, [AFF] or [AFC] works the same as [AFS] when the

shutter button is pressed halfway:

– [

] mode, [ ] mode

– [4K Burst(S/S)]

– In low light situations

• [AFF] is not available when recording 4K photos. Continuous AF works

during recording.

• This function is not available for Post-Focus recording.

128

6. Focus/Zoom

Using AF

AF (Auto Focus) refers to automatic focusing.

Select the focus mode and the AF mode appropriate for the subject and

scene.

Set the Focus Mode. (126)

● [ ]/[ ] [Focus Mode] [AFS]/[AFF]/[AFC]

Select AF mode.

● Press [ ] ( ) to display the AF

mode selection screen, and set

using

. (131)

• In [ ]/[ ] mode, each press of [ ]

(

) switches between [ ] and [ ].

(80)

Press the shutter button

halfway.

● The AF operates.

Focus display

AF area

Focus

In focus Not in focus

Focus display Lights Blinking

AF area Green —

AF beep Two beeps —

129

6. Focus/Zoom

Low illumination AF

• In dark environments, low illumination AF automatically operates, and the focus

display is indicated as [

• Achieving focus may take more time than usual.

Starlight AF

• If the camera detects stars in the night sky after determining low illumination AF,

then Starlight AF will be activated.

When focus is achieved, the focus display will display [

], and the AF area will be

displayed on the area in focus.

• Edges of the screen cannot detect Starlight AF.

Subjects and recording conditions that make focusing difficult with AF

mode

– Fast-moving subjects

– Extremely bright subjects

– Subjects without contrast

– Subjects recorded through windows

– Subjects near shiny objects

– Subjects in very dark locations

– When recording subjects both distant and near

• When the following operations are performed while recording with [AFF] or

[AFC], it may take some time for the camera to focus.

– When zooming from the wide-angle end to the telephoto end

– When the subject is suddenly changed from one far away to one close by

• If using the zoom after achieving focus, the focus may be erroneous. In that

case, re-adjust the focus.

• You can release the shutter quickly by pressing the shutter button halfway:

[

] [ ] [Half Press Release] (333)

• When camera shake reduces, it is possible to focus automatically:

[

] [ ] [Quick AF] (334)

130

6. Focus/Zoom

[AF Sensitivity(Photo)]

Sets the tracking sensitivity for the movement of subjects.

Set the focus mode to [AFF] or [AFC]. (126)

Set [AF Sensitivity(Photo)].

● [ ] [AF Sensitivity(Photo)]

When the distance to the subject changes drastically, the camera re-adjusts

the focus immediately. You can bring different subjects into focus one after

another.

–

When the distance to the subject changes drastically, the camera waits for a

short period of time before re-adjusting the focus. This allows you to prevent

the focus from being accidentally re-adjusted when, for example, an object

moves across the image.

• When the following functions are being used, [AF Sensitivity(Photo)] is not

available:

– [4K PHOTO], [Post Focus]

131

6. Focus/Zoom

Selecting the AF Mode

Select the focusing method to match the position and number of subjects.

Press [ ] ( ).

Select the AF mode.

● Press to select an item and

then press

● Selection is also possible by

rotating

or .

[Face/Eye Detection]

133

[Tracking]

135

[49-Area]

137

etc.

Custom Multi

138

140

[1-Area]

141

[Pinpoint]

142

132

6. Focus/Zoom

• When the following functions are being used, [ ] is not available:

– [Clear Nightscape], [Cool Night Sky], [Warm Glowing Nightscape], [Artistic

Nightscape], [Glittering Illuminations], [Handheld Night Shot], [Appetizing

Food], [Cute Dessert] ([

] mode)

• When the following functions are being used, [

] is not available:

– [Time Lapse Shot]

– [Live View Composite]

• When the focus mode is set to [AFF] or [AFC], [

] is not available.

• When the following function is being used, the AF mode is fixed to [

]

([Face/Eye Detection]):

– Self Shot Mode (If [

] in AF Mode is not available with the current

Recording Mode, an available focus setting for each Recording Mode will

be used.)

– [4K Live Cropping]

• When the following functions are being used, the AF mode is fixed to [

– [Digital Zoom] (DC-G100 only)

– [Miniature Effect] ([

] mode)

• When the following functions are being used, [AF Mode] is not available:

– [Post Focus]

– [Pull Focus] ([Snap Movie])

• When [Digital Zoom] is set, it is not possible to move the AF area or change

its size. (DC-G100 only)

133

6. Focus/Zoom

[Face/Eye Detection]

The camera automatically detects the faces and eyes of subjects.

When the camera detects a person’s face

/ , an AF area is displayed.

Yellow

AF area to be brought into

focus. The camera selects this

automatically.

White

Displayed when multiple subjects

are detected.

• Eye detection works only for the eyes inside

the yellow frame



Specify the Eye to Bring into Focus

Touch the eye to be used for focusing.

• To cancel the settings specified, touch

[

• The eye to be in focus cannot be changed when [4K Live Cropping] is set.

• When a person’s eyes are detected, the eye closer to the camera will be

brought into focus.

The exposure will be adjusted to the face. (When [Metering Mode] is set to

[

])

• The camera can detect the faces of up to 15 people.

• If any humans are not detected, the camera operates as [

• During recording, you can make the sound pickup range of the built-in mic

work with the face/eye detection function:

[

] [Built-in Mic] (267)

134

6. Focus/Zoom



Move and Change the Size of the Yellow AF Area

Press [ ] ( ) to display the AF mode selection screen.

Select [ ] and then press .

Press to move the position of

the AF area.

Rotate or to change the size of

the AF area.

Press .

• On the recording screen, press , or

touch [

] to cancel the AF area setting.

Operations on the AF area movement screen

Button

operation

Touch

operation

Description of operation

Touch Moves the AF area.

Pinch out/

pinch in

Enlarges/reduces the AF area in small steps.

— Enlarges/reduces the AF area.

[DISP.] [Reset]

First time: Returns the AF area position to the

center.

Second time: Returns the AF area size to the

default setting.

135

6. Focus/Zoom

[Tracking]

The AF area follows the movement of the subject, maintaining focusing.

Start tracking.

● Aim the AF area over the subject, and

press the shutter button halfway.

• When the subject is recognized, the AF

tracking area turns green. When you release

the shutter button, the AF tracking area turns

yellow and the subject is automatically kept

in focus.

• The same operation can be performed by

touching the subject.

• To release AF Tracking

→Touch [

] or press .

• If tracking fails, the AF area blinks red.

• Set [Metering Mode] to [ ] to continue to adjust the exposure as well.

• In the following, [

] operates as [ ]:

– [Glistening Water], [Glittering Illuminations], [Soft Image of a Flower],

[Monochrome] ([

] mode)

– [Sepia], [Monochrome], [Dynamic Monochrome], [Rough Monochrome],

[Silky Monochrome], [Soft Focus], [Star Filter], [Sunshine] ([

] mode)

– [Monochrome], [L.Monochrome], [L.Monochrome D] ([Photo Style])

– When the subject is small

136

6. Focus/Zoom



Move the Position of the AF Area

Press [ ] ( ) to display the AF mode selection screen.

Select [ ] and then press .

Press to move the position of the AF area.

• You can also move the AF area by touching.

• To return the position back to the center, press [DISP.].

Press .

137

6. Focus/Zoom

[49-Area]

The camera selects the most optimal AF

area to focus from 49 areas.

When multiple AF areas are selected, all

selected AF areas will be brought into

focus.



Move and Change the Size of the AF Area

You can set the focus position by selecting an

AF area group. The AF area, which is configured

with 49 points, is divided into groups consisting of

9 points each (6 points or 4 points for the groups

located at the edges of the screen).

Press [ ] ( ) to display the AF mode selection

screen.

Select [ ] and press .

Press to select an AF area group.

• You can also move the AF area by touching.

• To return the AF area position to the center, press

[DISP.].

Press .

• Setting of the AF area is cleared when is pressed

or [

] is touched.

Examples of

group

• The display method for the AF area using 49-area focusing can be changed:

[

] [ ] [AF Area Display] (337)

138

6. Focus/Zoom

/ /

Custom Multi (Horizontal, Vertical,

Center)

[Horizontal Pattern]

Ideal shape for panning, etc.

[Vertical Pattern]

Ideal shape for recording structures, etc.

[Central Pattern]

Within the 49 AF areas, a central oval

zone can be focused.

139

6. Focus/Zoom



Move and Change the Size of the AF Area

Press [ ] ( ) to display the AF mode selection screen.

Select a Custom Multi icon ([ ], etc.), and press .

Select [ ], [ ] or [ ] and then

press

Press to move the position of

the AF area.

• You can also move the AF area by

touching.

Rotate or to change the size of the AF area.

• You can also pinch out/pinch in the AF area to change the size.

• The first press of [DISP.] returns the AF area position to the center.

The second press returns the size of the AF area to the default.

Press .

Registering the set AF area in [

], [ ] and [ ] (Custom)

Press on the screen of step .

Use to select the registration target icon and press .

• The settings adjusted in [ ], [ ] or [ ] will be restored to the default

settings when the camera is turned off.

• The display method for the AF area using 49-area focusing can be changed:

[

] [ ] [AF Area Display] (337)

140

6. Focus/Zoom

Custom Multi (C1 to C3)

The shape of the AF area can be set freely in the 49 AF areas.

The set AF area can be registered using [

] to [ ].

Press [ ] ( ) to display the AF mode selection screen.

Select a Custom Multi icon ([ ] etc.), and press .

Select one of [ ] to [ ] and then

press

Select the AF area.

● Touch operation

Touch the area to make the AF area.

• To select consecutive points, drag the

screen.

• To cancel selection of the selected AF

area, touch it again.

● Button operation

Press

to select the AF area and then set with .

(Repeat this)

• To cancel selection of the selected AF area, press again.

• To cancel all selections, press [DISP.].

Press [Fn4].

• The display method for the AF area using 49-area focusing can be changed:

[

] [ ] [AF Area Display] (337)

141

6. Focus/Zoom

[1-Area]

Specify the point to be brought into focus.



Move and Change the Size of the AF Area

Press [ ] ( ) to display the AF mode selection screen.

Select [ ] and then press .

Press to move the position of

the AF area.

Rotate or to change the size of

the AF area.

Press .

• Refer to “Operations on the AF area movement screen” on page 134 for

information about detailed operations to move the AF area.

142

6. Focus/Zoom

[Pinpoint]

You can achieve a more precise focus on

a small point.

If you press the shutter button halfway, the

screen that lets you check the focus will

be enlarged.



Move the Position of the AF Area

Press [ ] ( ) to display the AF mode selection screen.

Select [ ] and then press .

Press to set the position of [+] and then press .

• The selected position on the screen will be enlarged.

• The AF area cannot be moved to the edge of the screen.

Press to fine-adjust the

position of [+].

Press .

143

6. Focus/Zoom

Operations on the Magnification Window

Button

operation

Touch

operation

Description of operation

Touch Moves [+].

Pinch out/

pinch in

Enlarges/reduces the screen in small steps.

— Enlarges/reduces the screen.

—

Switches magnification window (windowed

mode/full screen mode).

[DISP.] [Reset]

First time: Returns to the screen in Step

Second time: Returns the AF area position to

the center.

• When the picture is displayed in windowed mode, you can enlarge the picture by

approx. 3x to 6x; when the picture is displayed in full screen, you can enlarge the

picture by approx. 3x to 10x.

• You can also take a picture by touching [

• When the following functions are being used, [ ] switches to [ ]:

– Video recording, [4K PHOTO]

• You can change the display method of the magnified screen:

[

] [ ] [Pinpoint AF Setting] (334)

144

6. Focus/Zoom

Moving the AF Area by Touch

You can move the AF area to a touched position on the monitor.

Optimizing the focus and brightness to the touched

position

Set [Touch AF].

● [ ] [ ] [Touch Settings]

[Touch AF]

[AF]

This focuses on the touched

subject.

[AF+AE]

This focuses on and adjusts

brightness for the touched subject.

• The default setting is [AF].



Focus on the Touched Position ([AF])

Touch the subject.

• The AF area moves to the touched position.

Size of the AF area can be set when AF Mode is in the following cases:

– [ ] ([Face/Eye Detection]), [ ] ([1-Area]), [ ] ([Pinpoint])

– [

] etc. ([Vertical Pattern], [Horizontal Pattern] or [Central Pattern] of Custom

Multi)

Pinch out/pinch in to change the AF area size.

• The first touch of [Reset] returns the AF area position to the center.

The second touch returns the size of the AF area to the default.

• With [

], operations will be on a magnified screen. (143)

Touch [Set].

• In [ ], touch [Exit].

145

6. Focus/Zoom



Focus on and Adjust Brightness for the Touched Position

([AF+AE])

Touch the subject to which you wish to

adjust the brightness.

• At the touched position, an AF area

that works in the same way as [

] is

displayed.

This places a point to adjust brightness at

the center of the AF area.

• [Metering Mode] is set to [

], which is

used exclusively for the [Touch AE].

ResetReset

SetSet

Pinch out/pinch in to change the AF area size.

• The first touch of [Reset] returns the AF area position to the center. The second

touch returns the size of the AF area to the default.

Touch [Set].

• The [AF+AE] area setting is canceled if you touch [ ] (when [ ] is set:

[

]) on the recording screen.

• When the following functions are being used, [AF+AE] is not available:

– [Digital Zoom] (DC-G100 only)

– [4K Live Cropping]

146

6. Focus/Zoom

Moving the AF Area during Viewfinder Display

During viewfinder display, you can touch the monitor to change the

position and size of the AF area.

Set [Touch Pad AF].

● [ ] [ ]

[Touch Settings]

[Touch Pad AF]

[EXACT]/

[OFFSET1] to [OFFSET7]

Move the position of the AF

area.

● During viewfinder display, touch the

monitor.

Change the size of the AF area.

● Rotate or .

• The first press of [DISP.] returns the AF

area position to the center. The second

press returns the size of the AF area to

the default.

Confirm your selection.

● Press the shutter button halfway.

147

6. Focus/Zoom



Setting Items ([Touch Pad AF])

[EXACT]

Moves the AF area

of the viewfinder by

touching a desired

position on the touch

pad.

[OFFSET1]

[OFFSET7]

Moves the AF area

of the viewfinder

according to the

distance you drag

your finger on the

touch pad.

Select the range to be detected with the drag operation.

[OFFSET1] (entire area)/[OFFSET2] (right half)/

[OFFSET3] (upper right)/[OFFSET4] (lower right)/

[OFFSET5] (left half)/[OFFSET6] (upper left)/

[OFFSET7] (lower left)

[OFF] —

• When the following functions are being used, [Touch Pad AF] is not

available.

– [4K Live Cropping]

– [Pull Focus] in [Snap Movie]

148

6. Focus/Zoom

Record Using Manual Focus

MF (Manual Focus) refers to manual focusing.

Use this function when you want to fix the focus or when the distance

between the lens and the subject is determined and you do not want to

activate AF.

Set the Focus Mode.

● [ ] [Focus Mode] [MF]

● Press the shutter button halfway to

return to the recording screen.

Press [ ] ( ).

Select the focus point.

● Press to select the focus

point.

• To return the point to be brought into

focus to the center, press [DISP.].

149

6. Focus/Zoom

Confirm your selection.

● Press .

● This switches to the MF Assist

screen, and shows an enlarged

display.

Adjust the focus.

The operations used to focus differ depending on the lens.

When using an interchangeable lens with no focus ring

Press

: Focuses on nearby subject

Press

: Focuses on distant subject

Slide bar

• Pressing and holding will increase the focus speed.

• Focus can also be adjusted by dragging the slide bar.

When using an interchangeable lens with a focus ring

Rotate to

side: Focuses on nearby subject

Rotate to

side: Focuses on distant subject

When using the interchangeable lens having a focus lever

Move to

side: Focuses on nearby subject

Move to

side: Focuses on distant subject

• The focusing speed varies depending on how far

you move the focus lever.

150

6. Focus/Zoom

• This will display the in-focus portion

highlighted with color. (Focus Peaking)

• A recording distance guideline is

displayed. (MF Guide)

MF Assist (enlarged screen)

Focus Peaking

MF Guide

Close the MF Assist screen.

● Press the shutter button halfway.

● This operation can also be

performed by pressing

Start recording.

● Press the shutter button fully.

151

6. Focus/Zoom



Operations on the MF Assist Screen

Button

operation

Touch

operation

Description of operation

Drag Moves the enlarged display position.

Pinch out/

pinch in

Enlarges/reduces the screen in small steps.

— Enlarges/reduces the screen.

—

Switches magnification window (windowed

mode/full screen mode)

[DISP.]

[Reset]

First time: Returns the MF Assist position to the

center.

Second time: Returns the MF Assist

magnification to the default setting.

—

The AF operates.

1 When using an interchangeable lens with no focus ring, you can perform these

operations after pressing

to display the screen that lets you set the area to be

enlarged.

Cannot be set when using [

] mode.

3 When the picture is displayed in windowed mode, you can enlarge the picture by

approx. 3x to 6x; when the picture is displayed in full screen, you can enlarge the

picture by approx. 3x to 20x.

4 Auto Focus also works with the following operations.

– Pressing the Fn button to which [AF-ON] is assigned (212)

– Dragging the monitor and releasing your finger at the position you want to

focus on

152

6. Focus/Zoom

• On the recording screen, you can rotate the focus ring to display the MF

Assist screen. If the focus ring has been rotated to enlarge the display, the

assist screen will be exited a certain amount of time after you cease the

operation.

• The recording distance reference mark

is a mark used to measure the recording

distance.

Use this when taking pictures with

manual focusing or taking close-up

pictures.

• When using an interchangeable lens with no focus ring and in the following

cases, manual focus operations may not be possible during recording if the

shutter speed is very slow.

– [

] mode (When [Exposure Mode] is set to [M])

– [

] mode (When [S&Q Exposure Mode] is set to [M])

(When using an interchangeable lens with a focus ring, you can do manual

focus operations, but autofocus does not work during manual focus.)

• MF Assist and MF Guide may not display depending on the lens used. You

can, however, display MF Assist by directly operating the camera using the

touch screen or a button.

• You can memorize the MF Assist position separately for vertical and

horizontal orientations:

[

] [ ] [Focus Switching for Vert / Hor] (337)

• You can set the movement of the MF Assist position to loop:

[

] [ ] [Loop Movement Focus Frame] (337)

• You can change the display method of the magnified screen:

[

] [ ] [MF Assist] (338)

• You can disable focus ring operation:

[

] [ ] [Focus Ring Lock] (341)

• You can change the Focus Peaking sensitivity and the display method:

[

] [ ] [Peaking] (344)

• You can change the MF Guide display:

[

] [ ] [MF Guide] (347)

• The camera memorizes the focus point when you turn it off:

[

] [ ] [Lens Position Resume] (349)

153

6. Focus/Zoom

Recording with Zoom

Use the optical zoom of the lens to zoom to telephoto or wide-angle.

: Telephoto, Enlarges distant subject

: Wide-angle, Widens angle of view

Interchangeable

lens with a zoom

ring

Rotate the zoom ring.

Interchangeable

lens that supports

the power zoom

(electrically

operated zoom)

Move the zoom lever.

(The zoom speed varies

depending on how far you

move the lever.)

• If you set [Zoom Control]

to an Fn button, you can

operate the optical zoom

slowly by pressing

fast by pressing

Interchangeable

lens that does not

support the zoom

The optical zoom is not available.

154

6. Focus/Zoom

Extended Tele Conversion

[Ex. Tele Conv.] enables you to take pictures that are further enlarged

beyond what is available with the optical zoom, without any deterioration

in image quality.



[Ex. Tele Conv.] ([Rec])

• The [Ex. Tele Conv.] maximum magnification ratio differs depending on the [Picture

Size] and [Aspect Ratio] set in the [Rec] menu.

– When the setting is set to [

M]: up to 1.4x

– When the setting is set to [

S]: up to 2.0x

Set [Picture Size] to [M] or [S].

• [ ] [Picture Size] [M]/[S]

Set [Ex. Tele Conv.].

• [ ] [Ex. Tele Conv.]

[ZOOM] Changes the zoom magnification.

[TELE CONV.] Fixes the zoom magnification at the maximum.

[OFF] —

155

6. Focus/Zoom

Changing the Zoom Magnification (Button operation)

Set [Ex. Tele Conv.] to [ZOOM].

• [ ] [Ex. Tele Conv.] [ZOOM]

Set the Fn button to [Zoom Control]. (294)

Press the Fn button.

Press the cursor buttons to operate the

zoom.

: T (telephoto)

: W (wide-angle)

• Press the Fn button again, or wait a

specified time to end zoom operation.

Zoom magnifications

EX2.0x

Changing the Zoom Magnification (Touch operation)

Set [Ex. Tele Conv.] to [ZOOM].

• [ ] [Ex. Tele Conv.] [ZOOM]

Touch [ ].

Drag the slide bar to operate the

zoom.

: Telephoto

: Wide-angle

• To end Touch Zoom operations, touch

[

] again.

156

6. Focus/Zoom



[Ex. Tele Conv.] ([Motion Picture])

Set [Rec Quality] to [FHD] or [HD].

• [ ] [Rec Quality] [FHD]/[HD]

Set [Ex. Tele Conv.].

• [ ] [Ex. Tele Conv.]

[ON] Fixes the zoom magnification at the maximum.

[OFF] —

• If you assign [Ex. Tele Conv.] to [Fn Button Set] in the [Custom] ([Operation])

menu, you can display the Extended Tele Conversion setting screen for both

pictures and video by pressing the assigned Fn button. While this screen is

displayed, you can change the [Picture Size] setting by pressing [DISP.].

• When the following functions are being used, [Ex. Tele Conv.] is not

available:

– [Toy Effect], [Toy Pop] ([

] mode)

– [

] ([Quality])

– [4K PHOTO], [Post Focus]

– [HDR]

– [Multi Exp.]

– [4K Live Cropping]

• [Ex. Tele Conv.] ([Rec]) is not available in the following case.

– [Handheld Night Shot] ([

] mode)

• [Ex. Tele Conv.] ([Motion Picture]) is not available in the following case.

– When using the HDMI output during recording (Except in [

] mode)

• During Self Shot Mode, you cannot perform zoom operation by touching.

157

6. Focus/Zoom

[Digital Zoom] (DC-G100 only)

You can increase the zoom ratio 2x higher than the original zoom ratio.

Note that, with Digital Zoom, enlarging will decrease picture quality.

[ ]/[ ] Select [Digital Zoom]

Settings: [2x]/[OFF]

• When using [Digital Zoom], we recommend using a tripod and the self-timer

(186) for taking pictures.

• When the following functions are being used, [Digital Zoom] is not available.

– [Toy Effect], [Toy Pop], [Miniature Effect] ([

] mode)

– [

], [ ], [ ] ([Quality])

– [Post Focus]

– [HDR]

– [Multi Exp.]

158

6. Focus/Zoom

Power Zoom Lens

Sets the screen display and operations when using an interchangeable

lens that is compatible with power zoom (electrically operated zoom).

• This may only be selected when using a lens that is compatible with power zoom

(electrically operated zoom).

[ ] [ ] Select [Power Zoom Lens]

[Disp Focal

Length]

Displays the focal length on the

recording screen during zoom control.

Focal distance indication

Current focal distance

[Step Zoom]

When you operate the zoom with

this setting [ON], the zoom will

stop at positions corresponding to

predetermined distances.

Step zoom indication

This setting does not work when

recording video or 4K photos with

[

] ([4K Pre-Burst]).

[Zoom Speed]

You can set the zoom speed for zoom operations.

• If you set [Step Zoom] to [ON], the zoom speed will not

change.

[Photo]:

[H] (High speed) / [M] (Middle speed) / [L] (Low speed)

[Video]:

[H] (High speed) / [M] (Middle speed) / [L] (Low speed)

[Zoom Ring]

This may only be selected when a power zoom-compatible lens

with a zoom lever and zoom ring is attached.

When set to [OFF], the operations controlled by the zoom ring

are disabled to prevent accidental operation.

159

7. Drive/Shutter/Image Stabilizer

Selecting the Drive Mode

You can switch the drive mode to Single, Burst, etc. to match the

recording conditions.

Press [ ] ( ).

Select the drive mode.

● Press to select the drive mode

and press

• You can also select by rotating .

[Single]

Takes one picture each time the shutter button is

pressed.

[Burst] (160)

Takes pictures continuously while the shutter button is

pressed and held.

[4K PHOTO]

(164)

When the shutter button is pressed, a picture is

recorded with the 4K Photo function.

[Post Focus]

(178)

When the shutter button is pressed, the pictures are

recorded with [Post Focus].

[Self Timer]

(186)

Takes pictures when the set time elapses after the

shutter button is pressed.

• Select [

] to return to [Single] (default setting).

160

7. Drive/Shutter/Image Stabilizer

Taking Burst Pictures

Takes pictures continuously while the shutter button is pressed and held.

Press [ ] ( ).

Press to select [Burst] and

press

• You can also select by rotating .

Select the burst rate.

● Press to select the burst rate

and press

Settings: [H] (High speed)/

[M] (Middle speed)/

[L] (Low speed)

• You can also select by rotating or .

• The burst rate can also be set using

[Burst Rate] in the [Rec] menu.

Start recording.

• Takes burst pictures while the shutter

button is pressed fully.

161

7. Drive/Shutter/Image Stabilizer



Burst Rate

Electronic front

curtain

Electronic shutter

Live View when

taking burst

pictures

[H]

High speed

6 frames/second

([AFS]/[MF])

5 frames/second

([AFF]/[AFC])

10 frames/second

([AFS]/[MF])

10 frames/second

([AFF]/[AFC])

None ([AFS]/[MF])

Available

([AFF]/[AFC])

[M]

Medium speed

4 frames/second 4 frames/second Available

[L]

Low speed

2 frames/second 2 frames/second Available

• The burst rate may be lower depending on the settings for recording such as

[Picture Size] and focus mode.



Maximum Number of Frames Recordable

[Quality]

/ /

[H]

High speed

480 frames or more 20 frames or more

[M]

Medium speed

[L]

Low speed

• When recording under the test conditions specified by Panasonic.

Recording conditions may reduce the maximum number of frames recordable.

• The burst rate will become lower during recording but pictures can continue to be

taken until the card becomes full.

162

7. Drive/Shutter/Image Stabilizer



Number of Pictures That Can Be Taken Continuously

When you press the shutter button halfway,

the number of pictures that can be taken

continuously will appear on the recording

screen.

Example) When 20 frames: [r20]

• Once recording starts, the number of pictures that

can be taken continuously will decrease. When [r0]

appears, the burst rate decreases.

• When [r99+] is displayed on the recording screen,

you can take 100 or more burst pictures.



Focus when Taking Burst Pictures

Focus mode

[Focus/Release

Priority] (336)

[H] [M]/[L]

[AFS]

[FOCUS]

Fixed to the focus of the first frame[BALANCE]

[RELEASE]

[AFF]/[AFC]

[FOCUS] Estimated focus Normal focus

[BALANCE]

Estimated focus

[RELEASE]

[MF] — Focus set with manual focus

• When the subject is dark with [AFF] or [AFC], the focus is fixed to that of the first

frame.

• With estimated focus, the burst rate takes priority and the focus is estimated to the

extent possible.

• With normal focus, the burst rate may become slow.

163

7. Drive/Shutter/Image Stabilizer



Exposure when Taking Burst Pictures

Focus mode [H] [M]/[L]

[AFS]

Fixed to the exposure of

the first frame

The exposure is adjusted

for each frame

[AFF]/[AFC]

The exposure is adjusted

for each frame

[MF]

Fixed to the exposure of

the first frame



How to Cancel [Burst]

Press [ ] ( ), and then select [ ] ([Single]) or [ ].

• It may take a while to save burst pictures.

If you continue to take burst pictures while saving is in progress, the

maximum number of frames recordable will be reduced.

When taking burst pictures, we recommend using a high-speed card.

• Taking burst pictures does not work while you are using the following

functions:

– Self Shot Mode

– [Glistening Water], [Glittering Illuminations], [Handheld Night Shot], [Soft

Image of a Flower] ([

] mode)

– [Rough Monochrome], [Silky Monochrome], [Miniature Effect], [Soft

Focus], [Star Filter], [Sunshine] ([

] mode)

– Flash

– [Time Lapse Shot]

– [Stop Motion Animation] (when [Auto Shooting] is set)

– [Live View Composite]

– [Multi Exp.]

164

7. Drive/Shutter/Image Stabilizer

4K Photo Recording

With 4K photo, you can take high-speed burst pictures at 30 frames/

second and save the desired pictures, each made up of approx. 8 million

pixels.

• Use a UHS Speed Class 3 or higher card when recording.

• The angle of view becomes narrower.

• When the recording time of a single session exceeds 10 minutes, recording

stops.

• If the camera temperature rises, [

] may be displayed and recording may

stop. Wait until the camera cools down.

Press [ ] ( ).

Press to select [4K

PHOTO] and press

• You can also select by rotating .

165

7. Drive/Shutter/Image Stabilizer

Select [Rec Method].

● Press to select the recording

method and press

• You can also select by rotating or .

• The recording method can also be set

using [4K PHOTO] in the [Rec] menu.

([4K Burst])

When you wish to capture the best moments of a

fast-moving subject

Takes burst pictures while the shutter button is

pressed.

Audio recording: None

([4K Burst(S/S)])

“S/S” is an

abbreviation for start/

stop.

When you wish to capture an unpredictable photo

opportunity

Starts taking burst pictures when the shutter button is

pressed. Pressing the button again stops taking burst

pictures.

The start tone and stop tone are output.

Audio recording: Available

([4K Pre-Burst])

When you wish to capture at the moment of a

photo opportunity

Takes burst pictures for approx. 1 second before and

after the moment the shutter button is pressed.

The shutter sound is output once only.

Recording duration:

Approx. 2 seconds

Audio recording: None

1 Audio is not played back during playback with the camera.

166

7. Drive/Shutter/Image Stabilizer

Start recording.

• [Continuous AF] works and the focus is adjusted continuously during recording

with AF.

[4K Burst]

Press the shutter button halfway.

Press the shutter button fully and keep it

pressed during recording.

Press and hold

Recording is performed

• Press the shutter button fully early because recording will take approx.

0.5 seconds to start after it is pressed fully.

[4K Burst(S/S)]

Press the shutter button fully to start

recording.

Press the shutter button fully again to stop

recording.

Start (First)

Stop (Second)

Recording is performed

• You can add markers (white marker) by pressing [Fn2] during recording.

(Up to 40 markers per recording)

This allows you to skip to the positions where you added markers when

selecting pictures from a 4K burst file.

167

7. Drive/Shutter/Image Stabilizer

[4K Pre-Burst]

Press the shutter button fully.

Approx. 1 second

Recording is performed

• While the recording screen is displayed,

the AF will operate constantly to continue

focusing.

The exposure is also adjusted continuously,

except in [

] mode.

• When the subject is not at the center, use

AF/AE Lock if you wish to lock the focus and

exposure. (212)

• In default settings, Auto Review operates, and a screen that lets you select

pictures from a burst file will be displayed.

To continue recording, press the shutter button halfway to return to the

recording screen.

For how to select and save pictures from a recorded 4K burst file, refer to

page 170.



[Pre-Burst Recording] ([4K Burst]/[4K Burst(S/S)])

The camera starts recording approx. 1 second before the shutter button is

pressed fully, so you will not miss a photo opportunity.

[ ] [4K PHOTO] Select [Pre-Burst Recording]

Settings: [ON]/[OFF]

• When [Pre-Burst Recording] is being used, [ ] is displayed on the recording

screen.

• The AF behavior and functionality restrictions when using [Pre-Burst Recording]

are the same as for [4K Pre-Burst].

168

7. Drive/Shutter/Image Stabilizer



How To cancel the 4K Photo functions

Press [ ] ( ), and then select [ ] ([Single]) or [ ].

• When you perform [Light Composition] or [Sequence Composition], we

recommend using a tripod or the shutter remote control function (391).

• Taking pictures of yourself (4K Selfie)

You can switch to 4K Photo Mode and take pictures of yourself. (89)

In Self Shot Mode, you can take pictures with [4K Burst (Wide-angle)], a

setting that allows you to include a wider background. (In modes other than

Self Shot Mode, the setting will switch to [4K Burst].)

• Setting ranges become the following with 4K photo recording:

– Shutter speed: 1/30 to 1/16000

– [Min. Shtr Speed]: [1/1000] to [1/30]

– Exposure compensation: ±3 EV

• The file save method differs depending on the type of card.

– SDHC memory card:

A new file will be created to continue recording if the file size exceeds

4 GB.

– SDXC memory card:

Files are not divided for recording.

• When recording, the angle of view becomes narrower. (Except when

recording with [4K Burst (Wide-angle)])

• When recording 4K photos, the following functions are not available:

– [Destination] ([Travel Date])

– [Simultaneous Record w/o Filter] (113, 227)

– HDMI output

• When recording using the [4K Pre-Burst] function, Step Zoom does not

operate.

• Scene Detection in [

] / [ ] mode works the same way as when

recording video.

• When [4K Pre-Burst] or [Pre-Burst Recording] is set, the battery drains

faster and the camera temperature rises. Set these settings only when

recording.

169

7. Drive/Shutter/Image Stabilizer

• For 4K photo, the menu items below are fixed to the following settings:

– [Picture Size]:4K (8M)

[4:3]: 3328×2496

[16:9]: 3840×2160

[3:2]: 3504×2336

[1:1]: 2880×2880

– [Shutter Type]: [ESHTR]

– [Quality]: [

]

• With 4K photo recording, the following functions are not available:

– [AFF] ([Focus Mode])

– Flash

– [Bracket]

– Program Shift

– [

] ([AF Mode])

– [MF Assist] ([4K Pre-Burst] only)

• When you record in an extremely bright location or under lighting such as

fluorescent or LED lighting, the coloring or brightness of the image may

change or horizontal stripes may appear on the screen.

Lowering the shutter speed may reduce the effect of horizontal stripes.

• 4K photo recording does not work while you are using the following

functions:

– [Glistening Water], [Artistic Nightscape], [Glittering Illuminations],

[Handheld Night Shot], [Clear Night Portrait], [Soft Image of a Flower]

([

] mode)

– [Rough Monochrome], [Silky Monochrome], [Miniature Effect], [Soft

Focus], [Star Filter], [Sunshine] ([

] mode)

– [Time Lapse Shot]

– [Stop Motion Animation]

– [Live View Composite]

– [Multi Exp.]

170

7. Drive/Shutter/Image Stabilizer

Selecting Pictures from a 4K Burst File

You can select pictures from the 4K burst files and save them.

• When continuing to select pictures from the Auto Review after recording 4K photos,

start the operation from either Step

2 or 3.

Select a 4K burst file on the

playback screen. (272)

● Select an image with the [ ]

icon and then press

● You can also perform the same

operation by touching [

• If the images were recorded with [4K Pre-

Burst], proceed to Step

Roughly select the scene.

● Drag the slide bar .

• For information about how to use the

picture selection slide view screen, refer

to page 172.

• If the images were recorded with [4K

Burst] or [4K Burst(S/S)], touching

[

] allows you to select the scene in

the 4K burst playback screen. (174)

Picture selection slide view

screen

Select the frame to save.

● Drag the picture selection slide

view

● You can also perform the same

operation by pressing

• To continuously rewind or forward frame-

by-frame, touch and hold [

]/[ ].

171

7. Drive/Shutter/Image Stabilizer

Save the picture.

● Touch [ ].

● A confirmation screen appears.

• The picture is saved in JPEG format.

• The recording information (Exif information), such as the shutter speed,

aperture, and ISO sensitivity, is also saved with the picture that is saved.

172

7. Drive/Shutter/Image Stabilizer

Picture Selection Operations



Picture Selection Slide View Screen Operations

Slide bar

Picture selection slide view

Position of displayed frame

Button

operation

Touch

operation

Description of operation

Drag/

Selects a frame.

• To change the frames displayed in the picture

selection slide view, select the frame at the left/

right end and then touch [

] or [ ].

Press and

hold

Touch and hold

Continuously rewinds or forwards frame-by-frame.

—

Touch/drag

Selects the frame to display.

—

Pinch out/

pinch in

Enlarges or reduces the display in small steps.

— Enlarges or reduces the display.

—

Selects a frame while maintaining the enlarged

display (during enlarged display).

173

7. Drive/Shutter/Image Stabilizer

Drag

Moves the enlarged display position (during

enlarged display).

—

Switches a marker to be displayed.

[Fn1]

Displays the 4K burst playback screen.

—

Switches to marker operation.

—

Adds or deletes a marker (white marker).

—

Displays the in-focus portion highlighted with color

([Peaking]).

• Switches in order of [

] → [ ]

([LOW]) → [

] ([HIGH]).

Saves the picture.

• During marker operation, you can skip to set markers or the beginning or end of the

4K burst file. Touch [

] to return to the previous operation.

Button

operation

Touch

operation

Description of operation

Moves to the next marker.

Moves to the previous marker.

174

7. Drive/Shutter/Image Stabilizer



4K burst playback screen

While paused During continuous playback

Button

operation

Touch

operation

Description of operation

Performs continuous playback or pauses

(during continuous playback).

Performs continuous rewind playback or

pauses (during continuous rewind playback).

Performs fast-forward playback or performs

frame-by-frame forwarding (while paused).

Performs fast-rewind playback or performs

frame-by-frame rewinding (while paused).

—

Touch/drag

Selects the frame to display (while paused).

—

Pinch out/

pinch in

Enlarges or reduces the display in small

steps (while paused).

—

Enlarges or reduces the display (while

paused).

—

Selects a frame while maintaining the

enlarged display (during enlarged display).

Drag

Moves the enlarged display position (during

enlarged display).

—

Switches a marker to be displayed.

[Fn1]

Displays the picture selection slide view

screen (while paused).

—

Switches to marker operation.

175

7. Drive/Shutter/Image Stabilizer

—

Adds or deletes a marker (white marker).

—

Displays the in-focus portion highlighted with

color ([Peaking]).

• Switches in order of [

] →

[

] ([LOW]) → [ ] ([HIGH]).

Saves the picture (while paused).

• During marker operation, you can skip to set markers or the beginning or end of the

4K burst file. Touch [

] to return to the previous operation.

Button

operation

Touch

operation

Description of operation

— Moves to the next marker.

— Moves to the previous marker.

• To select and save pictures from a 4K burst file on a PC, use the

“PHOTOfunSTUDIO” software.

However, it is not possible to treat 4K burst files as videos in

“PHOTOfunSTUDIO”.

176

7. Drive/Shutter/Image Stabilizer



Auto Marking function

The camera automatically sets markers on

scenes in which a face or the movement

of a subject is detected. (Green marker)

(Example: At the scene when a vehicle

passes by, a balloon bursts, or a person

turns around)

• Up to 10 markers are displayed for each file.

Markers set manually

Markers set by the Auto Marking function

Switches a marker to be displayed

Touch [

] on the slide view screen, 4K burst playback screen, or

marker operation screen.

[Auto]

Displays a marker on a scene in which a face or the

movement of a subject is detected.

[Face Priority]

Displays a marker with preference given to a scene in

which a face is detected.

[Motion Priority]

Displays a marker with preference given to a scene in

which the movement of a subject is detected.

[Off] Displays manually set markers only.

• You cannot delete markers set by the Auto Marking function.

• Markers may not be set by the Auto Marking function depending on the

recording conditions and the status of subjects.

• In the following cases, markers set by the Auto Marking function are not

displayed.

– 4K burst files recorded with [4K Pre-Burst]

177

7. Drive/Shutter/Image Stabilizer



[4K PHOTO Bulk Saving]

You can save any 5 second period of pictures from a 4K burst file all at

once.

Select [4K PHOTO Bulk Saving].

• [ ] [4K PHOTO Bulk Saving]

Press to select a 4K burst file and then press .

• If the burst time is 5 seconds or less, all frames are saved as pictures.

Select the first frame of the pictures to be saved all at once and then

press

• The pictures are saved as a group of burst pictures in JPEG format.

178

7. Drive/Shutter/Image Stabilizer

Post-Focus Recording

Taking burst pictures with the same image quality as 4K photos while

automatically changing the focus point.

You can select the focus point for the picture to save after recording.

Also Focus Stacking lets you combine images with multiple focus points.

This function is suitable for subjects that do not move.

Perform burst 4K

photo recording while

automatically shifting

the focus.

Touch the desired

focus point.

A picture with the

desired focus point is

made.

• Use a UHS Speed Class 3 or higher card when recording.

• The angle of view during recording becomes narrower.

• If you are going to perform Focus Stacking after recording, we recommend

using a tripod during recording.

• If the camera temperature rises, [

] may be displayed and recording may

stop. Wait until the camera cools down.

Press [ ] ( ).

179

7. Drive/Shutter/Image Stabilizer

Press to select [Post

Focus] and press

• You can also select by rotating .

Decide on the composition and

then adjust the focus.

● Press the shutter button halfway.

● AF detects the focus point on the

screen. (Excluding the edges of the

screen)

• If no areas on the screen can be brought

into focus, the focus indication

blinks

and recording is not possible.

• Maintain the same distance to the subject

and the same composition until recording

finishes.

Start recording.

● Press the shutter button fully.

180

7. Drive/Shutter/Image Stabilizer

• Recording is performed while

automatically changing the focus point.

When the icon

disappears, recording

ends automatically.

• Audio will not be recorded.

• In default settings, Auto Review operates,

and a screen that lets you select the

focus point will be displayed. (181)



How To Cancel [Post Focus]

Press [ ] ( ), and then select [ ] ([Single]) or [ ].

• Since recording is performed with the same image quality as 4K photos,

limitations apply to recording functions and menus.

• Focus settings cannot be changed during Post-Focus recording.

• [Digital Zoom] is not available. (DC-G100 only)

• When the following functions are being used, [Post Focus] is not available:

– Self Shot Mode

– [Glistening Water], [Artistic Nightscape], [Glittering Illuminations],

[Handheld Night Shot], [Clear Night Portrait], [Soft Image of a Flower]

([

] mode)

– [Rough Monochrome], [Silky Monochrome], [Miniature Effect], [Soft

Focus], [Star Filter], [Sunshine] ([

] mode)

– [Time Lapse Shot]

– [Stop Motion Animation]

– [Live View Composite]

– [Multi Exp.]

181

7. Drive/Shutter/Image Stabilizer

Selecting the Focus Point for the Picture to Save

Select a Post-Focus image on

the playback screen. (272)

● Select an image with the [ ]

icon and then press

● You can also perform the same

operation by touching the [

]

icon.

Touch the focus point.

• When the point is in focus, a green frame

appears.

• If there is no picture with the selected

point in focus, a red frame appears.

A picture cannot be saved.

• The edge of the screen cannot be

selected.

Save the picture.

● Touch [ ].

• The picture is saved in JPEG format.

182

7. Drive/Shutter/Image Stabilizer



Focus Point Selection Operations

Button

operation

Touch

operation

Description of operation

Touch

Selects a focus position.

• Selection is not possible during enlarged

display.

Enlarges the display.

• During enlarged display, you can fine-adjust

the focus by dragging the slide bar.

(You can also perform the same operation

by pressing

Reduces the display (during enlarged display).

[Fn1]

Switches to Focus Stacking operation. (183)

—

Displays the in-focus portion highlighted with

color ([Peaking]).

• Switches in order of [

] → [ ]

([LOW]) → [

] ([HIGH]).

Saves the picture.

• You cannot display an image on a TV screen and then select the focus

point.

183

7. Drive/Shutter/Image Stabilizer

Focus Stacking

By merging multiple focus points, you can save pictures that are focused

from the foreground through to the background.

Focus

Focus: closer

Focus: more distant

On the screen for selecting

the focus point in Step

2 on

page 181, touch [

● You can also perform the same

operation by pressing [Fn1].

Select the merging method.

[Auto

Merging]

Automatically selects

pictures suitable for merging

and then merges them into a

single picture.

[Range

Merging]

Merges pictures with

selected focus points into a

single picture.

Auto Merging

Range Merging

184

7. Drive/Shutter/Image Stabilizer

(When [Range Merging] is

selected)

Touch the focus points.

• Select at least two points.

Selected points are indicated with a

green frame.

• The in-focus range between the two

selected points is displayed in green.

• Ranges that cannot be selected are

displayed in gray.

• To cancel the selection, touch a point with

a green frame again.

• To select consecutive points, drag the

screen.

Set/CancelSet/Cancel

ResetReset

Set/CancelSet/Cancel

ResetReset

Save the picture.

● Touch [ ].

185

7. Drive/Shutter/Image Stabilizer



Operations when [Range Merging] Is Selected

Button

operation

Touch

operation

Description of operation

Touch Selects a point.

[Fn1] [Set/Cancel] Sets or cancels a point.

[DISP.]

[All]

Selects all points.

(Before selecting points)

[Reset]

Cancels all selections.

(After selecting points)

Merges the pictures and saves the resulting

picture.

• The picture is saved in JPEG format, and the recording information (Exif

information), such as the shutter speed, aperture, and ISO sensitivity, of the

picture with the closest point is also saved with the picture that is saved.

• Image misalignment due to camera shake will be adjusted automatically. If

adjustments are made, the angle of view will become slightly narrower when

the pictures are merged.

• If the subject moves during recording or the distance between subjects is

great, merging may create an unnatural picture.

186

7. Drive/Shutter/Image Stabilizer

Recording Using the Self-timer

Press [ ] ( ).

Press to select [Self Timer]

and press

• You can also select by rotating .

Set the Self-Timer time.

● Press to select the Self-Timer

time and press

• You can also select by rotating or .

• It can also be set using [Self Timer] in the

[Rec] or [Motion Picture] menu.

Decide on the composition and

then adjust the focus.

● Press the shutter button halfway.

• The focus and exposure are fixed when

the shutter button is pressed halfway.

187

7. Drive/Shutter/Image Stabilizer

Start recording.

● Press the shutter button or video

rec. button

• The self-timer light blinks and then the

shutter is released.



Setting item (Self-timer)

Takes a picture after 10 seconds.

Takes 3 pictures at approx. 2 second intervals after 10 seconds.

(When recording video, it will be the same operation with [

].)

Takes a picture after 2 seconds.

• This setting is a convenient way to avoid camera shake caused by

pressing the shutter button.

etc.

(Custom)

It will record after the number of seconds registered in [SET] of [Self

Timer] under the [Rec]/[Motion Picture] menu. (324, 331)

188

7. Drive/Shutter/Image Stabilizer



How To Cancel [Self Timer]

Press [ ] ( ), and then select [ ] ([Single]) or [ ].

• We recommend using a tripod when recording with the self-timer.

• When the following functions are being used, [ ] is not available:

– [Simultaneous Record w/o Filter] (113, 227)

– [Bracket]

– [Multi Exp.]

– [Live View Composite]

• The self-timer does not work while you are using the following functions:

– Self Shot Mode (When taking pictures in Self Shot Mode, you can set the

Self-timer in [Countdown] (87))

– [Time Lapse Shot]

– [Stop Motion Animation] (when [Auto Shooting] is set)

189

7. Drive/Shutter/Image Stabilizer

Recording with Time Lapse Shot

Pictures are taken automatically at a set recording interval.

This feature is ideal for keeping track of changes over time in subjects

such as animals and plants.

The pictures taken will be saved as a set of group images that can also be

combined into a video.

• Check that the clock is set correctly. (47)

• For long recording intervals, we recommend setting [Lens Position Resume]

to [ON] in the [Custom] ([Lens / Others]) menu.

Set the camera to [Time Lapse

Shot].

● [ ] [Time Lapse Shot]

Set the recording settings.

[Shooting

Interval Setting]

[ON]

Sets the interval before the next

recording takes place.

[OFF]

Takes pictures without leaving recording

intervals.

[Start Time]

[Now]

Starts recording when the shutter button

is pressed fully.

[Start Time Set] Starts recording at the set time.

[Image Count]/

[Shooting

Interval]

Sets the number of pictures and the recording interval to

be taken.

• [Shooting Interval] is not available when [Shooting

Interval Setting] is set to [OFF].

190

7. Drive/Shutter/Image Stabilizer

Press to select [Start] and

press

Focus on the subject and take

a picture.

• The recording starts by fully-pressing the

shutter button.

• When [Start Time Set] is set, the camera

will enter into sleep status until the start

time is reached.

• During recording standby, the camera

enters into sleep status when no

operation is performed for a certain

period of time.

• The recording will stop automatically.

Create a video. (195)

• After the recording has stopped, select

[Yes] on the confirmation screen to

proceed to create a video.

Even if you select [No], you can still

create a video with [Time Lapse Video] in

the [Playback] menu. (370)

191

7. Drive/Shutter/Image Stabilizer



Operations during Time Lapse Shot Recording

Pressing the shutter button halfway during sleep status will turn on the

camera.

• You can perform the following operations by pressing [Fn2] during Time Lapse

Shot recording.

[Continue] Returns to the recording. (Only during recording)

[Pause] Pauses the recording. (Only during recording)

[Resume]

Resumes the recording. (Only while paused)

• You can also press the shutter button to resume.

[End] Stops the Time Lapse Shot recording.

• The camera gives priority to achieving the correct exposure, so it may not

take pictures at the set interval or take the set number of pictures.

Furthermore, it may not end at the end time displayed on the screen.

• Time Lapse Shot is paused in the following cases.

– When the charge on the battery runs out

– When you set the camera on/off switch to [OFF]

You can set the camera on/off switch to [OFF] and replace the battery or

card.

Set the camera on/off switch to [ON] and then press the shutter button

fully to resume recording.

(Note that the images recorded after replacing the card will be saved as a

separate set of group images.)

• [Time Lapse Shot] is not available when using the following functions:

– [Handheld Night Shot] ([

] mode)

– Self Shot Mode

– [Stop Motion Animation]

– [Live View Composite]

– [Multi Exp.]

192

7. Drive/Shutter/Image Stabilizer

Recording with Stop Motion Animation

Take pictures while moving the subject little by little.

The pictures taken will be saved as a set of group images that can be

combined into a stop motion video.

Set the camera to [Stop Motion

Animation].

● [ ] [Stop Motion

Animation]

Set the recording settings.

[Auto Shooting]

[ON]

Takes pictures automatically at a set recording

interval.

[OFF]

This is for taking pictures manually, frame by

frame.

[Shooting

Interval]

Sets the recording interval for [Auto Shooting].

Press to select [Start] and

press

Press to select [New] and

press

193

7. Drive/Shutter/Image Stabilizer

Focus on the subject and take

a picture.

● Take pictures repeatedly while

moving the subject little by little.

• The recording screen displays up to two

pictures taken previously. Use them as

reference for the amount of movement.

• You can play back the recorded stop

motion images by pressing [

] during

recording.

Press [

] to delete unnecessary images.

To return to the recording screen, press

[

] again.

Stop recording.

● Press and then select [Stop

Motion Animation] from the [Rec]

menu to stop recording.

Create a video. (195)

• After the recording has stopped, select

[Yes] on the confirmation screen to

proceed to create a video.

Even if you select [No], you can still

create a video with [Stop Motion Video] in

the [Playback] menu. (370)

194

7. Drive/Shutter/Image Stabilizer

• When you select [Additional] in step 4, group pictures recorded using [Stop

Motion Animation] are displayed. Select an image and proceed to Step

• Up to 9999 frames can be recorded.

• If the camera is turned off while recording, a message for resuming the

recording is displayed when it is turned on. Selecting [Yes] allows you to

continue the recording from the interruption point.

• The camera gives priority to achieving the correct exposure, so it may not

take pictures at the set interval when the flash, etc. is used for recording.

• A picture cannot be selected from [Add to Picture Group] when it is the only

one that was taken.

• [Stop Motion Animation] is not available when using the following functions:

– Self Shot Mode

– [Time Lapse Shot]

– [Live View Composite]

– [Multi Exp.]

• When the following function is being used, [Auto Shooting] in [Stop Motion

Animation] is not available:

– [Handheld Night Shot] ([

] mode)

195

7. Drive/Shutter/Image Stabilizer

Time Lapse Shot/Stop Motion Animation

Videos

After performing Time Lapse Shot or Stop Motion Animation recording,

you can proceed to create a video.

• Refer to the sections below about these recording functions.

– Time Lapse Shot recording: 189

– Stop Motion Animation recording: 192

• You can also create videos with [Time Lapse Video] (370) or [Stop Motion Video]

(370) in the [Playback] menu.

Select [Yes] on the

confirmation screen that

appears after recording.

Set the options for creating a

video.

Select [OK].

[OK] Creates a video.

[Rec Quality] Sets the video image quality.

[Frame Rate]

Sets the number of frames per second.

The larger the number is, the smoother the video will be.

[Sequence]

[NORMAL] Splices pictures together in recording order.

[REVERSE]

Splices pictures together in reverse recording

order.

196

7. Drive/Shutter/Image Stabilizer

• Videos cannot be created if the recording time exceeds 29 minutes and

59 seconds.

• In the following cases, videos cannot be created if the file size exceeds

4 GB:

– When an SDHC memory card is being used and a 4K [Rec Quality] is set

– When [Rec Quality] is set to FHD or HD

197

7. Drive/Shutter/Image Stabilizer

Bracket Recording

When the shutter button is pressed, the camera can record multiple

images while automatically changing the setting value for exposure,

aperture, focus or white balance.

• Aperture Bracket can be selected in the following modes:

– [

] mode

– [

] mode (when ISO sensitivity is set to [AUTO])

Set [Bracket Type].

● [ ] [Bracket] [Bracket

Type]

Set [More Settings].

● For information about [More

Settings], refer to page for each

bracketing method.

Close the menu.

● Press the shutter button halfway.

Focus on the subject and then

take pictures.

198

7. Drive/Shutter/Image Stabilizer



Setting Items ([Bracket Type])

Exposure Bracket

When the shutter button is pressed, the camera records

while changing the exposure. (200)

Aperture Bracket

When the shutter button is pressed, the camera records

while changing the aperture value. (200)

Focus Bracket

When the shutter button is pressed, the camera records

while changing the focus point. (201)

White Balance

Bracket

When the shutter button is pressed once, the camera

automatically records three images with the different

white balance adjustment values. (202)

[OFF] —



How to Cancel Bracketing

Select [OFF] in Step 1.

199

7. Drive/Shutter/Image Stabilizer

• Bracket recording is not available while you are using the following

functions:

– Self Shot Mode

– [Glistening Water], [Glittering Illuminations], [Handheld Night Shot], [Soft

Image of a Flower] ([

] mode)

– [Rough Monochrome], [Silky Monochrome], [Miniature Effect], [Soft

Focus], [Star Filter], [Sunshine] ([

] mode)

– [4K PHOTO], [Post Focus]

– [Time Lapse Shot]

– [Stop Motion Animation] (when [Auto Shooting] is set)

– [Live View Composite]

– [Multi Exp.]

• Exposure Bracket, Aperture Bracket, and Focus Bracket are unavailable

when recording with the flash. Aperture Bracket and Focus Bracket can be

used when recording with an external flash.

• When the following functions are being used, White Balance Bracket is not

available.

– [

] mode, [ ] mode

– [Burst]

– [

], [ ], [ ] ([Quality])

– [Filter Settings]

200

7. Drive/Shutter/Image Stabilizer



[More Settings] (Exposure Bracket)

[Step]

Sets the image count and exposure compensation step.

[3•1/3] (record 3 images in 1/3 EV steps) to [7•1] (record

7 images in 1 EV steps)

[Sequence] Sets the order in which images are recorded.

[Single Shot

Setting]

[

]: Takes only one image each time the shutter button is

pressed.

[

]: Takes all of the set number of images when the shutter

button is pressed once.

• The [

] icon blinks until all of the set number of pictures

is taken.

• When you record images with Exposure Bracket after setting the exposure

compensation value, the images recorded are based on the selected

exposure compensation value.



[More Settings] (Aperture Bracket)

[Image Count]

[3]/[5]: Records the set number of images while alternately

setting the aperture value in the sequence of one before and

then one after using the initial aperture value as the reference.

[ALL]: Records images using all aperture values.

Example when the initial position is set to F8.0

4.0 5.6 8.0 11 16 22

1st image, 2nd image, 3rd image ... 7th image

• The available aperture values vary depending on the lens.

201

7. Drive/Shutter/Image Stabilizer



[More Settings] (Focus Bracket)

[Step]

Sets the focus adjustment step.

• The distance that the focus point is moved becomes shorter if

the initial focus point is close, and longer if it is far away.

[Image Count]

Sets the image count.

• This cannot be set when taking burst pictures.

Burst pictures are taken while the shutter button is pressed.

[Sequence]

[0/–/+]: Records while alternately moving the focus point in the

sequence of forward and then backward using the initial focus

point as the reference.

[0/+]: Records while moving the focus point toward the far side

using the initial focus point as the reference.

Example when [Sequence]: [0/–/+] is set

Example when [Sequence]: [0/+] is set

Focus: closer

Focus: more distant

1st image, 2nd image ... 5th image ...

• Pictures recorded with Focus Bracket are displayed as images of one group.

• [Shutter Type] is fixed to [ESHTR].

202

7. Drive/Shutter/Image Stabilizer



[More Settings] (White Balance Bracket)

Rotate or to set the correction step

and then press

Horizontal direction: [A] - [B]

Vertical direction: [G] - [M]

• The correction step can also be set by

touching [

]/[ ]/[ ]/[ ].

203

7. Drive/Shutter/Image Stabilizer

[Silent Mode]

This disables all operation sounds and light output at once.

The audio from the speaker will be muted and the flash and the AF assist

light will be set to forced off mode.

• The following settings are fixed:

– [Flash Mode]: [

] (Forced Flash Off)

– [AF Assist Lamp]: [OFF]

– [Shutter Type]: [ESHTR]

– [Beep Volume]: [

] (Off)

– [Shutter Vol.]: [

] (Off)

[ ] Select [Silent Mode]

Settings: [ON]/[OFF]

• Even when [ON] is set, the following functions light/blink:

– Self-timer light

– Wireless Connection Lamp

• When [Live View Composite] is being used, [Silent Mode] is not available.

• Use this function at your own responsibility sufficiently considering the

privacy, portrait, and other rights of subjects.

204

7. Drive/Shutter/Image Stabilizer

[Shutter Type]

Selects the shutter type to use for taking pictures.

[ ] Select [Shutter Type]

[AUTO]

Switches the shutter type automatically depending on the

recording conditions and shutter speed.

[EFC] Records with the electronic front curtain type.

[ESHTR] Records with the electronic shutter type.

Electronic front curtain

type

Electronic shutter type

Mechanism

This type starts exposure

electronically and ends it

with the mechanical shutter.

This type starts and ends

exposure electronically.

Flash

—

Shutter speed (sec.)

[T] (Time,

max. approx. 60 seconds)

60 to 1/500

to 1/16000

Shutter sound

Mechanical shutter sound

Electronic shutter sound

1 This setting is available only in [ ] mode.

2 If the ISO sensitivity is higher than [3200], the shutter speed will be faster than

1 second.

3 The electronic shutter sound can be set in [Shutter Vol.] and [Shutter Tone] in

[Beep] of the [Setup] menu. (356)

205

7. Drive/Shutter/Image Stabilizer

• When [ ] is displayed on the screen, recording will be with the electronic

shutter type.

• When a moving subject is recorded using the electronic shutter, the subject

may appear distorted in the picture.

• When you record using the electronic shutter under lighting such as

fluorescent or LED lighting, horizontal stripes may be recorded. In such a

case, lowering the shutter speed may reduce the effect of horizontal stripes.

• When the following functions are being used, [Shutter Type] is not available:

– [Live View Composite]

– [Silent Mode]

– Focus Bracket ([Bracket])

• To reduce shutter-induced blur, you can set the shutter to release a few

seconds after the shutter button is pressed:

[

] [Shutter Delay] (325)

206

7. Drive/Shutter/Image Stabilizer

Image Stabilizer

The camera detects jitter during recording and automatically corrects it, so

you can record images with reduced jitter.

• When using a lens with an O.I.S. switch, set the switch on the lens to ON.

• When you use a lens with no connection function with the camera,

[Stabilizer] cannot be selected.

• When you use a lens without the stabilizer function, [Operation Mode]

cannot be selected.

207

7. Drive/Shutter/Image Stabilizer

Image Stabilizer Settings

Set the image stabilizer operation to match the recording situation.

[ ] / [ ] Select [Stabilizer]

[Operation

Mode]

Sets the stabilization movement (blur) to match the recording

method (normal, panning). (208)

[E-Stabilization

(Video)]

[HIGH]

This will stabilize strong jitter. (Since the

stabilizing width is large, the angle of view is

narrowed.)

• [

] is displayed on the screen during video

recording.

[STANDARD]

This will stabilize jitter. (The angle of view may

become narrow.)

• [

] is displayed on the screen during video

recording.

[OFF]

This will turn off the electronic stabilization

(Video).

Camera shake during video recording is corrected along

the vertical, horizontal, roll, pitch, and yaw axes through the

combined use of the in-lens and electronic image stabilizers.

(5-Axis Hybrid Image Stabilizer)

• If the recording screen icon is not indicated with [

] or

[

] even when Panasonic interchangeable lens that

supports Dual I.S.2 is being used, update the lens firmware

to the latest version. For the latest information on supported

lenses or to download their firmware, refer to our support site.

(20)

• When using an interchangeable lens that does not support

Dual I.S.2 or when [Operation Mode] is set to [OFF], [

]

(Strong) or [

] (Standard) is displayed.

208

7. Drive/Shutter/Image Stabilizer

• When the shutter button is pressed halfway, the camera shake alert icon

[

] may be displayed on the recording screen.

If this is displayed, we recommend using a tripod, the self timer or the

shutter remote control function (391).

• We recommend turning off the image stabilizer function when using a tripod.

• When the following functions are being used, [E-Stabilization (Video)] is not

available:

– [

] mode

– [Digital Zoom] (DC-G100 only)

– [4K Live Cropping]



[Operation Mode]

Set the stabilization movement (blur) to match the recording method

(normal, panning).

[Normal]

Corrects vertical, horizontal, and rotational camera shake.

This function is suitable for normal recording.

[Panning]

Corrects vertical camera shake.

This is suitable for horizontal panning.

[OFF] Turns the in-lens image stabilization function OFF.

• The image stabilizers to be activated differ depending on your lens.

• When using lenses with an O.I.S. switch, the camera’s operation mode cannot be

set to [OFF]. Set the switch on the lens to OFF.

• When the following functions are being used, [

] ([Panning]) switches to [ ]

([Normal]):

– Video recording, [4K PHOTO], [Post Focus]

209

8. Brightness (Exposure)/

Coloring/Picture effect

[Metering Mode]

Type of optical measurement to measure brightness can be changed.

[ ]/[ ] Select [Metering Mode]

Multi-metering

Method in which the most suitable exposure is measured

by judging the allocation of brightness on the whole

screen.

Center-weighted

Method used to perform measuring which focuses on the

center of the screen.

Spot

Method used to measure the

extremely small part around the spot-

metering target

• When you move the AF area, the

spot metering target also moves

to match.

210

8. Brightness (Exposure)/Coloring/Picture effect

Exposure Compensation

You can compensate the exposure when the correct exposure determined

by the camera is too bright or too dark.

You can adjust the exposure in 1/3 EV steps in a range of ±5 EV.

When recording videos or recording with 4K photo or Post-Focus, the

range changes to ±3 EV.

Press [ ].

Compensate the exposure.

● Rotate or .

Confirm your selection.

● Press the shutter button halfway.

211

8. Brightness (Exposure)/Coloring/Picture effect

• In [ ] mode, you can compensate the exposure by setting the ISO

sensitivity to [AUTO].

• When the exposure compensation value falls below or exceeds ±3 EV, the

brightness of the recording screen will no longer change.

Press the shutter button halfway or use AE Lock to reflect the value on the

recording screen.

• The set exposure compensation value is stored even if you turn off the

camera.

• You can set the exposure compensation value to be reset when the camera

is turned off:

[

] [ ] [Exposure Comp. Reset] (333)

• Exposure Bracket can be set and flash output can be adjusted on the

exposure compensation screen:

[

] [ ] [Exposure Comp. Disp. Setting] (339)

212

8. Brightness (Exposure)/Coloring/Picture effect

Locking Focus and Exposure (AF/AE

Lock)

Lock the focus and exposure in advance to take pictures with the same

focus and exposure settings while changing the composition.

This is useful when you want to bring an edge of the screen into focus or

there is a backlight, for example.

• These cannot be registered to [Fn5] to [Fn9].

Lock focus and exposure.

● Press and hold the Fn button.

● If focus is locked, then the AF lock

icon

will be displayed.

● If exposure is locked, then the AE

lock icon

will be displayed.

Hold the Fn button to decide on the composition and

then perform recording.

● Press the shutter button fully.

213

8. Brightness (Exposure)/Coloring/Picture effect



Setting the function of [AF/AE LOCK]

[ ] [ ] Select [AF/AE Lock]

[AE LOCK] The exposure is locked.

[AF LOCK] The focus is locked.

[AF/AE LOCK] Both focus and exposure are locked.

[AF-ON] Auto Focus is activated.

• Program Shift can be set even when AE is locked.

• You can maintain lock even without pressing and holding the Fn button:

[

] [ ] [AF/AE Lock Hold] (333)

214

8. Brightness (Exposure)/Coloring/Picture effect

ISO Sensitivity

You can set light sensitivity (ISO sensitivity).

With the default settings, you can set 200 to 25600 in 1/3 EV increments.

Press [ ] ( ).

Select ISO sensitivity.

● Rotate or .

Confirm your selection.

● Press the shutter button halfway.

Characteristics of the ISO Sensitivity

By increasing the ISO sensitivity, the shutter speed can be increased in

dark places to prevent camera shake and subject blur. However, higher ISO

sensitivities also increase the amount of noise in the recorded images.

215

8. Brightness (Exposure)/Coloring/Picture effect



Setting Items (ISO Sensitivity)

[AUTO]

ISO sensitivity is automatically set in a range up to 3200

depending on the brightness of a subject.

(Intelligent ISO)

ISO sensitivity is automatically set in a range up to 3200

depending on the movement and brightness of a subject.

• The shutter speed is not fixed when the shutter button is

pressed halfway. It is continuously changing to match the

movement of the subject until the shutter button is pressed

fully.

[200] to [25600]

The ISO sensitivity is fixed at the selected value.

• You can extend the ISO sensitivity lower limit to [100] by

setting [Extended ISO] (333) to [ON] in the [Custom]

([Exposure]) menu.

• When the following functions are being used, [

] is not available:

– [

] mode, [ ] mode, [ ] mode, [ ] mode

– [4K PHOTO], [Post Focus]

– [Live View Composite]

• When the following functions are being used, the ISO sensitivity that can be set is

restricted.

– [

] mode, [ ] mode, [4K PHOTO], [Post Focus]: [6400] (upper limit)

– [V-Log L] ([Photo Style]): [400] (lower limit)

– [Filter Settings]: [3200] (upper limit) (When set to [High Dynamic], the setting is

fixed to [AUTO].)

– [Live View Composite]: [200] (lower limit) (When [Extended ISO] is set to [ON],

the setting will be [L.100].), [1600] (upper limit)

– [Multi Exp.]: [200] (lower limit), [3200] (upper limit)

216

8. Brightness (Exposure)/Coloring/Picture effect

• During video recording, the camera operates as [AUTO] (for video). (When

not in [

] / [ ] mode)

• You can set upper and lower limits for ISO Auto:

[

] [ISO Sensitivity (photo)] (321)

[

] [ISO Sensitivity (video)] (264)

• You can set the lower limit for shutter speed for ISO Auto:

[

] [Min. Shtr Speed] (321)

• You can change the intervals between ISO sensitivity settings values:

[

] [ ] [ISO Increments] (333)

• You can set the upper limit for ISO Auto on the ISO sensitivity settings

screen:

[

] [ ] [ISO Displayed Setting] (339)

217

8. Brightness (Exposure)/Coloring/Picture effect

White Balance (WB)

White balance (WB) is a function that corrects the color cast produced by

the light illuminating the subject.

It corrects the colors so that white objects appear in white to make the

overall color closer to what is seen by the eye.

Normally, you can use auto ([AWB], [AWBc] or [AWBw]) to obtain the

optimal white balance.

Set this function when the coloring of the image is different from what you

expected, or you want to change the coloring to capture the ambience.

Press [ ] ( ).

Select the white balance.

● Rotate or .

218

8. Brightness (Exposure)/Coloring/Picture effect

Confirm your selection.

● Press the shutter button halfway.



Setting Items (White Balance)

[AWB] Auto

[AWBc]

Auto (Reduces the reddish hue under an incandescent light

source)

[AWBw]

Auto (Leaves the reddish hue under an incandescent light

source)

[

]

Clear sky

[

]

Cloudy sky

[

]

Shade under a clear sky

[

]

Incandescent light

[

]

Flash

[

] to [ ]

Set mode 1 to 4 (220)

[

] to [ ]

Color temperatures 1 to 4 (220)

1 It operates as [AWB] during video recording or when recording with [4K PHOTO]

or [Post Focus].

219

8. Brightness (Exposure)/Coloring/Picture effect

1 [AWB] will work within this range.

2 Blue sky

3 Cloudy sky (Rain)

4 Shade

5 Sunlight

6 White fluorescent light

7 Incandescent light bulb

8 Sunrise and sunset

9 Candlelight

K=Kelvin Color Temperature

• Under lighting such as fluorescent or LED lighting, the appropriate white

balance will vary depending on the lighting type.

Use [AWB], [AWBc], [AWBw] or [

] to [ ].

• The white balance is fixed to [AWB] while [Filter Settings] is being used.

• The White Balance may not operate correctly if you take pictures using a

flash and the subject is recorded outside of the effective flash range.

• In [

] mode, settings suitable for each scene are made.

• In [

] mode, changing the scene or recording mode will return White

Balance settings (including the White Balance fine adjustment setting) back

to [AWB].

220

8. Brightness (Exposure)/Coloring/Picture effect



Registering the White Set ([ ] to [ ])

Take pictures of a white object under the light source of the recording

location to adjust the white balance until it appears white.

Press [ ] ( ) and then select any value from [ ] to [ ].

Press .

Aim the camera at a white object so that it appears inside the frame at

the center of the screen and then press

• This will set the white balance and return you to the recording screen.

• After retrieving the image for noise reduction with [Live View Composite],

the white set registration cannot be used.



Color Temperature Setting ([ ] to [ ])

Set the numeric value for the white balance color temperature.

Press [ ] ( ) and then select any value from [ ] to [ ].

Press .

Press to select the color temperature and then press .

• You can set a color temperature from [2500K] to [10000K].

221

8. Brightness (Exposure)/Coloring/Picture effect

Adjusting the White Balance

You can adjust the coloring even when the coloring you want to apply is

not produced by the selected white balance.

Press [ ] ( ).

Select the white balance and then press .

● The adjustment screen is displayed.

Adjust the coloring.

: [A] (AMBER: ORANGE)

: [G] (GREEN: GREENISH)

: [B] (BLUE: BLUISH)

: [M] (MAGENTA: REDDISH)

• You can also touch the graph to make

adjustments.

• Press [DISP.] to return to the unadjusted

state.

• You can set the White Balance Bracket

by rotating

or . (202)

222

8. Brightness (Exposure)/Coloring/Picture effect

Confirm your selection.

● Press the shutter button halfway.

• When the white balance is adjusted, the color of its recording screen icon

changes to the adjusted color.

Adjusting toward the [G] side will display [+], while adjusting toward the [M]

side will display [–].

223

8. Brightness (Exposure)/Coloring/Picture effect

[Photo Style]

You can select the finishing settings of images to suit your subjects and

expression styles.

The image quality can be adjusted for each Photo Style.

[ ]/[ ] Select [Photo Style]

[Standard] The standard setting.

[Vivid]

A setting that produces a more vivid quality with

higher saturation and contrast.

[Natural]

A setting that produces a softer quality with lower

contrast.

[Monochrome] A monochrome setting with no color shades.

[L.Monochrome]

A black-and-white setting with rich gradation and

crisp black accents.

[L.Monochrome D]

A monochrome setting that creates a dynamic

impression with enhanced highlights and shadows.

[Scenery]

A setting suited for sceneries with vivid blue skies

and greens.

[Portrait]

A setting suited for portraits with a healthy and

beautiful skin tone.

[Custom]

Setting for using colors and picture quality that were

registered in advance.

[Cinelike D]

Setting that gives priority to the dynamic range by

using a gamma curve designed to create film-like

images. Suited for editing.

[Cinelike V]

Setting that gives priority to the contrast by using a

gamma curve designed to create film-like images.

[V-Log L]

Gamma curve setting intended for post-production

processing.

• It allows you to add rich gradation to images

during post production editing.

224

8. Brightness (Exposure)/Coloring/Picture effect

• In [ ] mode, operation differs from that in other recording modes.

– [Standard] or [Monochrome] can be set.

– The setting will be reset to [Standard] when the camera is switched to

another recording mode or it is turned off.

– Image quality cannot be adjusted.

• Only picture quality adjustment can be set in [

] mode.

• When [Filter Settings] is being used, [Photo Style] is not available.



Adjusting Image Quality

Press to select the type of Photo Style.

Press to select an item and then

press

to adjust.

• You can register adjusted details to

[Custom] by pressing [DISP.].

Standard

Press .

• When the image quality is adjusted, the

Photo Style icon on the recording screen is

indicated with [+].

Settings Items (Image Quality Adjustment)

[Contrast]

Adjusts the contrast in the image.

[Sharpness] Adjusts the outlines in the image.

[Noise Reduction]

Adjusts the noise reduction effect.

• Increasing the effect may cause a slight drop in

picture resolution.

[Saturation]

Adjusts the vividness of colors.

[Color Tone]

Adjusts blue and yellow tints.

225

8. Brightness (Exposure)/Coloring/Picture effect

[Filter Effect]

[Yellow]

Enhances the contrast. (Effect: weak)

Records the sky with a clear blue.

[Orange]

Enhances the contrast. (Effect: medium)

Records the sky with a darker blue.

[Red]

Enhances the contrast. (Effect: strong)

Records the sky with a much darker blue.

[Green]

Skin and lips of people appear in natural

tones.

Green leaves appear brighter and more

enhanced.

[Off] —

[Grain Effect]

[Low]/

[Standard]/

[High]

Sets the grain effect level.

[Off] —

1 Cannot be adjusted when [V-Log L] is selected.

2 Available when anything other than [Monochrome], [L.Monochrome],

[L.Monochrome D] or [V-Log L] is selected.

3 Available when [Monochrome], [L.Monochrome] or [L.Monochrome D] is selected.

• The effects of [Grain Effect] cannot be checked on the recording screen.

• [Grain Effect] is not available when using the following functions:

– Video recording, [4K PHOTO], [Post Focus]

226

8. Brightness (Exposure)/Coloring/Picture effect

[Filter Settings]

This mode records with additional image effects (filters) just like in the

[

] mode. (113)

You can adjust the effect for each filter.

In addition, you can simultaneously take pictures without effects.

[ ]/[ ] [Filter Settings] Select [Filter Effect]

Settings: [ON]/[OFF]/[SET]



Setting a Filter with Touch Operation

Touch [ ].

Touch the item to set.

[

]: Filter on/off

[

]: Filter

[

]: Filter effect adjustment

• When using [Filter Effect], you cannot use menus or recording functions

which are not available in [

] mode.

• White balance will be fixed to [AWB] and the flash will be fixed to [

]

(Forced Flash Off).

• The upper limit to ISO sensitivity is [3200].

• When [High Dynamic] is set, the ISO sensitivity is fixed to [AUTO].

• [Rough Monochrome], [Silky Monochrome], [Soft Focus], [Star Filter] and

[Sunshine] are not available during video recording.

• [Filter Effect] is not available when using the following functions:

– [Live View Composite]

– [Multi Exp.]

– [4K Live Cropping]

227

8. Brightness (Exposure)/Coloring/Picture effect

[Simultaneous Record w/o Filter]

You can simultaneously take pictures with no added filter effects.

[ ]/[ ] [Filter Settings] Select [Simultaneous Record w/o

Filter]

Settings: [ON]/[OFF]

• [Simultaneous Record w/o Filter] is not available when using the following

functions:

– [Burst]

– [4K PHOTO], [Post Focus]

– Taking still pictures while a video is being recorded (when [

] ([Video

Priority]) is set)

– [Time Lapse Shot]

– [Stop Motion Animation]

– [

], [ ], [ ] ([Quality])

– [Bracket]

228

9. Flash

Using a Flash



Open/Close the built-in flash

To open the flash

To close the flash

• The flash setting is fixed to [ ] (Forced

Flash Off) while the flash is closed.

(Except when using an external flash)

• Be careful not to catch a finger or any other part of your body or any object

when you close the flash.

• Forcibly closing the flash can damage the camera.

• Be sure to close the built-in flash when not in use.

• Do not bring any objects near the flash or block the flash. Heat or light may

cause the object to deform or discolor.

• Do not block the flash with your hand while it is firing.

• Do not close the flash immediately after the preliminary flash is operated

prior to taking pictures for Forced ON/Red-Eye Reduction and other flash

settings. If you close the flash immediately, it will cause a malfunction.

• If you record repeatedly, time may be needed to charge the flash.

While the flash is charging, images will be recorded without the flash firing.

• When an External Flash is attached, it will have priority over the built-in

flash. For information about external flash, refer to (449).

229

9. Flash

Setting Flash

You can set the flash function to control flash firing from the camera.

[Flash Mode]

Sets the flash mode.

[ ] [Flash] Select [Flash

Mode]

Forced Flash On

Forced On/Red-Eye

The flash fires every time regardless of the recording

conditions.

This is suitable for recording when there is

backlighting or under lighting such as fluorescent

lighting.

Slow Sync.

Slow Sync./Red-Eye

When recording images against a nightscape, this will

slow the shutter speed when the flash fires to make

not only the subject but also the nightscape appear

brighter.

• Slower shutter speeds may result in blurry images.

To avoid this, we recommend using a tripod.

Forced Flash Off The flash does not fire.

• For details about flash settings in [

] / [ ] mode, refer to (80).

230

9. Flash

• The flash fires twice.

The interval between the first and second firings is longer when [

] or

[

] is set. The subject should not move until the second firing has

finished.

• [

] and [ ] cannot be used when the following are set:

– [Flash Synchro]: [2ND]

– [Wireless]: [ON]

• Some flash modes may not be available depending on the settings on the

external flash.

• The effectiveness of red-eye reduction varies from person to person.

The effect, which is influenced by factors such as distance to the subject

and whether the subject is looking at the camera when the preliminary flash

is fired, may not be very noticeable in some cases.

231

9. Flash



Available Flash Settings by Recording Mode

The available flash settings depend on the recording mode.

( : Available, —: Not available)

Recording mode

— —

(●: Default settings)

[Clear Portrait]

● — —

[Silky Skin] ● — —

[Sweet Child’s Face] ● — —

[Clear Night Portrait] — — — ●

[Soft Image of a Flower] ● — — —

[Appetizing Food] ● — — —

[Cute Dessert] ● — — —

[Freeze Animal Motion] ● — — —

[Clear Sports Shot] ● — — —

[Monochrome] ●

• Flash recording is not possible when the following functions are being used:

– [Backlit Softness], [Relaxing Tone], [Distinct Scenery], [Bright Blue Sky],

[Romantic Sunset Glow], [Vivid Sunset Glow], [Glistening Water], [Clear

Nightscape], [Cool Night Sky], [Warm Glowing Nightscape], [Artistic

Nightscape], [Glittering Illuminations], [Handheld Night Shot] ([

]

mode)

– [4K PHOTO], [Post Focus]

– [ESHTR]

– [Silent Mode]

– [HDR]

– [Filter Settings]

• [

] mode flash setting is returned to the initial value with each change of

scene.

232

9. Flash



Shutter Speeds for Flash Modes

[Flash Mode] Shutter speed (sec.)

1/50

1 to 1/50

1 In [ ] mode, the shutter speed will be 60 seconds to 1/50 of a second and in [ ]

mode it will be [T] (Time) or 60 seconds to 1/50 of a second.

• Shutter speeds faster than 1/50 of a second are not available when you fire the

flash.

• In [

] / [ ] mode, the shutter speed changes depending on the detected

scene.



The available flash range (approximation)

When you use certain lenses, light from the flash may be blocked or fail to

cover the lens field of view, causing dark areas to appear in the resulting

pictures. Check the distance to the subject when taking a picture.

When the interchangeable lens (H-FS12032) is used

Wide Tele

0.4 m (1.3 feet) to 4.1 m (13 feet) 0.3 m (0.98 feet) to 2.5 m (8.2 feet)

When the interchangeable lens (H-FS35100) is used

Wide Tele

0.9 m (3.0 feet) to 3.6 m (12 feet) 0.9 m (3.0 feet) to 2.5 m (8.2 feet)

• These ranges are obtained, the ISO sensitivity is set to [AUTO], and [ISO Auto

Upper Limit (Photo)] in [ISO Sensitivity (photo)] is set to [AUTO].

233

9. Flash

• When taking pictures with flash with the lens hood attached, the lower

portion of the photo may turn dark and the control of the flash may be

disabled because the photo flash may be obscured by the lens hood. We

recommend detaching the lens hood.

[Flash Adjust.]

Adjusts the flash output if a picture taken using the flash is too bright or

too dark.

Select [Flash Adjust.].

● [ ] [Flash] [Flash

Adjust.]

Press to adjust the flash

output and then press

• It can be adjusted within the range of

[–2 EV] to [+2 EV] in 1/3 EV steps.

• When the intensity of the flash is adjusted, [+] or [-] is displayed on the flash

icon.

• For information about adjusting the flash output when recording using a

wireless flash, refer to page 238.

• [Flash Adjust.] cannot be used when [Wireless] is set to [ON].

234

9. Flash

[Flash Synchro]

When a moving subject is recorded at night using a slow shutter and flash,

a trail of light may appear in front of the subject.

If you set [Flash Synchro] to [2ND], you can take a dynamic picture with

a trail of light appearing behind the subject by firing the flash immediately

before the shutter closes.

[ ] [Flash] Select [Flash

Synchro]

[1ST]

This is the normal method for recording

with the Flash.

[2ND]

The light source appears behind the

subject and the picture becomes

dynamic.

• When [2ND] is set, [2nd] is displayed on the flash icon of the recording

screen.

• When the following functions are being used, [Flash Synchro] is fixed to

[1ST]:

– [Wireless]

– [Live View Composite]

• The effect may not be adequately achieved at faster shutter speeds.

235

9. Flash

[Auto Exposure Comp.]

Automatically adjust the flash output in conjunction with the exposure

compensation value. (210)

[ ] [Flash] Select [Auto Exposure Comp.]

Settings: [ON]/[OFF]

[Red-Eye Removal]

When [Flash Mode] is set to [ ] or [ ], the camera automatically

detects red-eye and corrects image data.

[ ] Select [Red-Eye Removal]

Settings: [ON]/[OFF]

• When [ON] is set, [ ] is displayed on the flash icon.

• Red-eye cannot be corrected depending on its appearance.

236

9. Flash

Recording Using a Wireless Flash

You can use a Flash (DMW-FL580L/DMW-FL360L/DMW-FL200L:

optional) to record using a wireless flash.

You can separately control the firing of three flash groups and the flash

attached to the hot shoe of the camera.

• The built-in flash does not support wireless flash control.



Placing a Wireless Flash

Place the wireless flash with its wireless sensor facing the camera.

Placement example

When C is placed to erase

the shadow in the background

of the subject that the flash

groups A and B will create

Placement range

When DMW-FL200L is attached

7 m (23 feet)

7 m

(23 feet)

5 m

(16 feet)

5 m

(16 feet)

• The placement range serves as a guide for when recording with the

camera held horizontally. The range differs depending on the surrounding

environment.

• We recommend using a maximum of three wireless flashes in each group.

• If the subject is too close, communication light may affect the exposure.

You can reduce the effect by setting [Communication Light] to [LOW] or

lowering the output with a diffuser or similar device. (239)

237

9. Flash

Attach an external flash to the

camera. (449)

Set the wireless flashes to [RC]

mode and then place them.

• Set the channel and group for the

wireless flashes.

Enable the wireless flash

function of the camera.

● [ ] [Flash] [Wireless]

[ON]

Set [Wireless Channel].

• Select the same channel as on the

wireless flash side.

Set [Wireless Setup].

• Set the firing mode and flash output.

238

9. Flash



Setting Items ([Wireless

Setup])

• To fire a test flash, press [DISP.].

[External

Flash]

[Firing

Mode]

[TTL]: The camera automatically sets the flash output.

[AUTO]

: Sets the flash output on the external flash

side.

[MANUAL]: Sets the flash output of the external flash

manually.

[OFF]: The external flash outputs only communication

light.

[Flash

Adjust.]

Adjusts the flash output of the external flash manually

when [Firing Mode] is set to [TTL].

[Manual

Flash

Adjust.]

Sets the flash output of the external flash when [Firing

Mode] is set to [MANUAL].

• It can be set within the range of [1/1] (full flash

output) to [1/128] in 1/3 steps.

[A Group]/

[B Group]/

[C Group]

[Firing

Mode]

[TTL]: The camera automatically sets the flash output.

[AUTO]: Sets the flash output on the wireless flash

side.

[MANUAL]: Sets the flash output of the wireless flash

manually.

[OFF]: The wireless flashes of the specified group will

not fire.

[Flash

Adjust.]

Adjusts the flash output of the wireless flash manually

when [Firing Mode] is set to [TTL].

[Manual

Flash

Adjust.]

Sets the flash output of the wireless flash when [Firing

Mode] is set to [MANUAL].

• It can be set within the range of [1/1] (full flash

output) to [1/128] in 1/3 steps.

1 This cannot be set when using the Flash (DMW-FL200L: optional).

239

9. Flash



[Communication Light]

Set the strength of communication light.

[ ] [Flash] Select [Communication Light]

Settings: [HIGH]/[STANDARD]/[LOW]

240

10. Recording Videos

Recording Videos

Start recording.

● Press the video rec. button.

• Release the video rec. button right after

you press it.

Red REC frame indicator (348)

Recording state indicator

Remaining recording time

Elapsed recording time

Stop recording.

● Press the video rec. button again.

• If maintaining focus on the subject is difficult during video recording with AF,

press the shutter button halfway to re-adjust the focus.

241

10. Recording Videos



[Rec Quality]

Sets the image quality of videos to be recorded.

[ ] Select [Rec Quality]

[Rec Quality] Picture size

Recording

frame rate

Sensor

output

Bit rate

[4K/100M/30p]

3840×2160 30p 30 fps 100 Mbps

[4K/100M/25p]

3840×2160 25p 25 fps 100 Mbps

[4K/100M/24p]

3840×2160 24p 24 fps 100 Mbps

[FHD/28M/60p] 1920×1080 60p 60 fps 28 Mbps

[FHD/28M/50p] 1920×1080 50p 50 fps 28 Mbps

[FHD/20M/30p] 1920×1080 30p 30 fps 20 Mbps

[FHD/20M/25p] 1920×1080 25p 25 fps 20 Mbps

[FHD/24M/24p] 1920×1080 24p 24 fps 24 Mbps

[HD/10M/30p] 1280×720 30p 30 fps 10 Mbps

[HD/10M/25p] 1280×720 25p 25 fps 10 Mbps

1 4K video

• The amount of time you can record in a single session varies depending on

[Rec Quality].

When the recording time of a single session exceeds the following duration,

recording stops.

– [4K/100M/30p] / [4K/100M/25p] / [4K/100M/24p]: 10 minutes

– [FHD/28M/60p] / [FHD/28M/50p]: 20 minutes

– [FHD/20M/30p] / [FHD/20M/25p] / [FHD/24M/24p] / [HD/10M/30p] /

[HD/10M/25p]: 29 minutes and 59 seconds

242

10. Recording Videos

• Since the camera employs the VBR recording format, the bit rate is changed

automatically depending on the subject to record. As a result, video

recording time is shortened when a fast-moving subject is recorded.

• When the following functions are being used, 4K video cannot be set.

– [Miniature Effect] ([

] mode)

– HDMI output

• To record 4K videos, use a UHS Speed Class 3 card.

• When you record 4K videos, the angle of view will be narrower than videos

of other sizes.

• To ensure highly accurate focus, 4K videos are recorded at reduced Auto

Focus speeds. It may be difficult to focus on the subject with Auto Focus,

but this is not a malfunction.



Size Interval for Dividing Files

[Rec Quality]

[4K]

When using an SDHC memory card:

A new file will be created to continue

recording if the file size exceeds 4 GB.

When using an SDXC memory card:

Even if the file size exceeds 4 GB, a single

file will be recorded.

[FHD]/[HD]

A new file will be created to continue

recording if the file size exceeds 4 GB.

• If an operation such as a zoom or button operation is performed during

video recording, that operation sound may be recorded.

• The lens operation sound (AF and image stabilizer) may be recorded to

video.

• If the operation sound of pressing the video rec. button to end recording

bothers you, try the following:

– Record the video about 3 seconds longer, and then divide the last part of

the video using [Video Divide] in the [Playback] menu.

– Use the shutter remote control function (391) for recording.

• Depending on the type of card, the card access indication may appear for a

while after video recording. This is not a malfunction.

243

10. Recording Videos

• Even when playback is performed on a supported device, situations may

occur where image or sound quality is poor, recording information is not

displayed correctly, or playback is not possible, for example.

If you experience any of these, play them back on the camera.

• If the camera temperature rises, [

] may be displayed and recording may

stop. Wait until the camera cools down.

• When the following functions are being used, the recording mode during

video recording is set to “Low Light Mode”:

– [Clear Nightscape], [Artistic Nightscape], [Handheld Night Shot], [Clear

Night Portrait] ([

] mode)

• During video recording, it will not be outputted via HDMI.

• Video recording is not possible while you are using the following functions:

– [Glistening Water], [Glittering Illuminations], [Soft Image of a Flower]

([

] mode)

– [Rough Monochrome], [Silky Monochrome], [Soft Focus], [Star Filter],

[Sunshine] ([

] mode)

– [Post Focus]

– [Time Lapse Shot]

– [Stop Motion Animation]

– [Live View Composite]

• You can display the frame on the recording screen that indicates the angle

of view that will be achieved with trimming (cropping) in post-processing:

[

] [ ] [Frame Marker] (270)

• It can be indicated as the angle of view when recording video:

[

] [ ] [Rec Area] (348)

244

10. Recording Videos

Taking pictures while a video is being recorded

Press the shutter button fully

during the video recording.

• Simultaneous recording indicator is displayed

while recording pictures.

• Recording with the Touch Shutter function is

also available.

245

10. Recording Videos



Setting the video priority or picture priority mode

[ ] Select [Picture Mode in Rec.]

[Video Priority]

• Pictures will be recorded with a picture size determined by

the [Rec Quality] setting for videos.

• Only JPEG images are recorded when [Quality] is set to

[

], [ ], or [ ]. (When set to [ ], still pictures will

be recorded in [Quality] of [

].)

• Up to 40 still pictures can be recorded during the recording

of a video. (A video with a [Rec Quality] size of [4K]: up to

10 pictures)

[Photo Priority]

• Pictures will be recorded with the set [Quality] and image

size of [Picture Size].

• The screen will go dark while recording pictures. A still

picture will be recorded in the video during that period, and

audio is not recorded.

• Up to 10 still pictures can be recorded during recording of

the video.

(A video with a [Rec Quality] size of [4K]: up to 5 pictures)

• The aspect ratio of a still picture is fixed to [16:9].

• When the following functions are in use, simultaneous recording is not

available.

– Videos with the frame rate under [Rec Quality] set to [24p] (when [

]

([Photo Priority]) is set)

– [4K PHOTO] (when [

] ([Photo Priority]) is set)

– [Ex. Tele Conv.] ([Motion Picture]) (when [

] ([Photo Priority]) is set)

– [Snap Movie]

246

10. Recording Videos

Creative Video Mode

It is possible to manually change the aperture, shutter speed and ISO

sensitivity and record videos.

Set the mode dial to [ ].

Set the exposure mode.

● [ ] [Exposure Mode]

[P]/[A]/[S]/[M]

• You can perform the same exposure

operations as the [

]/[ ]/[ ]/[ ]

modes.

• Program Shift does not work.

Close the menu.

● Press the shutter button halfway.

247

10. Recording Videos

Start recording.

● Press the shutter button or video

rec. button

Stop recording.

● Press the shutter button or video

rec. button again.

• It is also possible to display the selection screen by

touching the recording mode icon in recording screen.

248

10. Recording Videos



Operations During Video Recording

Change the exposure and audio settings with touch operation to prevent

operation sounds from being recorded.

Touch [ ].

Touch an icon.

Zoom

(When using an

interchangeable lens

supporting power

zoom)

Aperture value

Shutter speed

Exposure

compensation

ISO sensitivity

Sound recording

level adjustment

(When [Sound Rec

Level Adj.] is set to

[MANUAL].)

Drag the slide bar to set the item.

[ ]/[ ]: Changes the setting slowly.

[

]/[ ]: Changes the setting quickly.

• If you touch icon , the screen of Step

is redisplayed.

249

10. Recording Videos

[4K Live Cropping]

By cropping a part of the image from the image displayed in the live view,

it is possible to record FHD video that incorporates panning and zooming

with the camera staying in a fixed position.

• A video will be recorded at [FHD/20M/25p] under [MP4].

Pan Zoom in

• Use a tripod to minimize camera shake.

Set the mode dial to [ ].

Set the time for panning or

zooming.

● [ ] [4K Live Cropping]

[40SEC]/[20SEC]

250

10. Recording Videos

Set the cropping start frame.

● Select the range to be cropped and

press

Cropping start frame

ResetReset

SetSet

Set the cropping end frame.

● Select the range to be cropped and

press

Cropping end frame

• To redo the settings for the position and

size of the start frame and the end frame,

press

Start recording.

● Press the shutter button or video

rec. button

Elapsed recording time

Set operating time

• When the set operating time has elapsed,

recording automatically ends.

To end recording midway, press the

shutter button or video rec. button again.

251

10. Recording Videos



Operations for Setting the Cropping Frame

Button

operation

Touch

operation

Description of operation

Touch Moves the frame.

Pinch out/

pinch in

Enlarges/reduces the frame.

[DISP.] [Reset]

Start frame: Returns the frame position and size to

the default settings.

End frame: Cancels the settings for the position

and size of the frame.

[Set] Confirms the frame position and size.

• The angle of view during recording becomes narrower.

• AF mode switches to [

] ([Face/Eye Detection]). (The Eye Detection

cannot be used.)

• Brightness measurements and focusing are performed within the cropping

frame. To lock the focus point, set [Continuous AF] to [OFF], or set the focus

mode to [MF].

• [Metering Mode] will be [

] (multi-metering).

252

10. Recording Videos

Slow & Quick Mode

Records slow-motion videos and quick-motion videos.

• A video will be recorded at [FHD] under [MP4].

Set the mode dial to [ ].

Set the recording settings.

● [ ]

[S&Q Exposure Mode]/

[S&Q Recording Frame Rate]/

[S&Q Effect]

• For details, refer to page 255.

Close the menu.

● Press the shutter button halfway.

253

10. Recording Videos

Start recording.

● Press the shutter button or video

rec. button

Stop recording.

● Press the shutter button or video

rec. button again.

• It is also possible to display the selection screen by

touching the recording mode icon in recording screen.

254

10. Recording Videos



Operations During Video Recording

You can change settings like exposure with touch operation.

Touch [ ].

Touch an icon.

Zoom

(When using an

interchangeable lens

supporting power zoom)

Aperture value

Shutter speed

Exposure

compensation

ISO sensitivity

S&Q Effect

1 This cannot be operated during

recording.

Drag the slide bar to set the item.

[ ]/[ ]: Changes the setting slowly.

[

]/[ ]: Changes the setting quickly.

• If you touch icon , the screen of Step

is redisplayed.

• Audio is not recorded in videos.

255

10. Recording Videos

Slow & Quick Menu



[S&Q Exposure Mode]

Select the exposure mode.

Settings: [P]/[A]/[S]/[M]

• You can perform the same exposure operations as the [ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[ ] modes.

• Program Shift does not work.



[S&Q Recording Frame Rate]

Select the recording frame rate.

Settings: [60p]/[50p]/[30p]/[25p]

256

10. Recording Videos



[S&Q Effect]

Select the speed effect.

[8xQUICK]

Records videos sped up to about 8-times

speed.

Example:

When set to [60p]: 8 frames/second.

When set to [50p]: 6 frames/second.

When set to [30p]: 4 frames/second.

When set to [25p]: 3 frames/second.

Quick motion

video

[4xQUICK]

Records videos sped up to about 4-times

speed.

[2xQUICK]

Records videos sped up to about 2-times

speed.

[2xSLOW]

Records videos slowed down to about half

speed.

Slow motion

video

[4xSLOW]

Records videos slowed down to about 1/4

speed.

1 When [S&Q Recording Frame Rate] is set to [60p]/[50p], the angle of view

becomes narrower.

2 It can only be selected when [S&Q Recording Frame Rate] is set to [30p]/[25p].

(The angle of view becomes narrower.)

• Depending on the settings, the recording screen may seem as if frames are

missed.

• When the recording time of a single session exceeds the following duration,

recording stops.

– Quick motion video: 29 minutes and 50 seconds

(Example: If you record for 29 minutes and 50 seconds with [8xQUICK],

the result will be a video that is approximately 4 minutes long.)

– Slow motion video: 10 minutes

(Example: If you record for 10 minutes with [4xSLOW], the result will be a

video that is approximately 40 minutes long.)

• The shutter speeds that can be set vary depending on [S&Q Recording

Frame Rate], [S&Q Effect], and the focus mode.

257

10. Recording Videos

Snap Movies

You can specify the recording time in advance and record videos casually

like you take snapshots. The function also allows you to shift a focus at

the start of recording and add fade in/out effects in advance.

• Video will be recorded with [FHD/20M/25p] in [MP4].

Set the camera to [Snap

Movie].

● [ ] [Snap Movie] [ON]

Close the menu.

● Press the shutter button halfway.

Start recording.

● Press the video rec. button.

258

10. Recording Videos

Elapsed recording time

Set recording time

• Immediately release the video rec. button

after pressing it.

• You cannot stop video recording in

the middle. The recording will stop

automatically when the set recording time

has elapsed.



Changing the settings

[ ] [Snap Movie] Select [SET]

[Record time] Sets the recording time of videos.

[Pull Focus]

Allows dramatic imaging expression by shifting focus gradually

at the start of recording. (259)

[Fade]

Adds a fade-in (gradual appearance) effect to an image

and audio as recording starts or adds a fade-out (gradual

disappearance) effect to them as recording ends.

[WHITE-IN] / [WHITE-OUT]:

Adds a fade-in or fade-out effect that uses a white screen.

[BLACK-IN] / [BLACK-OUT]:

Adds a fade-in or fade-out effect that uses a black screen.

[COLOR-IN] / [COLOR-OUT]:

Adds an effect that fades in from black-and-white to color or an

effect that fades out from color to black-and-white. Audio will be

recorded normally.

[OFF]

259

10. Recording Videos

• Videos recorded with [WHITE-IN] or [BLACK-IN] are displayed as all-white

or all-black thumbnails in Playback Mode.

• If you assign [Snap Movie] to [Fn Button Set] in [Custom] ([Operation])

menu (295), you can display a screen that lets you switch [Snap Movie]

between [ON]/[OFF] by pressing the assigned function button. If you press

[DISP.] while the screen is displayed, you can change the settings for Snap

Movie.

• [Snap Movie] will be set to [OFF] when you connect to Wi-Fi with [Remote

Shooting & View].

• When the following functions are being used, [Snap Movie] is not available:

– Self Shot Mode

– [Miniature Effect] ([

] mode)

– [4K PHOTO], [Post Focus]

– [4K Live Cropping]



Setting up [Pull Focus]

Set the frames that specify the positions

where the [Pull Focus] starts (first position)

and stops (second position).

Touch operation

Touch a subject (first position), drag your

finger to the desired location (second

position), and release the finger.

• To cancel the frame settings, touch [ ].

260

10. Recording Videos

Button operation

Press [ ] ( )

Press to move the frame, and press (First position)

• If you press [DISP.] before pressing , the frame will return to the center.

Repeat step (Second position)

• To cancel the frame settings, press .

• A greater effect can be achieved by creating a striking contrast of focus

between the start and end positions, for example by shifting focus from the

background to foreground, or vice versa.

• After setting focus, try to keep the distance between the subject and the

camera constant.

• When the camera fails to set the frame, it returns to the first position.

• When [Pull Focus] is set to [ON]

– AF Mode will be switched to [

], a setting specially designed for [Pull

Focus].

– If you take a picture, the Auto Focus operation [

] will take place at the

first frame position.

• When [Metering Mode] is set to [

] (Spot), the spot metering target is fixed

at the start position (first position) of [Pull Focus].

• When the following functions are being used, [Pull Focus] is not available:

– Manual Focus

– [Digital Zoom] (DC-G100 only)

261

10. Recording Videos

Video Settings (Auto Focus)

This section describes the use of AF when recording videos.

• In “6. Focus/Zoom”, the functions described work with both pictures and

video. Please also refer to those sections.

– Selecting the Focus Mode: 126

– Selecting the AF Mode: 131

– Moving the AF Area by Touch: 144

– Record Using Manual Focus: 148

– Recording with Zoom: 153

[Continuous AF]

You can select how to set the focus in AF when recording videos.

[ ] Select [Continuous AF]

[ON]

Allow the focus to constantly adjust automatically while recording

video.

[OFF] The camera maintains the focus point at the start of recording.

• Depending on the recording conditions or lens used, the AF operation sound

may be recorded during video recording.

If the operation sound bothers you, we recommend recording with

[Continuous AF] set to [OFF].

• If the zoom is operated while recording videos, the subject may take a while

to come into focus.

• When the following functions are being used, [Continuous AF] does not

work:

– [Pull Focus] ([Snap Movie])

– [4K Live Cropping]

262

10. Recording Videos

[AF Custom Setting(Video)]

You can fine-adjust the focusing method for video recording using

[Continuous AF].

[ ] Select [AF Custom Setting(Video)]

[ON] Enables the following settings.

[OFF] Disables the following settings.

[SET]

[AF Speed]

[+] side: Focus moves at a faster speed.

[–] side: Focus moves at a slower speed.

[AF Sensitivity]

[+] side: When the distance to the subject changes

significantly, the camera immediately readjusts the

focus.

[–] side: When the distance to the subject changes

significantly, the camera waits for a little before

readjusting the focus.

263

10. Recording Videos

Video Settings (Brightness)

This section describes the brightness settings used during video

recording.

• In “8. Brightness (Exposure)/Coloring/Picture effect”, the functions

described work with both pictures and video.

Please also refer to those sections.

– [Metering Mode]: 209

– Exposure Compensation: 210

– Locking Focus and Exposure (AF/AE Lock): 212

– ISO Sensitivity: 214

– White Balance (WB): 217

– [Photo Style]: 223

– [Filter Settings]: 226

[Luminance Level]

You can set the luminance range to suit the purpose of video recording.

[ ] Select [Luminance Level]

Settings: [0-255]/[16-255]

• When [Photo Style] is set to [V-Log L], this is fixed to [0-255].

264

10. Recording Videos

[ISO Sensitivity (video)]

Sets the lower and upper limits for ISO sensitivity when ISO sensitivity is

set to [AUTO].

[ ] Select [ISO Sensitivity (video)]

[ISO Auto Lower Limit

Setting]

Sets the lower limit for ISO sensitivity when ISO

sensitivity is [AUTO].

• Set in the range between [200] and [3200].

[ISO Auto Upper Limit

Setting]

Sets the upper limit for ISO sensitivity when ISO

sensitivity is [AUTO].

• Set to [AUTO] or in the range between [400] and

[6400].

265

10. Recording Videos

Video Settings (Audio)

Explains the audio setting during video recording.

[Sound Rec Level Disp.]

The sound recording level is displayed on

the recording screen.

[ ] Select [Sound Rec Level

Disp.]

Settings: [ON]/[OFF]

[Sound Rec Level Adj.]

Sets the sound recording level.

[ ] Select [Sound Rec Level Adj.]

[AUTO]

Automatically adjusts the audio input level to smooth out the

loudness of sounds.

[MANUAL]

Manually adjusts the audio input level.

Settings: [MUTE], [-12dB] to [+6dB]

• When set to [MUTE], this mutes the audio input.

– [

] is displayed in the recording screen.

– Audio input from an external microphone will also be in mute.

• You cannot select [AUTO] when an external microphone is connected.

• Displayed dB values are approximate.

266

10. Recording Videos

[Wind Noise Canceller]

This reduces the wind noise coming into the built-in microphone while

maintaining sound quality.

[ ] Select [Wind Noise Canceller]

[HIGH]

This effectively reduces the wind noise by reducing the low-

pitched sound when a strong wind is detected.

[STANDARD]

This reduces wind noise without loss of sound quality by filtering

out only wind noise.

[OFF] —

• You may not see the full effect depending on the recording conditions.

• This function works only with the built-in microphone.

When an external microphone is connected, [Wind Cut] is displayed.

(452)

[Lens Noise Cut]

You can reduce the zoom sound produced during video recording when

you are using interchangeable lens compatible with power zoom.

[ ] Select [Lens Noise Cut]

Settings: [ON]/[OFF]

• When this function is used, the sound quality may differ from that during

normal operation.

267

10. Recording Videos

[Built-in Mic]

Sets the sound pickup range when using the built-in microphone.

[ ] Select [Built-in Mic]

Setting Sound pickup range

[AUTO]

When the AF mode is set to [

] ([Face/Eye Detection])

and the camera recognizes a face, it switches to

[

] ([TRACKING])

. In other cases, it is set to [ ]

([SURROUND]).

[SURROUND] Picks up a wide range of sounds in all directions.

[FRONT] Picks up sounds in front of the camera.

[TRACKING]

When AF mode is set to [ ] ([Face/Eye Detection]) and

the camera recognizes a face, it automatically adjusts the

sound pickup range according to the location of your face.

In other cases, it automatically adjusts the sound pickup

range according to the angle of view.

[BACK] Picks up sounds behind the camera.

1 If you hold the camera vertically, the setting will temporarily switch to [ ]

([FRONT]).

• In Self Shot Mode, you can set the sound pickup range by touching the

[

] on the screen. (This does not work with [Built-in Mic] of the video

menu.) (88)

• When an external microphone is connected, [Built-in Mic] is not available.

• You can switch whether or not to display sound pickup range of the built-in

mic on the recording screen:

[

] [Built-in Mic Indicator] (268)

268

10. Recording Videos

[Built-in Mic Indicator]

Displays the sound pickup range and

sound pickup target for the built-in

microphone.

[ ] Select [Built-in Mic Indicator]

Settings: [ON]/[OFF]

Sound pickup range

Sound pickup target

1 When the [Built-in Mic] is in [ ] ([AUTO]) or [ ] ([TRACKING]), and a face is

recognized by [

] ([Face/Eye Detection]), the camera automatically displays the

sound pickup target according to the state of the subject.

• When an external microphone is connected, [Built-in Mic Indicator] is not

available.

269

10. Recording Videos

Video Settings (Display)

This section describes the main assist functions that are convenient when

recording.

• The [Custom] ([Monitor / Display]) menu has display assist functions such

as the center marker. For details, refer to page 342.

[Zebra Pattern]

Parts that are brighter than the benchmark value are displayed with

stripes.

You can also set the benchmark value and the breadth of the range

so that the stripes are displayed on parts that are within the range of

brightness you specify.

[ZEBRA1] [ZEBRA2]

[ ] [ ] Select [Zebra Pattern]

[ZEBRA1]

Parts that are brighter than the benchmark value are displayed

with [ZEBRA1] stripes.

[ZEBRA2]

Parts that are brighter than the benchmark value are displayed

with [ZEBRA2] stripes.

[OFF] —

[SET]

[Zebra 1] 50% to 105%

Sets the benchmark

brightness.

[Zebra 2] [OFF]/50% to 105%

270

10. Recording Videos

[Frame Marker]

A frame with the set aspect ratio is displayed on the recording screen.

This allows you to see during recording the angle of view that will be

achieved with trimming (cropping) in post-processing.

[ ] [ ] Select [Frame Marker]

[ON] Displays video grid lines on the recording screen.

[OFF] —

[SET]

[Frame Aspect]

Sets the aspect ratio of video grid lines.

[2.39:1]/[2.35:1]/[2.00:1]/[1.85:1]/[16:9]/[4:3]/

[5:4]/[1:1]/[4:5]/[9:16]

[Frame Color] Sets the color of video grid lines.

[Frame Mask]

Sets the outer side opacity of video grid lines.

[100%]/[75%]/[50%]/[25%]/[OFF]

271

10. Recording Videos

Log Recording

Setting [Photo Style] to [V-Log L] enables Log recording.

Images finished with rich gradation can be created through post

production processing.

[ ]/[ ] [Photo Style] Select [V-Log L]

• This camera records videos in 4:2:0/8 bit, so after post-production editing,

luminance and color unevenness or noise may appear in areas such as blue

skies, people’s skin, and white walls. It is recommended to perform a test

shot before hand and check the video after post production processing.

• Post-production processing is enabled by utilizing LUT (Look-Up Table).

You can download LUT data from the following support site:

https://panasonic.jp/support/global/cs/dsc/download/index3.html

(English only)

• When [Photo Style] is set to [V-Log L], the recording screen and images

output via HDMI will darken. (During video recording, it will not be outputted

via HDMI.)

272

11. Playing Back and Editing of

Images

This chapter explains how to play back and delete pictures and videos.

It also explains editing images.

• Images recorded on devices other than this one may not be played back or

edited correctly on this camera.

• For [Playback] menu items not listed here, refer to “[Playback] Menu”

beginning on page 362.

Playing Back Pictures

Display the playback screen.

● Press [ ].

Select a picture.

● Select the pictures by pressing

● You can move continuously through

images by pressing and holding

● You can also select by rotating .

● You can also move through images by dragging the screen

horizontally. By leaving your finger touching the left or right

edge of the screen after dragging to change the image, you can

continuously move through images.

273

11. Playing Back and Editing of Images

Stop playback.

● Press the shutter button halfway.

● You can also stop playback by

pressing [

274

11. Playing Back and Editing of Images

Playing Back Videos

Display the playback screen.

● Press [ ].

Select a video.

• For information about how to select

images, refer to page 272.

• The [

] video icon is displayed for a

video.

Video recording time

• The video recording time is displayed on

the screen.

Play back the video.

Elapsed playback time

● Press .

● You can also start playback by

touching [

] at the center of the

screen.

• Videos recorded with [Snap Movie] are

played back automatically.

Stop playback.

● Press .

275

11. Playing Back and Editing of Images



Operations During Video Playback

Button

operation

Touch

operation

Description of operation

Plays/pauses.

Stops.

Performs fast-rewind playback.

• If you press

again, the fast-rewind speed

increases.

Performs frame-by-frame rewinding (while paused).

Performs fast-forward playback.

• If you press

again, the fast-forward speed

increases.

Performs frame-by-frame forwarding (while

paused).

Extracts a picture (while paused). (276)

Reduces the volume.

Increases the volume.



Operations during automatic Snap Movie playback

Playback from the beginning

Returning to the previous picture

Scrolling to the next picture

• If you touch the screen, automatic playback will stop.

• The camera can play back videos in an MP4 format.

• To play back videos on a PC, use the “PHOTOfunSTUDIO” software.

276

11. Playing Back and Editing of Images

Extracting a Picture

Extract one frame of a video and save it as a JPEG image.

Pause playback at the position

you wish to extract a picture.

● Press .

• To fine-adjust the position, press

(rewind frame-by-frame or forward frame-

by-frame).

Save the picture.

● Press .

● You can also save the picture by

touching [

• The picture created from a video is saved with a [ ] picture quality.

The picture is saved with a size according to the resolution of the [Picture

Size].

• The image quality of a picture created from a video may be coarser than

normal.

• [

] is displayed on the detailed information display screen for a picture

created from a video.

277

11. Playing Back and Editing of Images

Switching the Display Mode

You can use features to do things like enlarge recorded images for display

and switch to thumbnail display to display multiple images at once (multi-

playback). You can also switch to calendar display to show images of a

selected recording date.

Enlarged Display

Playback images can be displayed enlarged (Playback Zoom).

Enlarging the playback screen.

● Rotate to the right.

● The playback screen is enlarged in the

order of 2x

4x 8x 16x.

• Rotating to the left returns to the previous

display size.

• Pictures taken with [Quality] set to [

] cannot

be displayed enlarged at 16x.



Operations During Enlarged Display

Button

operation

Touch

operation

Description of operation

—

Pinch out/

pinch in

Enlarges/reduces the screen in small steps.

— Enlarges/reduces the screen.

Drag Moves the enlarged display position.

—

Forwards or rewinds images while maintaining the

same zoom magnification and zoom position.

278

11. Playing Back and Editing of Images

Thumbnail Screen

Switch to thumbnail display.

● Rotate to the left.

● The display is switched in the order

of 12-image screen

30-image

screen.

• Rotating to the left during 30-image

screen display switches to calendar

display. (279)

• Rotating

to the right returns to the

previous display.

• You can also switch the display by

touching an icon.

[

]: 1-image screen

[

]: 12-image screen

[

]: 30-image screen

[

]: Calendar

Select an image.

● Press to select an image and then press .

• You can scroll the screen by dragging the thumbnail display up or down.

• Images indicated with [ ] cannot be played back.

279

11. Playing Back and Editing of Images

Calendar Playback

Switch to calendar playback.

● Rotate to the left.

● The display is switched in the order

of thumbnail screen (12 images)

Thumbnail screen (30 images)

Calendar playback.

• Rotating to the right returns to the

previous display.

2020

SUN MON TUE WED THU FRI SAT

54321

121110987

191817161514

262524232221

30 3128

Select the recording date.

● Press to select a date and then press .

Select an image.

● Press to select an image

and then press

• Rotating to the left returns to calendar

playback.

• The range that the calendar can be displayed is January 2000 to December

2099.

• Pictures taken with destination settings made in [World Time] are displayed

in the calendar screen using the appropriate date for the destination’s time

zone.

280

11. Playing Back and Editing of Images

Group Images

Images recorded with Time Lapse Shot or Stop Motion Animation

recording are handled as group images in the camera, and can be deleted

and edited on a group basis.

You can also delete and edit each image in a group individually.



Images Handled as Group Images by the Camera

Group images saved with [4K PHOTO

Bulk Saving].

Group images recorded with Focus

Bracket.

Group images recorded with Time

Lapse Shot.

Group images recorded with Stop

Motion Animation recording.

15 pic.15 pic.



Playing the Images in a Group One by One

Operations such as displaying thumbnails and deleting images are

available with images in groups just as with normal playback.

Select the group image in the playback state. (272)

Press to display the images in the group.

• You can also perform the same operation by touching the group image icon.

Press to select an image.

• To return to the normal playback screen, press or touch [ ] again.

281

11. Playing Back and Editing of Images

Deleting Images

• Images cannot be restored once they have been deleted. Carefully confirm

the images before deletion.

• If you delete a group image, all images in the group are deleted.



[Delete Single]

Press [ ] in playback state.

Press to select [Delete Single] and

then press



[Delete Multi]

Press [ ] in playback state.

Press to select [Delete Multi] and

then press

Press to select the image to

delete and then press

• [

] is displayed for the selected

image.

• If you press

again, the selection is

canceled.

• Up to 100 images can be selected.

Press [DISP.] to delete the selected

image.

OKOK

• Depending on the number of images to be deleted, it may take some time

to delete them.

• You can set which of [Yes] and [No] is selected initially in the confirmation

screen when deleting:

[

] [Delete Confirmation] (371)

• You can delete all of the images on a card, or all images except those with

a rating set:

[

] [Delete All Images] (371)

282

11. Playing Back and Editing of Images

[Light Composition]

Select multiple frames from 4K burst files that you wish to combine.

Parts of the image that are brighter than the preceding frame will be

superimposed on the preceding frame to combine the frames into one

picture.

Select [Light Composition].

● [ ] [Light Composition]

Select the 4K burst file.

● Press to select an image and

then press

Select the combining method.

● Press to select the combining method and then press .

283

11. Playing Back and Editing of Images



[Composite Merging]: Selecting frames to combine

Drag the slide bar or use

to select the frames to combine.

Press .

• The selected frames are remembered,

and the display goes to the preview

screen.

• Use

to select items and

press

to perform the following

operations.

– [Next]: Lets you select more frames

for combining.

– [Reselect]: Discards the frame

selected immediately

before and lets you

select a different image.

Repeat steps - to select more frames to combine (up to 40

frames).

Press to select [Save], and then press .



[Range Merging]: Selecting a range to combine

Select the frame of the first picture and then press .

• The selection method is the same as in step of [Composite Merging]

setting.

Select the frame of the last picture and then press .

• Pictures are saved in JPEG format. Recording information (Exif information)

of the first frame such as shutter speed, aperture, and ISO sensitivity are

also registered.

284

11. Playing Back and Editing of Images

[Sequence Composition]

Select multiple frames from a 4K burst file to create a sequence

composition of a moving subject into one picture.

Select [Sequence

Composition].

● [ ] [Sequence

Composition]

Select the 4K burst file.

● Press to select an image and

then press

Select frames to combine.

Select the frames so that the moving subject will not overlap on the

preceding or subsequent frames. (The sequence composition may

not be created properly if the subject overlaps.)

285

11. Playing Back and Editing of Images

Drag the slide bar or use

to select the frames to combine.

Press .

• The selected frames are remembered,

and the display goes to the preview

screen.

• Use

to select items and

press

to perform the following

operations.

– [Next]: Lets you select more frames

for combining.

– [Reselect]: Discards the frame

selected immediately

before and lets you

select a different image.

Repeat steps - to select more frames to combine (from 3 to

40 frames).

Press to select [Save], and then press .

• We recommend using a tripod to take pictures for [Sequence Composition].

• Pictures are saved in JPEG format. Recording information (Exif information)

of the first frame such as shutter speed, aperture, and ISO sensitivity are

also registered.

286

11. Playing Back and Editing of Images

[Clear Retouch]

You can erase unnecessary parts recorded on the pictures taken.

• The erasure operation can only be

performed by touching. [Clear Retouch]

automatically enables the touch

operation.

Select [Clear Retouch].

● [ ] [Clear Retouch]

Select a picture.

● Press to select a picture and

then press

Drag your finger over the part you want to erase.

● The parts to be erased are colored.

● Touching [Undo] will return the colored part back to its previous

state.

Touch [Set].

Save the image.

● Touch [Save] or press .

287

11. Playing Back and Editing of Images

Erasing details (enlarging the display)

Touch [SCALING]

• On the touch screen, pinch out your

two fingers to zoom in, and pinch in

your two fingers to zoom out.

• Dragging the screen allows you to

move the enlarged part.

Touch [REMOVE]

• This will bring you back to the

operation of dragging your finger

over the part you want to erase.

The part you want to erase can be

dragged even while the picture is

enlarged.

UndoUndo

SetSet

SCALINGSCALING

REMOVE

• Pictures may appear unnatural because the background of deleted parts is

artificially created.

• Edit group pictures one by one.

• When the following functions are being used, [Clear Retouch] is not

available:

– When the viewfinder is in use.

– HDMI output

• [Clear Retouch] is not available for images recorded using the following

functions:

– Video recording, [4K PHOTO], [Post Focus]

– [

] ([Quality])

288

11. Playing Back and Editing of Images

[RAW Processing]

This processes pictures taken in RAW format on the camera and saves

them in JPEG format.

Select [RAW Processing].

● [ ] [RAW Processing]

Select the RAW image.

● Press to select an image and

then press

• When selecting an image from group

images, press

and then select an

image in the group. Press

again to

return to the normal selection screen.

• The settings from the time of recording

are reflected in displayed images.

SetSet

Select a setting item.

● Press to select an item and

then press

289

11. Playing Back and Editing of Images

Change the setting.

● Rotate or .

• The image can be enlarged/reduced by

pinching out/pinching in the screen.

-2 -1 0 +1 +2

Confirm the setting.

● Press .

● The screen of Step 3 reappears.

To set another item, repeat Steps

3 to 5.

Save the image.

● Press to select [Begin

Processing] and then press



Setting Items ([RAW Processing])

[Begin Processing] Saves the image.

[White Balance]

Selects and adjusts the white balance.

Selecting the item with [

] enables processing with the

same setting as at the time of recording.

• If you press

in the [White Balance] selection screen,

the white balance adjustment screen appears.

• If you press

while [ ] to [ ] is selected, the

color temperature setting screen appears.

[Brightness

correction]

Corrects the brightness.

• The [Brightness correction] effect differs from the

effect of exposure compensation during recording.

290

11. Playing Back and Editing of Images

[Photo Style]

Selects a Photo Style.

• You cannot select a Photo Style for images recorded

with [V-Log L]. You cannot select [V-Log L] for images

not recorded with [V-Log L].

[i.Dynamic] Selects the setting of [i.Dynamic].

[Contrast] Adjusts the contrast.

[Highlight] Adjusts the brightness of bright portions.

[Shadow] Adjusts the brightness of dark portions.

[Saturation]

[Color Tone]

Adjusts the saturation or color tone.

[Filter Effect]

Selects filter effects.

[Grain Effect]

Selects a grain effect setting.

[Noise Reduction] Sets noise reduction.

[i.Resolution] You can select the [i.Resolution] settings.

[Sharpness] Adjusts the sharpness.

[More Settings]

[Reinstate Adjustments]: Returns the settings to the

ones from the time of recording.

[Color Space]: Selects a Color Space setting from

[sRGB] or [AdobeRGB].

[Picture Size]: Selects the size for storing images.

1 Available when items other than [Monochrome], [L.Monochrome], [L.Monochrome

D] or [V-Log L] are selected in [Photo Style].

2 Available when [Monochrome], [L.Monochrome], or [L.Monochrome D] is selected

in [Photo Style].

291

11. Playing Back and Editing of Images



Displaying a Comparison Screen

You can change a setting while checking the effect by displaying images

with the applied setting value side by side.

Press [DISP.] in the screen of Step 4.

• The image with the current setting is

displayed at the center.

• Touching the image with the current setting

enlarges it.

Touching [

] returns to the original

display.

• If you have selected [Noise Reduction],

[i.Resolution], or [Sharpness], the

comparison screen is not displayed.

Rotate or to change the setting.

Press to confirm the setting.

• RAW images recorded with the camera are always recorded in the [L] size

of [4:3].

With this function, images are processed with the aspect ratio and the angle

of view of [Ex. Tele Conv.] ([Rec]) from the time of recording.

• The [White Balance] item is fixed to the setting from the time of recording for

pictures recorded with multiple exposures.

• The results of RAW processing with this function and with the “SILKYPIX

Developer Studio” software do not completely match.

• [RAW Processing] is not available while using the HDMI output.

292

11. Playing Back and Editing of Images

[Video Divide]

Divide a recorded video or 4K burst file into two.

• Images cannot be returned to their original state once they have been

divided. Carefully confirm the images before performing the divide operation.

• Do not remove the card or battery from the camera during the divide

process. The images may be lost.

Select [Video Divide].

● [ ] [Video Divide]

Select and play the image.

● Press to select an image and

then press

• You can also select by rotating or .

SetSet

Pause playback at the position

you wish to divide.

● Press .

• To fine-adjust the position, press

(frame-by-frame rewind or frame-by-

frame forward).

Divide the video.

● Press .

• Dividing the video at a point close to the start or end may not be possible.

• Videos with a short recording time cannot be divided.

293

12. Camera Customization

This chapter describes the customization function with which you can

configure the camera to your preferred settings.

Change how buttons, dials, etc. on the camera are to be operated.

[Fn Button Set]

294

[Dial Operation Switch Setup]

299

Custom mode

305

Change menu display items.

Quick menu

301

My Menu

307

• Detailed settings for camera operations and screen display are available in

the [Custom] menu. (333)

294

12. Camera Customization

Fn Buttons

You can register functions to the Fn (Function) buttons.

Different functions can be set for both during recording and playback.



Fn Button Default Settings

134

Fn buttons [Setting in REC mode] [Setting in PLAY mode]

[Fn1] [Exposure Comp.] [Wi-Fi]

[Fn2] [Q.MENU]

• Cannot be used as Fn buttons

during playback.

[Fn3] [LVF/Monitor Switch] [LVF/Monitor Switch]

[Fn4] [OFF] [Send Image (Smartphone)]

[Fn5] [Wi-Fi]

• Cannot be used as Fn buttons

during playback.

[Fn6] [Preview]

[Fn7] [Level Gauge]

[Fn8] [Histogram]

[Fn9] [Built-in Mic]

295

12. Camera Customization

Select [Fn Button Set].

● [ ] [ ] [Fn Button Set]

[Setting in REC mode]/[Setting in

PLAY mode]

Select the button.

● Press to select the button and

then press

● Selection is also possible by

rotating

or .

● Press to select a function and

then press

● Selection is also possible by

rotating

or .

• You can also touch [ ] on the monitor recording information screen

(65) to display the screen in Step

• You can also press and hold the Fn button (2 sec.) to display the screen in

Step

(This may not be displayed depending on the registered function and on the

button type.)

296

12. Camera Customization



Functions that can be assigned in

[Setting in REC mode]

[4K Photo Mode]

164

[Exposure Comp.]

210

[Wi-Fi]

382

[Q.MENU]

63

[Video Record]

240

[LVF/Monitor Switch]

58

[LVF/Monitor Disp. Style]

347

[AF/AE LOCK]

212

[AF-ON]

213

[Preview]

106

[One Push AE]

• Sets the aperture value and shutter

speed according to the proper

exposure determined by the camera.

[Touch AE]

71

[Level Gauge]

61

[Focus Area Set]

• Displays the AF area/MF Assist

transition screen.

[Zoom Control]

155

[Operation Lock]

• Disables the operations that were

set using [Operation Lock Setting] in

the [Custom] ([Operation]) menu.

[Focus Ring Lock]

341

[Dial Operation Switch]

300

[Photo Style]

223

[Filter Effect]

226

[Aspect Ratio]

119

[Picture Size]

120

[Quality]

121

[Metering Mode]

209

[Burst Rate]

323

[Self Timer]

186

[Live View Composite]

103

[Bracket]

197

[Focus Mode]

126

[Highlight Shadow]

318

[i.Dynamic]

319

[i.Resolution]

319

[Min. Shtr Speed]

321

[HDR]

325

[Shutter Type]

204

[Flash Mode]

229

[Flash Adjust.]

233

[Wireless Flash Setup]

236

[Ex. Tele Conv.]

154

[Digital Zoom] (DC-G100 only)

157

[Stabilizer]

206

[E-Stabilization (Video)]

207

[4K Live Cropping]

249

[Snap Movie]

257

[Motion Pic. Rec Quality]

241

[S&Q Effect]

256

[Picture Mode in Rec.]

245

[Sound Rec Level Disp.]

265

[Sound Rec Level Adj.]

265

[Built-in Mic]

267

297

12. Camera Customization

[Special Mic. Directivity Adjust]

452

[Silent Mode]

203

[Peaking]

344

[Histogram]

345

[Guide Line]

345

[Frame Marker]

270

[Zebra Pattern]

346

[Monochrome Live View]

342

[Constant Preview]

343

[Live View Boost]

343

[Rec Area]

348

[Step Zoom]

158

[Zoom Speed]

158

[Sensitivity]

214

[White Balance]

217

[AF Mode/MF]

131

148

[Drive Mode]

159

[Rec / Playback Switch]

• Switches to the playback screen.

[Off]

• Set when not using as an Fn button.

[Restore to Default]

• Restore the default settings for the

Fn button. (294)



Functions that can be assigned in

[Setting in PLAY mode]

[Wi-Fi]

382

[LVF/Monitor Switch]

58

[Rec / Playback Switch]

• Switches to the recording screen.

[Send Image (Smartphone)]

408

[4K PHOTO Play]

• Displays the screen to select

pictures to save from a 4K burst file.

[Delete Single]

281

[Protect]

364

[Rating★1]

364

[Rating★2]

364

[Rating★3]

364

[Rating★4]

364

[Rating★5]

364

[RAW Processing]

288

[4K PHOTO Bulk Saving]

177

[Off]

• Set when not using as an Fn button.

[Restore to Default]

• Restore the default settings for the

Fn button. (294)

298

12. Camera Customization

Use the Fn Buttons

During recording, pressing the Fn buttons enables usage of the functions

registered in [Setting in REC mode], and during playback, usage of the

functions registered in [Setting in PLAY mode].

Press the Fn button.

Select a setting item.

● Press to select a setting item

and then press

● Selection is also possible by

rotating

or .

• Display and selection methods of a

setting item differ depending on the menu

item.



Use [Fn5] to [Fn9] (Touch Icons)

During recording, you can use the Fn buttons within the Touch Tab.

Touch [ ].

Touch one of [Fn5] to [Fn9].

299

12. Camera Customization

[Dial Operation Switch]

This temporarily changes the functions operated with (front dial) and

(control dial).

Select [Dial Operation Switch

Setup].

● [ ] [ ] [Dial Set.]

[Dial Operation Switch Setup]

[

]/[ ]

● Press to select a function and

then press

● Selection is also possible by

rotating

or .



Functions That Can Be Registered

– [4K Photo Mode] (164)

– [Photo Style] (223)

– [Filter Effect] (226)

– [Aspect Ratio] (119)

– [Focus Mode] (126)

– [Highlight Shadow] (318)

– [i.Dynamic] (319)

– [i.Resolution] (319)

– [Flash Mode] (229)

– [Flash Adjust.] (233)

– [Sensitivity]

(214)

– [White Balance]

(217)

– [AF Mode] (131)

– [Drive Mode] (159)

1 default setting

2 default setting

• [Highlight Shadow] uses the two dials.

300

12. Camera Customization

Temporarily Change Dial Operation

Set [Dial Operation Switch] to the Fn button. (294)

Switch dial operation.

● Press the Fn button set in Step 1.

● A guide will display the functions

registered to

and .

• If no operations are performed, then

several seconds later, the guide

disappears.

Set the registered function.

● Rotate or while the guide is

displayed.

Confirm your selection.

● Press the shutter button halfway.

301

12. Camera Customization

Quick Menu Customization

For information about Quick menu operation methods, refer to page 63.

Change the menus to be displayed in the Quick menu.

Up to 15 items can be set to the Quick Menu.

Select [Q.MENU].

● [ ] [ ] [Q.MENU]

[CUSTOM]

Close the menu.

● Press the shutter button halfway.

Display the Quick menu.

● Press [Q.MENU].

302

12. Camera Customization

Display the editing screen for

the Quick menu.

● Press and select [ ], and

then press

● Press to select the menu

item in the top row and press

• Items that are displayed in light gray in

the top row have already been set.

1/6

Select the item position.

● Press to select the empty

space in the bottom row and press

• You can also set the menu item by

dragging it from the top row to the bottom

row.

• If there is no empty space in the bottom

row, you can replace an existing item

with a new select item by selecting the

existing item.

• To cancel the setting, move to the bottom

row by pressing

and select an item to

cancel, and then press

● Press the [Q.MENU] to return to the

screen in Step

1/6

Please move to the

desired position

303

12. Camera Customization

Close the Quick menu.

● Press the shutter button halfway.

● You can also close the menu by

pressing [Q.MENU].

304

12. Camera Customization



Functions That Can Be Registered

[Photo Style]

223

[Filter Effect]

226

[Picture Setting]

119

120

[Quality]

121

[Metering Mode]

209

[Burst Rate]

323

[4K PHOTO]

164

[Self Timer]

186

[Bracket]

197

[Focus Mode]

126

[i.Dynamic]

319

[i.Resolution]

319

[Min. Shtr Speed]

321

[HDR]

325

[Shutter Type]

204

[Flash Mode]

229

[Flash Adjust.]

233

[Ex. Tele Conv.]

154

[Digital Zoom] (DC-G100 only)

157

[Stabilizer]

207

[E-Stabilization (Video)]

207

[4K Live Cropping]

249

[Snap Movie]

257

[Motion Pic. Rec Quality]

241

[S&Q Effect]

256

[Picture Mode in Rec.]

245

[Sound Rec Level Disp.]

265

[Silent Mode]

203

[Peaking]

344

[Histogram]

345

[Guide Line]

345

[Frame Marker]

270

[Zebra Pattern]

346

[Monochrome Live View]

342

[Constant Preview]

343

[Live View Boost]

343

[Rec Area]

348

[Step Zoom]

158

[Zoom Speed]

158

[Sensitivity]

214

[White Balance]

217

[AF Mode]

131

[Drive Mode]

159

305

12. Camera Customization

Custom Mode

Menu settings that match your preferences can be registered in Custom

mode ([C1] to [C3]). You can use registered settings by switching the

custom mode menu to [SET1] to [SET3] modes.

You can register the currently set information of the camera.

At the time of purchase, the default settings of the [

] mode menus are

registered with all Custom modes.

Set to recording mode and menu settings of the state

you wish to save.

Select [Cust.Set Mem.].

● [ ] [Cust.Set Mem.]

● Select the save-to number and then

press

● The following menu items are not registered as custom settings.

• [My Menu], [Setup] menu, [Playback] menu

• [Custom] menu ([Menu Guide], data registered in [Face Recog.], [Profile Setup]

settings)

306

12. Camera Customization

• You cannot register [ ]/[ ] mode in Custom mode.

Using Custom Mode

Set the mode dial to [ ].

● The last-used Custom mode will be

called up.



Switching the Custom Mode

[ ] [SET1]/[SET2]/[SET3]

• It is also possible to display the selection screen by

touching the recording mode icon in recording screen.



Changing Registered Details

Registered settings do not change even if you change the camera settings

temporarily with the mode dial set to [

To change the registered details, overwrite them by using [Cust.Set Mem.]

in the [Setup] menu.

307

12. Camera Customization

My Menu

A maximum of 23 items can be registered.

Registration in My Menu

Select [Add].

● [ ] [My Menu Setting]

[Add]

● Select the menu to register and

then press



Calling up My Menu

Call up the menus registered in My Menu.

[ ] Registered menus

308

12. Camera Customization

Edit My Menu

You can reorder the display order of My Menu, and delete unnecessary

menus.

[ ] Select [My Menu Setting]

[Add] Selects and registers the menus to be displayed in My Menu.

[Sorting]

Changes the order of My Menu.

Select the menu to change, then set the destination.

[Delete]

Deletes menus that are registered to My Menu.

[Delete Item]: Selects the menu, then deletes.

[Delete All]: Deletes all menus registered in My Menu.

[Display from My

Menu]

Displays My Menu first when displaying a menu.

[ON]: Displays My Menu.

[OFF]: Displays the last-used menu.

309

13. Menu Guide

This chapter provides a list of menus and describes them in detail.

• For information about menu operation methods, refer to page 67.

Search the Menus

List of Menu

310

Learn About the Menu Functions and Default Settings

[Rec] menu

316

[Motion Picture] menu

329

[Custom] menu

333

[Setup] menu

354

[My Menu]

307

[Playback] menu

362

Menus displayed in specific recording modes

[Intelligent Auto] menu

314

[Creative Video] menu

314

[Slow & Quick] menu

315

[Custom Mode] menu

306

[Scene Guide] menu

315

[Creative Control] menu

315

Enter Characters

Entering Characters

372

• For details about “List of Functions That Can Be Set in Each Recording

Mode”, refer to page 490.

310

13. Menu Guide

List of Menu

Menu items common to the [Rec] menu and [Motion Picture] menu.

Their settings are synchronized.

[Intelligent Auto Mode]

314

[iHandheld Night Shot]

314

[iHDR]

314

[Creative Video] menu

[Exposure Mode]

314

[4K Live Cropping]

314

[Slow & Quick] menu

[S&Q Exposure Mode]

315

[S&Q Recording Frame Rate]

315

[S&Q Effect]

315

[Scene Guide] menu

[Scene Switch]

315

[Creative Control] menu

[Filter Effect]

315

[Simultaneous Record w/o

Filter]

315

[Aspect Ratio]

316

[Picture Size]

316

[Quality]

316

[Focus Mode]

316

[AF Sensitivity(Photo)]

316

[Photo Style]

316

[Filter Settings]

316

[Color Space]

317

[Metering Mode]

317

[Highlight Shadow]

318

[i.Dynamic]

319

[i.Resolution]

319

[Flash]

320

[Red-Eye Removal]

321

[ISO Sensitivity (photo)]

321

[Min. Shtr Speed]

321

[Long Shtr NR]

322

[Shading Comp.]

322

[Diffraction

Compensation]

323

[Stabilizer]

323

[Ex. Tele Conv.] ([Rec])

323

[Digital Zoom]

(DC-G100 only)

323

[Burst Rate]

323

[4K PHOTO]

323

[Self Timer]

324

[Time Lapse Shot]

324

[Intelligent Auto] menu

[Rec] menu

311

13. Menu Guide

[Stop Motion Animation]

324

[Live View Composite]

324

[Silent Mode]

324

[Shutter Type]

324

[Shutter Delay]

325

[Bracket]

325

[HDR]

325

[Multi Exp.]

327

[Rec] menu (Continued)

[Rec Quality]

329

[Snap Movie]

329

[Focus Mode]

329

[Continuous AF]

329

[AF Custom Setting(Video)]

329

[Photo Style]

329

[Filter Settings]

330

[Luminance Level]

330

[Metering Mode]

330

[Highlight Shadow]

330

[i.Dynamic]

330

[i.Resolution]

330

[ISO Sensitivity (video)]

330

[Diffraction

Compensation]

331

[Stabilizer]

331

[Flkr Decrease]

331

[Ex. Tele Conv.]

([Motion Picture])

331

[Digital Zoom]

(DC-G100 only)

331

[Picture Mode in Rec.]

331

[Self Timer]

331

[Sound Rec Level Disp.]

331

[Sound Rec Level Adj.]

331

[Wind Noise Canceller]/

[Wind Cut]

332

[Lens Noise Cut]

332

[Built-in Mic]

332

[Built-in Mic Indicator]

332

[Special Mic.]

332

[Motion Picture] menu

312

13. Menu Guide

[Exposure]

333

[ISO Increments]

333

[Extended ISO]

333

[Exposure Comp. Reset]

333

[Focus / Release Shutter]

333

[AF/AE Lock]

333

[AF/AE Lock Hold]

333

[Shutter AF]

333

[Half Press Release]

333

[Quick AF]

334

[Eye Sensor AF]

334

[Pinpoint AF Setting]

334

[AF Assist Lamp]

335

[Direct Focus Area]

336

[Focus/Release Priority]

336

[Focus Switching for Vert / Hor]

337

[Loop Movement Focus Frame]

337

[AF Area Display]

337

[AF+MF]

338

[MF Assist]

338

[MF Assist Display]

338

[Operation]

339

[Fn Button Set]

339

[ISO Displayed Setting]

339

[Exposure Comp. Disp. Setting]

339

[Q.MENU]

339

[Dial Set.]

340

[Operation Lock Setting]

341

[Focus Ring Lock]

341

[Video Rec. Button]

341

[Touch Settings]

341

[Monitor / Display]

342

[Auto Review]

342

[Monochrome Live View]

342

[Constant Preview]

343

[Live View Boost]

343

[Peaking]

344

[Histogram]

345

[Guide Line]

345

[Frame Marker]

346

[Center Marker]

346

[Highlight]

346

[Zebra Pattern]

346

[Expo.Meter]

347

[MF Guide]

347

[LVF/Monitor Disp. Set]

347

[Monitor Info. Disp.]

347

[Rec Area]

348

[Remaining Disp.]

348

[Red REC Frame Indicator]

348

[Menu Guide]

348

[Lens / Others]

349

[Lens Position Resume]

349

[Power Zoom Lens]

349

[Lens Fn Button Setting]

349

[Aperture Ring Increment]

350

[Self Timer Auto Off]

350

[Self Shot]

350

[AF After Countdown]

350

[Face Recog.]

351

[Profile Setup]

353

[Custom] menu

313

13. Menu Guide

[Online Manual]

354

[Cust.Set Mem.]

354

[Clock Set]

354

[World Time]

354

[Travel Date]

355

[Wi-Fi]

355

[Bluetooth]

356

[Wireless Connection Lamp]

356

[Beep]

356

[Economy]

357

[Monitor Display Speed]

357

[LVF Display Speed]

357

[Monitor Display]/[Viewfinder]

358

[Monitor Luminance]/

[LVF Luminance]

358

[Eye Sensor]

358

[USB Mode]

359

[TV Connection]

359

[Language]

360

[Version Disp.]

360

[Folder / File Settings]

361

[No.Reset]

361

[Reset]

361

[Reset Network Settings]

361

[Pixel Refresh]

361

[Level Gauge Adjust.]

361

[Demo Mode]

361

[Format]

361

[My Menu Setting]

308

[Add]

308

[Sorting]

308

[Delete]

308

[Display from My Menu]

308

[Playback] menu

[Slide Show]

363

[Playback Mode]

363

[Protect]

364

[Rating]

364

[Title Edit]

365

[Face Rec Edit]

366

[RAW Processing]

366

[4K PHOTO Bulk Saving]

366

[Light Composition]

366

[Sequence Composition]

366

[Clear Retouch]

366

[Text Stamp]

367

[Resize]

368

[Cropping]

369

[Rotate]

369

[Video Divide]

369

[Time Lapse Video]

370

[Stop Motion Video]

370

[Rotate Disp.]

370

[Picture Sort]

370

[Delete Confirmation]

371

[Delete All Images]

371

[Setup] menu

[My Menu]

314

13. Menu Guide

Menus displayed in specific recording

modes

: Default settings

[Intelligent Auto] menu

[Intelligent Auto

Mode]

[

]/ [ ]

79

Switches between [

] mode and [ ] mode.

[iHandheld Night

Shot]

[ON] /

[OFF]

81

When the camera detects [iHandheld Night Shot],

it records a still picture with less jitter and noise by

combining multiple pictures.

[iHDR]

[ON] /

[OFF]

81

When the camera detects a contrast between

the background and the subject, it records a still

picture rich in gradation by combining multiple

pictures.

[Creative Video] menu

[Exposure Mode]

[P]/[A]/[S]/[M]

246

Sets the exposure mode to use in [

] mode.

[4K Live Cropping]

[40SEC]/[20SEC]/

[OFF]

249

By cropping a part of the range displayed in the

live view, it is possible to record an FHD video that

incorporates panning and zooming with the camera

staying in a fixed position.

315

13. Menu Guide

[Slow & Quick] menu

[S&Q Exposure

Mode]

[P]/[A]/[S]/[M]

255

Selects the exposure mode.

[S&Q Recording

Frame Rate]

[60p]/[50p]/[30p]/

[25p]

255

Selects the recording frame rate.

[S&Q Effect]

[8xQUICK]/[4xQUICK]/

[2xQUICK]/[2xSLOW]/

[4xSLOW]

256

Select the speed effect.

[Scene Guide] menu

[Scene Switch] Displays the scene selection screen.

107

[Creative Control] menu

[Filter Effect] Displays the selection screen of filter effect.

113

[Simultaneous

Record w/o Filter]

[ON] /

[OFF]

113

Sets the camera to take a picture with and without

an filter effect simultaneously.

316

13. Menu Guide

[Rec] Menu

Menu items common to the [Rec] menu and [Motion Picture] menu.

Their settings are synchronized.

Default settings

[Aspect Ratio]

[4:3]/[3:2]/[16:9]/[1:1]

119

You can select the image aspect ratio.

[Picture Size]

[L]/[M]/[S]

120

Sets the picture’s image size.

[Quality]

[ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[ ]

121

Set the compression rate used for storing pictures.

[Focus Mode]

[AFS]/[AFF]/[AFC]/[MF]

126

Selects the focusing method (focus mode) to

match subject movement.

[AF

Sensitivity(Photo)]

[+2] to [–2] (

±0)

130

Sets the tracking sensitivity for the movement of

subjects.

[Photo Style]

[Standard]/[Vivid]/[Natural]/[Monochrome]/

[L.Monochrome]/[L.Monochrome D]/[Scenery]/

[Portrait]/[Custom]/[Cinelike D]/[Cinelike V]/

[V-Log L]

223

You can select the finishing settings of images to

suit your subjects and expression styles.

[Filter Settings]

[Filter Effect] [ON]/

[OFF]/[SET]

226

[Simultaneous

Record w/o Filter]

[ON]/

[OFF]

This mode records with additional image effects

(filters).

317

13. Menu Guide

[Color Space]

[sRGB]/[AdobeRGB]

—

This sets the method for correcting the color

reproduction of the recorded images on the

screens of a PC or on a device such as a printer.

[sRGB]: This is widely used in PCs and similar

devices.

[AdobeRGB]: AdobeRGB is mainly used for

business purposes such as professional printing

because it has a greater range of reproducible

colors than sRGB.

• Set to [sRGB] if you are not very familiar with

AdobeRGB.

• When the following functions are being used, the

setting is fixed to [sRGB]:

– Video recording, [4K PHOTO], [Post Focus]

– [V-Log L] ([Photo Style])

– [Filter Settings]

[Metering Mode]

[ ]/[ ]/[ ]

209

Type of optical measurement to measure

brightness can be changed.

318

13. Menu Guide

[Highlight Shadow]

[ ] ([Standard])/

[

] ([Higher contrast])/

[

] ([Lower contrast])/

[

] ([Brighten shadows])/

[

]/[ ]/[ ] (Custom)

—

You can adjust the highlights and shadows in a

picture while confirming the brightness of these

areas on the screen.

• Rotate

to adjust the highlighted areas and

rotate

to adjust the shadowed areas. Press

to confirm the setting.

Highlighted area

Shadowed area

Preview display

– Adjustments can also be made by dragging

the graph.

– To register your preferred settings, press

select the registration target icon (Custom 1,

Custom 2, and Custom 3).

• You can press [DISP.] to switch the display.

319

13. Menu Guide

[Highlight Shadow]

(Continued)

• When using [Filter Settings], [Highlight Shadow]

is not available.

• When [Photo Style] is set to [V-Log L], this is

fixed to [

] ([Standard]).

• The settings adjusted in [

], [ ], [ ], or

[

] will be restored to the default settings when

the camera is turned off.

—

[i.Dynamic]

[AUTO]/[HIGH]/[STANDARD]/[LOW]/

[OFF]

—

Contrast and exposure are compensated when the

brightness difference between the background and

subject is great.

• Compensation effect may not be achieved

depending on the recording conditions.

• This function does not work in the following

case:

– When [HDR] is set to [ON]

• When the following functions are being used,

[i.Dynamic] is not available:

– [V-Log L] ([Photo Style])

– [Filter Settings]

– [Live View Composite]

[i.Resolution]

[HIGH]/[STANDARD]/[LOW] /

[OFF]

—

You can use the camera’s Intelligent Resolution

technology to record still pictures with sharper

outlines and clearer resolution.

320

13. Menu Guide

[Flash]

[Flash Mode]

[ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[ ]

229

Sets the flash mode.

[Flash Synchro]

[1ST]/[2ND]

234

Sets the flash mode to Second Curtain Synchro.

[Flash Adjust.]

[–2 EV] to [+2 EV]

(

[±0 EV])

233

Adjusts the flash output if a picture taken using the

flash is too bright or too dark.

[Auto Exposure

Comp.]

[ON]/

[OFF]

235

Automatically adjust the flash output in conjunction

with the exposure compensation value.

[Wireless] [ON]/

[OFF]

237

Enables recording using a wireless flash.

[Wireless Channel]

[1CH]/[2CH]/[3CH]/[4CH]

237

Sets the channel to use when recording with a

wireless flash.

[Communication

Light]

[HIGH]/[STANDARD]/

[LOW]

239

Set the strength of communication light.

[Wireless Setup] [External Flash]

238

[A Group]/[B Group]/

[C Group]

Sets details for wireless flash recording.

321

13. Menu Guide

[Red-Eye Removal]

[ON]/

[OFF]

235

When [Flash Mode] is set to [

] or [ ], the

camera automatically detects red-eye and corrects

image data.

[ISO Sensitivity

(photo)]

[ISO Auto Lower

Limit Setting]

[200] to [12800]

—

[ISO Auto Upper

Limit Setting]

[AUTO]/[400] to [25600]

You can set the upper limit of ISO sensitivity when

ISO sensitivity is set to [AUTO] or [

• When the following functions are being used,

[ISO Sensitivity (photo)] is not available:

– [Clear Nightscape], [Cool Night Sky], [Warm

Glowing Nightscape], [Handheld Night Shot]

([

] mode)

[Min. Shtr Speed]

[AUTO]/[1/16000] to [1/1]

—

Sets the minimum value for the shutter speed to be

used when ISO sensitivity is set to [AUTO] or

[

• The shutter speed may become slower than the

set value in recording situations where correct

exposure cannot be achieved.

322

13. Menu Guide

[Long Shtr NR]

[ON]/[OFF]

—

The camera automatically removes noise

generated when recording images with a slow

shutter speed.

• Recording is not possible during noise reduction.

• When the following functions are being used,

[Long Shtr NR] is not available:

– Video recording, [4K PHOTO], [Post Focus]

– [ESHTR]

– [Silent Mode]

[Shading Comp.]

[ON]/

[OFF]

—

When the screen periphery darkens as a result of

the lens characteristics, you can record pictures

with the brightness of the screen periphery

corrected.

• Compensation effect may not be achieved

depending on the recording conditions.

• Noise in the periphery of the picture may stand

out with higher ISO sensitivity.

• When the following functions are being used,

[Shading Comp.] is not available:

– Video recording, [4K PHOTO], [Post Focus]

– Taking still pictures while a video is being

recorded (when [

] ([Video Priority]) is set)

– [Ex. Tele Conv.] ([Rec])

– [Digital Zoom] (DC-G100 only)

323

13. Menu Guide

[Diffraction

Compensation]

[AUTO]/

[OFF]

—

The camera raises the image resolution by

correcting the blurriness caused by diffraction

when the aperture is closed.

• Compensation effect may not be achieved

depending on the recording conditions.

• Noise may stand out with higher ISO sensitivity.

[Stabilizer]

[Operation Mode]

[ ]/[ ]/[OFF]

206

[E-Stabilization

(Video)]

[HIGH]/

[STANDARD]/

[OFF]

Configures image stabilizer settings.

[Ex. Tele Conv.]

([Rec])

[ZOOM]/[TELE CONV.]/

[OFF]

154

You can take pictures that are further enlarged

beyond what is available with the optical zoom,

without any deterioration in image quality.

[Digital Zoom]

(DC-G100 only)

[2x]/

[OFF]

157

You can zoom in up to 2x the original zoom

magnification.

[Burst Rate]

[H]/[M]/[L]

160

Sets the burst recording operation.

[4K PHOTO]

[Rec Method] [4K Burst (Wide-angle)]

(In Self Shot Mode)/

[4K Burst]/[4K Burst(S/S)]/

[4K Pre-Burst]

164

[Pre-Burst Recording] [ON]/

[OFF]

Sets 4K photos.

You can save pictures extracted from a burst file

taken using high-speed burst.

324

13. Menu Guide

[Self Timer]

[ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[ ] etc.

187

[SET] 2 sec. to 10 sec. (

3 sec.)

Sets the self-timer duration.

[Time Lapse Shot]

[Start]

189

[Shooting Interval

Setting]

[ON]/[OFF]

[Start Time]

[Now]/[Start Time Set]

[Image Count]

[Shooting Interval]

Starts/stops recording automatically at a set

recording interval.

[Stop Motion

Animation]

[Start]

192

[Auto Shooting] [ON]/

[OFF]

[Shooting Interval]

Enables you to take pictures while moving the

subject little by little.

[Live View

Composite]

[Start]

103

[Shutter Delay] [8SEC]/[4SEC]/[2SEC]/

[1SEC]/

[OFF]

The camera records images at set exposure time

intervals, and combines parts with changes in

bright light to save the result as one picture.

[Silent Mode]

[ON]/

[OFF]

203

Disables all operation sounds and light output at

once.

[Shutter Type]

[AUTO]/[EFC]/[ESHTR]

204

Selects the shutter type to use for taking pictures.

325

13. Menu Guide

[Shutter Delay]

[8SEC]/[4SEC]/[2SEC]/[1SEC]/

[OFF]

—

To reduce camera shake and shutter-induced blur,

the shutter is released after the specified time has

passed since the shutter button was pressed.

• When the following functions are being used,

[Shutter Delay] is not available:

– Video recording, [4K PHOTO], [Post Focus]

– [HDR]

[Bracket]

[Bracket Type]

[

]/[ ]/[ ]/[ ]/

[OFF]

197

[More Settings]

You can take multiple pictures while automatically

adjusting a setting.

[HDR]

[ON]/

[OFF]

—

[SET] [Dynamic Range]

[Auto Align]

The camera can combine 3 still pictures taken at

different exposures into a single properly exposed

picture with rich gradation. The individual pictures

used to create the HDR picture are not saved. You

can minimize the loss of gradations in bright areas

and dark areas when, for example, the contrast

between the background and the subject is large.

A combined HDR picture is saved in JPEG format.

[Dynamic Range]:

[AUTO]: Takes pictures after automatically setting

the adjustment range of the exposure based on the

contrast of a subject.

[±1EV] / [±2EV] / [±3EV]: Takes pictures using the

adjustment range of the exposure being set.

326

13. Menu Guide

[HDR]

(Continued)

[Auto Align]:

[ON]: Automatically adjusts the displacement

of pictures caused by jitter, etc. We recommend

using this setting to take pictures with a handheld

camera.

[OFF]: Does not adjust the displacement of

pictures. We recommend using this setting when

you use a tripod.

• After the shutter button has been pressed, do

not move the camera during the burst operation.

• Since a burst of still pictures are combined

after they have been recorded, it will be a few

moments before you will be able to record

another picture.

• A subject that was in motion when it was

recorded may be recorded as an afterimage.

• When [Auto Align] is set to [ON], the angle of

view narrows slightly.

• When you take pictures using a flash, the flash

mode is fixed to [

] (Forced Flash Off).

• This function will not work for still pictures while

video are being recorded.

• When the following functions are being used,

[HDR] is not available:

– Self Shot Mode

– [Filter Settings]

– [Burst]

– [4K PHOTO], [Post Focus]

– [Bracket]

– [

], [ ], [ ] ([Quality])

– [Time Lapse Shot]

– [Stop Motion Animation] (when [Auto

Shooting] is set)

– [Live View Composite]

—

327

13. Menu Guide

[Multi Exp.]

[Start]

—

[Auto Gain]

[ON]/[OFF]

[Overlay] [ON]/

[OFF]

You can apply an effect equivalent to four

exposures on a single image.

[Auto Gain]: Automatically adjusts brightness in

accordance with image count.

[Overlay]: Allows multiple exposure for recorded

RAW images. After selecting [Start], a selection

screen for images to stack is displayed.

• After selecting [Start], pressing the shutter

button fully starts multiple exposure.

• Preview is displayed for each recording, and the

following operations are available:

– [Next] (You can also

perform the same

operation by pressing

the shutter button

halfway.)

– [Retake]

– [Exit]: Records the

picture, and finishes

multiple exposure

recording.

Retake

Exit

328

13. Menu Guide

[Multi Exp.]

(Continued)

• To finish multiple exposure recording before

starting the recording, press [Fn2] on the

recording screen.

• Recording information for the last-recorded

image will be saved as recording information for

images recorded with multiple exposures.

• [Overlay] can be set only for RAW images

recorded with the camera.

• When the following functions are being used,

[Multi Exp.] is not available:

– Self Shot Mode

– [Filter Settings]

– [Time Lapse Shot]

– [Stop Motion Animation]

– [Live View Composite]

– HDMI output

—

329

13. Menu Guide

[Motion Picture] Menu

Menu items common to the [Rec] menu and [Motion Picture] menu.

Their settings are synchronized.

Default settings

[Rec Quality] Sets the video recording image quality.

241

[Snap Movie]

[ON]/

[OFF]

257

[SET] [Record time]

[Pull Focus]

[Fade]

You can specify the recording time in advance and

record videos casually like you take snapshots.

[Focus Mode]

[AFS]/[AFF]/[AFC]/[MF]

126

Selects the focusing method (focus mode) to

match subject movement.

[Continuous AF]

[ON]/[OFF]

261

You can select how to set the focus in AF when

recording videos.

[AF Custom

Setting(Video)]

[ON]/

[OFF]

262

[SET] [AF Speed]/[AF Sensitivity]

You can fine-adjust the focusing method for video

recording using [Continuous AF].

[Photo Style]

[Standard]/[Vivid]/[Natural]/[Monochrome]/

[L.Monochrome]/[L.Monochrome D]/[Scenery]/

[Portrait]/[Custom]/[Cinelike D]/[Cinelike V]/

[V-Log L]

223

You can select the finishing settings of images to

suit your subjects and expression styles.

330

13. Menu Guide

[Filter Settings]

[Filter Effect] [ON]/

[OFF]/[SET]

226

[Simultaneous

Record w/o Filter]

[ON]/

[OFF]

This mode records with additional image effects

(filters).

[Luminance Level]

[0-255]/

[16-255]

263

You can set the luminance range to suit the

purpose of video recording.

[Metering Mode]

[ ]/[ ]/[ ]

209

Type of optical measurement to measure

brightness can be changed.

[Highlight Shadow]

[ ] ([Standard])/[ ] ([Higher contrast])/

[

] ([Lower contrast])/[ ] ([Brighten shadows])/

[

]/[ ]/[ ] (Custom)

318

You can adjust the highlights and shadows in a

picture while confirming the brightness of these

areas on the screen.

[i.Dynamic]

[AUTO]/[HIGH]/[STANDARD]/[LOW]/

[OFF]

319

Contrast and exposure are compensated when the

brightness difference between the background and

subject is great.

[i.Resolution]

[High]/[Standard]/[Low]/

[OFF]

—

You can use the camera’s Intelligent Resolution

technology to record still pictures with sharper

outlines and a clearer resolution.

[ISO Sensitivity

(video)]

[ISO Auto Lower

Limit Setting]

[200] to [3200]

264

[ISO Auto Upper

Limit Setting]

[AUTO]/[400] to [6400]

Sets the lower and upper limits for ISO sensitivity

when ISO sensitivity is set to [AUTO].

331

13. Menu Guide

[Diffraction

Compensation]

[AUTO]/

[OFF]

323

The camera raises the image resolution by

correcting the blurriness caused by diffraction

when the aperture is closed.

[Stabilizer]

[Operation Mode]

[ ]/[ ]/[OFF]

206

[E-Stabilization

(Video)]

[HIGH]/

[STANDARD]/

[OFF]

Configures image stabilizer settings.

[Flkr Decrease]

[1/50]/[1/60]/[1/100]/[1/120]/

[OFF]

—

The shutter speed can be fixed to reduce the

flicker or striping in a video.

[Ex. Tele Conv.]

([Motion Picture])

[ON]/

[OFF]

156

Fixes the zoom magnification at the maximum.

[Digital Zoom]

(DC-G100 only)

[2x]/

[OFF]

157

You can zoom in up to 2x the original zoom

magnification.

[Picture Mode in

Rec.]

[ ]/[ ]

245

Select which setting to prioritize when taking

pictures while a video is being recorded.

[Self Timer]

[ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[ ] etc.

187

[SET] 2 sec. to 10 sec. (

3 sec.)

Sets the self-timer duration.

[Sound Rec Level

Disp.]

[ON]/

[OFF]

265

The sound recording level is displayed on the

recording screen.

[Sound Rec Level

Adj.]

[AUTO]/[MANUAL]

([MUTE], [-12dB] to [+6dB] (

[0dB]))

265

Sets the sound recording level.

332

13. Menu Guide

[Wind Noise

Canceller]

[HIGH]/

[STANDARD]/[OFF]

266

This reduces the wind noise coming into the built-in

microphone while maintaining sound quality.

[Wind Cut]

[HIGH]/[STANDARD]/[LOW]/

[OFF]

452

This reduces wind noise when an external

microphone is connected.

[Lens Noise Cut]

[ON]/[OFF]

266

You can reduce the zoom sound produced

during video recording when you are using

interchangeable lens compatible with power zoom.

[Built-in Mic]

[AUTO]/

[SURROUND]/[FRONT]/[TRACKING]/

[BACK]

267

Sets the sound pickup range when using the built-

in microphone.

[Built-in Mic

Indicator]

[ON]/[OFF]

268

Displays the sound pickup range and sound pickup

target for the built-in microphone.

[Special Mic.]

[STEREO]/[LENS AUTO]/[SHOTGUN]/

[S.SHOTGUN]/[MANUAL]

452

Sets the sound pickup range when the Stereo

Shotgun Microphone (DMW-MS2: optional) is

connected.

333

13. Menu Guide

[Custom] Menu

: Default settings

[Custom] menu [Exposure]

[ISO Increments]

[1/3EV]/[1 EV]

Changes the intervals between ISO sensitivity adjustment

values.

[Extended ISO]

[ON]/

[OFF]

Extends the setting range of ISO sensitivity.

[Exposure Comp.

Reset]

[ON]/

[OFF]

This resets the exposure value when you change the

recording mode or turn off the camera.

[Custom] menu [Focus / Release Shutter]

[AF/AE Lock]

[AE LOCK]/[AF LOCK]/[AF/AE LOCK]/[AF-ON]

Sets which function is activated when [AF/AE LOCK] is

assigned to an Fn button. (212)

[AF/AE Lock Hold]

[ON]/

[OFF]

This sets button operations for AF/AE Lock.

Turning this [ON] maintains the lock after releasing the

button until it is pressed again.

[Shutter AF]

[ON]/[OFF]

This adjusts focus automatically when you press the shutter

button halfway.

[Half Press Release]

[ON]/

[OFF]

You can release the shutter quickly by pressing the shutter

button halfway.

334

13. Menu Guide

[Custom] menu [Focus / Release Shutter]

[Quick AF]

[ON]/

[OFF]

When the amount of camera shake becomes small, the

camera will automatically adjust the focus and focus

adjustment will then be quicker when the shutter button is

pressed.

• The battery will drain faster than usual.

• This function is not available in the following cases:

– In preview mode

– In low light situations

[Eye Sensor AF]

[ON]/

[OFF]

When looking through the viewfinder, if the eye sensor

operates, then AF will function.

• [Eye Sensor AF] may not work in low light situations.

[Pinpoint AF

Setting]

[Pinpoint AF Time] [LONG]/

[MID]/[SHORT]

[Pinpoint AF Display] [FULL]/

[PIP]

Changes enlarged screen settings displayed when AF

mode is [

[Pinpoint AF Time]: Sets the time for which the screen is

enlarged when the shutter button is pressed halfway.

[Pinpoint AF Display]: Sets the display method (full screen

mode/windowed mode) of the enlarged screen.

335

13. Menu Guide

[Custom] menu [Focus / Release Shutter]

[AF Assist Lamp]

[ON]/[OFF]

When recording in low light conditions, the AF assist light

turns on when you press the shutter button halfway, making

it easier for the camera to focus.

• The effective range of the AF Assist Lamp is different

depending on the lens used.

– When the interchangeable lens (H-FS12032/

H-FS35100) is attached and at Wide:

Approx. 1.0 m (3.3 feet) to 3.0 m (9.8 feet)

• Remove the lens hood.

• The AF Assist Lamp may be greatly blocked, and it may

become harder to focus when a lens with large diameter

is used.

• When the following functions are being used, [AF Assist

Lamp] is fixed to [OFF]:

– [Distinct Scenery], [Bright Blue Sky], [Romantic

Sunset Glow], [Vivid Sunset Glow], [Glistening Water],

[Clear Nightscape], [Cool Night Sky], [Warm Glowing

Nightscape], [Artistic Nightscape], [Handheld Night

Shot] ([

] mode)

– [Silent Mode]

336

13. Menu Guide

[Custom] menu [Focus / Release Shutter]

[Direct Focus Area]

[ON]/

[OFF]

Moves the AF area or MF assist using the cursor button

while recording.

• When [

], [ ], [ ], or [ ] is selected, you can

move the AF area, when [

] is selected, you can move

the lock start position, and when [

] is selected, you

can move the focus position.

• Perform the setting of functions assigned to the cursor

buttons using the Quick menu (301) or function buttons

(295).

• When the following functions are being used, [Direct

Focus Area] is fixed to [OFF]:

– [Glistening Water] ([

] mode, [ ] mode)

– [4K Live Cropping]

[Focus/Release

Priority]

[AFS]/[AFF]

[FOCUS]/[BALANCE]/[RELEASE]

[AFC] [FOCUS]/

[BALANCE]/[RELEASE]

This sets whether to give priority to focus or shutter release

during AF.

[FOCUS]: Disables recording when focus is not achieved.

[BALANCE]: Performs recording while controlling the

balance between focusing and shutter release timing.

[RELEASE]: Enables recording even when focus is not

achieved.

337

13. Menu Guide

[Custom] menu [Focus / Release Shutter]

[Focus Switching

for Vert / Hor]

[ON]/

[OFF]

This stores separate AF area positions for when the camera

is held vertically and when it is held horizontally. The

camera memorizes two different vertical positions, one with

the camera’s right side facing down and one with the left

side facing down.

• This function works when the AF mode is set to [

[

] or [ ].

• In MF, this memorizes the MF Assist position.

[Loop Movement

Focus Frame]

[ON]/

[OFF]

When moving the AF area or MF Assist, this enables its

position to loop from one edge to the other edge of the

screen.

[AF Area Display]

[ON]/[OFF]

You can perform the AF area display setting when the AF

Mode is set to [

] (49-area-focusing) or Custom Multi.

[ON]: Displays the AF area on the recording screen.

• When the default AF area is selected in [

] (49-area-

focusing) or [

], [ ], or [ ] of Custom Multi-

function, the AF area is not displayed.

[OFF]: Displays the AF area on the recording screen for

only a few seconds after the AF area is set.

• When the following functions are being used, even when

it is set to [ON], it has the same operations as [OFF].

– [

] mode, [ ] mode

– Video recording, [4K PHOTO]

338

13. Menu Guide

[Custom] menu [Focus / Release Shutter]

[AF+MF]

[ON]/

[OFF]

You can fine-adjust the focus manually during AF Lock.

– When focus mode is [AFS], and the shutter button is

pressed halfway

– When locked using the Fn button [AF LOCK] or [AF/AE

LOCK]

[MF Assist]

When an

interchangeable lens

with a focus ring is

attached

[

]/ [ ]/[ ]/[OFF]

When an

interchangeable lens

with no focus ring is

attached

[ON]/[OFF]

This sets the display method of MF Assist (enlarged

screen).

[

]: The screen is enlarged by operating the lens or by

pressing [

] ( ).

[

]: The screen is enlarged by operating the lens.

[

]: The screen is enlarged by pressing [ ] ( ).

• While you are using the following functions, MF Assist will

not be displayed:

– Video recording

– [4K Pre-Burst]

– [Digital Zoom] (DC-G100 only)

[MF Assist Display]

[FULL]/

[PIP]

This sets the display method (full screen mode/windowed

mode) of MF Assist (enlarged screen).

339

13. Menu Guide

[Custom] menu [Operation]

[Fn Button Set]

[Setting in REC mode]

[Setting in PLAY mode]

Registers a function to the Fn button.

• For details, refer to page 295.

[ISO Displayed

Setting]

[Front Dial]

[ ]/[ ]/[OFF]

This sets the operations of the dials in the setting screen for

ISO sensitivity.

Assigning [

] lets you change [ISO Auto Upper Limit

Setting].

[Exposure Comp.

Disp. Setting]

[Cursor Buttons (Up/

Down)]

[

]/ [OFF]

This sets the operations of the

in the exposure

compensation screen.

Assigning [

] lets you set exposure bracketing.

[Front Dial]

[ ]/[ ]/[OFF]

This sets the operations of the dials in the exposure

compensation screen.

Assigning [

] lets you adjust flash output.

[Q.MENU]

[PRESET]/[CUSTOM]

Customizes the Quick menu.

• For details, refer to page 301.

340

13. Menu Guide

[Custom] menu [Operation]

[Dial Set.]

[Assign Dial (F/SS)]

[ ]/[ ]

Sets the operations to be assigned to the dials in [

]

mode.

[

]: Assigns the aperture value to the front dial,

and the shutter speed to the control dial.

[

]: Assigns the shutter speed to the front dial, and

the aperture value to the control dial.

[Rotation (F/SS)]

[ ]/[ ]

Changes the rotational directions of the dials for aperture

value and shutter speed adjustment.

[Exposure Comp.]

[

]/[ ]/ [OFF]

Assigns exposure compensation to

or .

(Except in [

] mode)

[Dial Operation

Switch Setup]

[

]

[

]

In the Fn button [Dial Operation Switch], this sets the

functions to be registered temporarily to

or . (299)

341

13. Menu Guide

[Custom] menu [Operation]

[Operation Lock

Setting]

[Cursor]

[ON]/[OFF]

[Touch Screen]

[ON]/[OFF]

[Dial]

[ON]/[OFF]

You can set an object for which operation is disabled when

[Operation Lock] is assigned to the function button using

[Fn Button Set] (295) in the [Custom] ([Operation]) menu.

[Cursor]: Cursor buttons and

[Touch Screen]: Touch screen

[Dial]:

, and

[Focus Ring Lock]

[ON]/

[OFF]

(When an interchangeable lens with a focus ring is

attached)

This disables the focus ring operation during MF to lock the

focus.

• [MFL] is displayed on the recording screen while the

focus ring is locked.

[Video Rec. Button]

[ON]/[OFF]

Enabling/disabling the video rec. button.

[Touch Settings]

[Touch Screen]

[ON]/[OFF]

[Touch Tab]

[ON]/[OFF]

[Touch AF]

[AF]/[AF+AE]

[Touch Pad AF]

[EXACT]/

[OFFSET1] to [OFFSET7]/[OFF]

Enables touch operation on the monitor display.

[Touch Screen]: All touch operations.

[Touch Tab]: Operations of tabs, such as [

] on the right

side of the screen.

[Touch AF]: Operation to optimize the focus ([AF]) for a

touched subject. Alternatively, operation to optimize both the

focus and brightness ([AF+AE]). (144)

[Touch Pad AF]: Touch pad operation during viewfinder

display. (146)

342

13. Menu Guide

[Custom] menu [Monitor / Display]

[Auto Review]

[Duration Time

(photo)]

[HOLD]/[5SEC] to [1SEC] ( [2SEC])/

[OFF]

[Duration Time (4K

PHOTO)]

[HOLD]/[OFF]

[Duration Time (Post

Focus)]

[HOLD]/[OFF]

[Playback Operation

Priority]

[ON]/

[OFF]

This displays an image immediately after it is recorded.

[Duration Time (photo)]: Sets the Auto Review when

taking pictures.

[Duration Time (4K PHOTO)]: Sets the Auto Review when

recording 4K photos.

[Duration Time (Post Focus)]: Sets the Auto Review when

recording with Post-Focus.

[Playback Operation Priority]: When this is set to [ON],

you can toggle the playback screen during Auto Review, or

delete pictures.

• If you set [Duration Time (photo)] to [HOLD], the image

recorded stays displayed until the shutter button is

pressed halfway.

[Playback Operation Priority] will be fixed to [ON].

[Monochrome Live

View]

[ON]/

[OFF]

You can display the recording screen in black and white.

This is convenient for focusing with MF.

• The image outputted via HDMI will not be displayed in

black and white.

343

13. Menu Guide

[Custom] menu [Monitor / Display]

[Constant Preview]

[ON]/

[OFF]

[SET] [Preview While MF Assist]

You can always confirm the effects of aperture and shutter

speed on the recording screen when in [

] mode.

Preview also operates in the MF Assist screen when

[Preview While MF Assist] is set to [ON].

• This function does not work when using the flash.

[Live View Boost]

[MODE1]/[MODE2]/

[OFF]

[SET] [P/A/S/M]/

[M]

Displays the screen brighter to make it easier to check

subjects and compositions even in low-light environment.

[MODE1]: Setting for low brightness, with priority given to

a soft display.

[MODE2]: Setting for high brightness, with priority given to

image visibility.

• You can change the recording mode in which [Live View

Boost] works by using [SET].

• This mode does not affect recorded images.

• Noise may be more noticeable in the screen than in the

recorded image.

• This function does not work in the following cases:

– When adjusting the exposure (when the shutter button

is pressed halfway, for example)

– When recording a video or 4K photo

– When using [Filter Settings]

– When using [Constant Preview]

344

13. Menu Guide

[Custom] menu [Monitor / Display]

[Peaking]

[ON]/[OFF]

[SET] [Detect Level]

[Display Color]

During MF operation, in-focus portions (portions on the

screen with clear outlines) are highlighted with color.

• When [Detect Level] in [SET] is set to [HIGH], portions

to be highlighted are reduced, allowing you to achieve a

more precise focus.

• Changing the [Detect Level] setting also changes the

[Display Color] setting as follows.

[Detect Level] [HIGH] [LOW]

[Display Color]

(Light blue) (Blue)

(Yellow) (Orange)

(Yellow

Green)

(Green)

(Pink) (Red)

(White) (Gray)

• Each time [

] in [ ] is touched, the setting is

switched in order of [

] ([Detect Level]: [LOW]) →

[

] ([Detect Level]: [HIGH]) → [OFF].

• When [Rough Monochrome] of [

] mode is being used,

[Peaking] is not available.

• When [Live View Boost] is being used, [Peaking] is not

available.

345

13. Menu Guide

[Custom] menu [Monitor / Display]

[Histogram]

[ON]/

[OFF]

This displays the histogram.

Turning this [ON] displays the histogram transition screen.

Press

to set the position.

• You can also move the position by dragging the

histogram on the recording screen.

• A histogram is a graph that displays

brightness along the horizontal axis,

and the number of pixels at each

brightness level on the vertical axis.

By looking at the distribution of the

graph, you can determine the current

exposure.

Dark

Bright

• When the recorded image and the histogram do not

match each other under the following conditions, the

histogram is displayed in orange:

– During exposure compensation

– When the flash fires

– When the correct exposure is not achieved, such as in

low light situations.

• The histogram is an approximation in the recording

mode.

[Guide Line]

[

]/[ ]/[ ]/ [OFF]

Sets the grid line pattern to be displayed on the recording

screen.

When using [

], you can press to set the

position.

• When using [

], you can also drag [ ] on the grid

lines on the recording screen to move the position.

346

13. Menu Guide

[Custom] menu [Monitor / Display]

[Frame Marker]

[ON]/

[OFF]

[SET] [Frame Aspect]

[Frame Color]

[Frame Mask]

A frame with the set aspect ratio is displayed on the

recording screen.

• For details, refer to page 270.

[Center Marker]

[ON]/

[OFF]

The center of the recording screen will be displayed as [+].

[Highlight]

[ON]/

[OFF]

Overexposed areas appear blinking

in black and white during Auto Review

or playback.

• The display without the highlights is added to the display

shown when [DISP.] is pressed in the playback screen.

Use this to delete the highlight display. (62)

[Zebra Pattern]

[ZEBRA1]/[ZEBRA2]/

[OFF]

[SET] [Zebra 1]

[Zebra 2]

Parts that are brighter than the benchmark value are

displayed with stripes.

• For details, refer to page 269.

347

13. Menu Guide

[Custom] menu [Monitor / Display]

[Expo.Meter]

[ON]/

[OFF]

This displays the exposure meter.

8.04.0 5.6 11

15 30 60 125 250

• Set to [ON] to display the exposure meter when

performing Program Shift, setting aperture, and setting

shutter speed.

• If no operations are performed for a certain period of

time, the exposure meter disappears.

[MF Guide]

[ON]/[OFF]

During MF, MF Guide, which acts as a guide to recording

distance, is displayed on the screen.

[LVF/Monitor Disp.

Set]

[LVF Disp. Set]

[

]/ [ ]

[Monitor Disp. Set]

[

]/ [ ]

You can switch the viewfinder/monitor display method.

[

]: Display the icons outside of the live

view area.

[ ]: Display the icons within the live

view area.

[Monitor Info. Disp.]

[ON]/[OFF]

Displays the monitor recording information screen.

348

13. Menu Guide

[Custom] menu [Monitor / Display]

[Rec Area]

[ ]/[ ]

Switching the angle of view setting used for recording still

pictures and video.

[

]: Indicated as the angle of view when recording still

pictures.

[

]: Indicated as the angle of view when recording video.

• The recording area indicated is an approximation.

• [Rec Area] is fixed to [

] when recording 4K photos or

recording in [Post Focus].

[Remaining Disp.]

[ ] (Remaining Shots)/[ ] (Remaining Time)

Switching the display between the number of recordable

pictures that you can take and the available recording time.

[Red REC Frame

Indicator]

[ON]/[OFF]

A red frame is displayed on the recording screen that

indicates that video is being recorded.

[Menu Guide]

[ON]/[OFF]

You can display the selection screen when the mode dial is

switched to [

]/[ ].

349

13. Menu Guide

[Custom] menu [Lens / Others]

[Lens Position

Resume]

[ON]/

[OFF]

The camera saves the focus position when you turn it off.

When an interchangeable lens that is compatible with power

zoom is in use, the zoom position is also saved.

[Power Zoom Lens]

[Disp Focal Length]

[ON]/[OFF]

[Step Zoom] [ON]/

[OFF]

[Zoom Speed]

[Photo] [H]/

[M]/[L]

[Video] [H]/

[M]/[L]

[Zoom Ring]

[ON]/[OFF]

Sets the screen display and operation when using an

interchangeable lens compatible with power zoom. (158)

[Lens Fn Button

Setting]

[Focus Stop]/[AF/AE LOCK]/[AF-ON]/[Stabilizer]/[Focus

Area Set]/[AF Mode/MF]/[Preview]/[Focus Ring Lock]/[Off]/

[Restore to Default]

Sets the function to be assigned to the focus button of an

interchangeable lens.

• You can call up the assigned function by setting the focus

selector switch of a compatible interchangeable lens to

[Fn] and then pressing the focus button of the lens.

• When [Focus Stop] is used, the focus is locked while the

focus button is pressed and held.

350

13. Menu Guide

[Custom] menu [Lens / Others]

[Aperture Ring

Increment]

[SMOOTH]/

[1/3EV]

[SMOOTH]: You can finely adjust the aperture value.

[1/3EV]: You can adjust the aperture value in increments

of 1/3 EV.

You can change the aperture adjustment increment by

operating the aperture ring.

• This setting is available when an interchangeable

lens that supports a click-less aperture ring (optional:

H-X1025) is attached (as of June 2020).

• When taking pictures, this setting will take effect if the

aperture ring is set to a position other than [A].

• If the position of the aperture ring is set to [A], the

aperture value set by the camera will take effect and can

be adjusted like with [1/3EV].

• During video recording, fine adjustments can be made

like with [SMOOTH].

• When [SMOOTH] is set, fractions of aperture values are

not displayed on the screen.

[Self Timer Auto

Off]

[ON]/[OFF]

The self-timer is canceled if the unit is turned off.

[Self Shot]

[ON]/[OFF]

If you set [Self Shot] to [OFF], the mode will not switch to

Self Shot Mode (85) even if you rotate the monitor.

[AF After

Countdown]

[ON]/[OFF]

The camera focuses automatically after the self-shot

countdown ends.

351

13. Menu Guide

[Custom] menu [Lens / Others]

[Face Recog.]

[ON]/

[OFF]/[MEMORY]

The Face Recognition function recognizes a face similar

to a registered face and automatically adjusts focus and

exposure for the face with higher priority.

Registering face pictures

Up to 6 people’s face pictures can be registered along with

such information as name and birthdate.

Use to select [MEMORY] and press .

Use to select [New] and press .

Align the face with the guide and record.

• Faces of subjects other than people (e.g. pets)

cannot be registered.

• When

is pressed or [ ] is touched, an

explanation is displayed.

Use to select the item for editing and press .

[Name]: Set the name.

• For details on how to enter characters, refer

to “Entering Characters” (372)

[Age]: Set the birthdate.

[Add Images]: Up to 3 face pictures of the person can

be registered.

Use to select [Add] and press

• When a registered face picture

is selected with cursor button,

a screen to confirm deletion is

displayed. Select [Yes] to delete

the face picture.

Record the picture. (step 3)

352

13. Menu Guide

[Custom] menu [Lens / Others]

[Face Recog.]

(Continued)

Editing or deleting information about registered

persons

Use to select [MEMORY] and press .

Use to select the picture of the person to be

edited or deleted and press

Use to select the item and press .

[Info Edit]: Edit name or other registered information.

(Step

4 of “Registering face pictures”)

[Priority]: Set priority order for focus and exposure.

Use to select the registration

order and press

[Delete]: Delete information and face pictures of

registered persons.

• In some cases, the camera cannot recognize or

incorrectly recognizes even registered people depending

on their expression or the environment.

• [Face Recog.] functions only when AF mode is set to

[

• Only the first picture of the burst recording will contain

Face Recognition information.

• The name of the person recognized in the first picture is

displayed in the case of group pictures.

• When the following functions are being used, [Face

Recog.] is not available:

– [Slimming Mode] (Self Shot Mode)

– [Slimming Mode] in [Clear Portrait] ([

] mode)

– [Miniature Effect] ([

] mode)

– Video recording, [4K PHOTO], [Post Focus]

– [Time Lapse Shot]

– [Multi Exp.]

353

13. Menu Guide

[Custom] menu [Lens / Others]

[Profile Setup]

[

]/[ ]/[ ]/ [OFF] / [SET]

The name and age of the baby/pet are recorded to the

image.

Setting the name and age in months/years

Use to select [SET] and press .

Use to select [Baby1], [Baby2] or [Pet] and press

Use to select [Age] or [Name] and press .

Use to select [SET] and press .

Enter the [Age].

Enter the [Name].

• For details on how to enter characters, refer to

“Entering Characters” (372)

Canceling the display of the name and age in months/

years

Set [Profile Setup] to [OFF].

• [Name] and [Age] print settings can be made on your

computer using “PHOTOfunSTUDIO” software, which

you download from a website. Text may also be stamped

onto the still picture using the camera’s [Text Stamp].

• When the following functions are being used, [Profile

Setup] is not available:

– [4K PHOTO], [Post Focus]

• You cannot record the name or age in months/years in

the following cases:

– During video recording

– Still pictures that are taken while recording video

354

13. Menu Guide

[Setup] Menu

: Default settings

[Online Manual]

[URL display]/[QR Code display]

Displays the URL or QR code in order to download the

“Operating Instructions” (PDF format).

[Cust.Set Mem.]

[C1]/[C2]/[C3]

You can register the currently set information of the camera.

• For details, refer to page 305.

[Clock Set]

Sets the date and time.

• For details, refer to page 47.

[World Time]

[

] [Destination]

[ ] [Home]

Sets the times for the region where you live and your travel

destination.

• You can set [Destination] after setting [Home].

Use to select [Destination] or [Home] and press

Use to select area and press .

When [Home] has been selected.

Current time

Time difference

from GMT

(Greenwich Mean

Time)

• If you are using Daylight Savings [ ], press . (The

time will move forward by 1 hour.)

To return to the normal time, press

again.

• When you come back from your travel destination, select

[Home] in step

1 and press .

355

13. Menu Guide

[Travel Date]

[Travel Setup] [SET]/

[OFF]

[Location] [SET]/

[OFF]

[Travel Setup]: If you set your travel schedule and record

pictures, the day of your trip on which the picture was taken

will be recorded.

[Location]: Once the [Travel Setup] is set, you can set the

location.

• For details on how to enter characters, refer to “Entering

Characters”. (372)

• To print [Location] or the number of days that have

passed, either use [Text Stamp] (367) or print using the

“PHOTOfunSTUDIO” software.

• The travel date is calculated from the set departure date

and the date set in the camera’s clock. When destination

is set in [World Time], days elapsed are calculated based

on local destination time.

• When [Travel Setup] is set to [OFF], the number of days

elapsed is not recorded. It is not displayed even if [Travel

Setup] is set to [SET] after recording.

• When the current date passes the return date, [Travel

Setup] is automatically canceled.

• [Location] cannot be recorded while recording video,

recording 4K photos, or recording in [Post Focus].

[Wi-Fi]

[Wi-Fi Function] (373)

[Wi-Fi Setup] (429)

356

13. Menu Guide

[Bluetooth]

[Bluetooth] (377)

[Send Image (Smartphone)] (409)

[Remote Wakeup] (398)

[Returning from Sleep Mode] (392)

[Auto Transfer] (395)

[Location Logging] (397)

[Auto Clock Set] (399)

[Wi-Fi network settings]

[Wi-Fi network settings]: Registers the Wi-Fi access point.

Wireless access points used to connect the camera to Wi-Fi

networks will be registered automatically.

[Wireless

Connection Lamp]

[ON]/[OFF]

The lamp lights while the wireless function is operating.

[Beep]

[Beep Volume]

[

] (High)/ [ ] (Low)/[ ] (Off)

[Shutter Vol.]

[

] (High)/ [ ] (Low)/[ ] (Off)

[Shutter Tone]

[ ] (Pattern 1)/[ ] (Pattern 2)/

[

] (Pattern 3)

Sets the beep sounds and electronic shutter sounds.

• When [Silent Mode] is being used, [Beep Volume] and

[Shutter Vol.] are fixed to Off.

357

13. Menu Guide

[Economy]

[Sleep Mode] [10MIN.]/

[5MIN.]/[2MIN.]/[1 MIN.]/

[OFF]

[Sleep Mode(Wi-Fi)]

[ON]/[OFF]

[Auto LVF/Monitor

Off]

[5MIN.]/[2MIN.]/[1 MIN.]/[OFF]

[Power Save LVF

Shooting]

[Time]

[Display]

This is a function to automatically turn the camera to sleep

(power save) status or turn off the viewfinder/monitor if no

operation is performed for a set time.

• For details, refer to page 37.

[Monitor Display

Speed]

[ECO 30fps]/

[60fps]

Sets the display speed for live view on the monitor.

[ECO 30fps]: Reduces the power consumption for a longer

operating time.

[60fps]: Enables smooth display of movements.

• When the following functions are being used, [Monitor

Display Speed] is not available:

– [

] mode, [ ] mode

– Video recording, [4K PHOTO], [Post Focus]

– HDMI output

[LVF Display Speed]

[ECO 30fps]/

[60fps]

Sets the display speed for live view on the viewfinder.

[ECO 30fps]: Reduces the power consumption for a longer

operating time.

[60fps]: Enables smooth display of movements.

• When the following functions are being used, [LVF

Display Speed] is not available:

– [

] mode, [ ] mode

– Video recording, [4K PHOTO], [Post Focus]

– HDMI output

358

13. Menu Guide

[Monitor Display]/

[Viewfinder]

[Brightness]/[Contrast]/[Saturation]/[Red Tint]/[Blue Tint]

This adjusts the brightness, coloring, and red or blue tints of

the monitor/viewfinder.

Press to select the setting item, and press

to adjust.

Press to confirm the setting.

• It will adjust the monitor when the monitor is in use, and

the viewfinder when the viewfinder is in use.

[Monitor

Luminance]/

[LVF Luminance]

[AUTO]/[-3] to [+3]

Adjusts monitor/viewfinder luminance.

[AUTO]: The brightness is adjusted automatically

depending on how bright it is around the camera.

• Adjusts the monitor luminance when displaying the

monitor, and the viewfinder luminance when displaying

the viewfinder.

• When either [AUTO] is set, or the adjusted value is set to

positive side, the usage period will shorten.

[Eye Sensor]

[Sensitivity]

[HIGH]/[LOW]

This will set the sensitivity of the eye sensor.

[LVF/Monitor Switch]

[LVF/MON AUTO] (automatic

viewfinder/monitor switching)/

[LVF] (viewfinder)/[MON] (monitor)

This will set the method for switching between the

viewfinder and monitor.

• If you press [LVF] to switch the display, the [LVF/Monitor

Switch] setting will also switch.

359

13. Menu Guide

[USB Mode]

[ ] [Select on connection]/[ ] [PC(Storage)]/

[

] [PictBridge(PTP)]

This sets the communication method to be used when the

USB connection cable is connected.

[

] [Select on connection]: Select this setting to

select the USB communication system when connecting to

another device.

[

] [PC(Storage)]: Select this setting to export images to

a connected PC.

[

] [PictBridge(PTP)]: Select this setting when

connecting to a printer that supports PictBridge.

[TV Connection]

[HDMI Mode (Play)]

[AUTO]/[4K/25p]

/[1080p]/[1080i]/

[720p]/[576p]

Sets the HDMI output resolution for playback.

[AUTO]: Outputs with a resolution suited to the connected

TV.

• If no image appears on the TV with [AUTO], switch to

a constant setting other than [AUTO] to set a format

supported by your TV.

(Refer to the operating instructions for the TV.)

1 Even when [4K/25p] is set, MP4 motion pictures

recorded with [4K/100M/30p] will be output at a

resolution of “4K/30p”.

2 Depending on the connected TV, 480 available scan

lines may be used for output.

360

13. Menu Guide

[TV Connection]

(Continued)

[HDMI Info Display

(Rec)]

[MODE1]/[MODE2]/[OFF]

Sets the camera’s information display that will be outputted

to the external device connected via HDMI.

[MODE1]: This constantly outputs the information display.

[MODE2]: This outputs the information display for

5 seconds when the camera is operated.

[OFF]: This does not output the information display.

• When set to [OFF], only the following switches/buttons

are enabled.

– Camera on/off switch

– Shutter button

– Video rec. button

– [

] button

[VIERA Link] [ON]/

[OFF]

You can use the device remote control to operate the

camera when it is connected to a VIERA Link compatible

device using an HDMI micro cable.

• For details, refer to page 437.

[Language]

This set the language displayed on the screen.

• If you set a different language by mistake, select [

]

from the menu icons to set the desired language.

[Version Disp.]

You can check the firmware versions of the camera and

lens.

Press

to display information about the camera software.

361

13. Menu Guide

[Folder / File

Settings]

[Select Folder]/[Create a New Folder]/[File Name Setting]

Set the folder and file name where to save the images.

• For details, refer to page 123.

[No.Reset]

Resets the file number of the next recording to 0001.

• For details, refer to page 125.

[Reset]

Returns the camera to its default settings.

• For details, refer to page 69.

[Reset Network

Settings]

Network settings are reset to the default, such as equipment

information you have registered using [Wi-Fi Setup] or

[Bluetooth].

(Excluding [LUMIX CLUB])

[Pixel Refresh]

This optimizes the image sensor and image processing.

• The image sensor and image processing are optimized

when the camera is purchased. Use this function when

bright spots that do not exist in the subject get recorded.

• Turn the camera off and on after the pixels are corrected.

[Level Gauge

Adjust.]

[Adjust.]

Hold the camera in a horizontal position, and press

. The

level gauge will be adjusted.

[Level Gauge Value Reset]

Restores the default level gauge setting.

[Demo Mode]

You can try focusing, peaking, etc. in [Post Focus], with the

image picture.

[Format]

Formats the card (initialization).

• For details, refer to page 40.

362

13. Menu Guide

[Playback] Menu



How to Select an Image(s) in the [Playback] menu

Follow the steps below when the image selection screen is displayed.

When [Single] has been selected

Press to select the image.

SetSet

Press .

• If [Set/Cancel] is displayed at the right

bottom of the screen, the setting is

canceled when

is pressed again.

When [Multi] has been selected

Press to select the image and

then press

(repeat).

• The setting is canceled when is

pressed again.

2 3

4 5 6

OKOK

Press [DISP.] to execute.

When a screen similar to the one on the right is displayed:

Press to select the image, and

then press

to set (repeat).

• The setting is canceled when is pressed

again.

Set/Cancel

2 3

4 5 6

363

13. Menu Guide

: Default settings

[Slide Show]

[ALL]/[Picture Only]/[Video Only]

Selects image types and plays them back at regular

intervals in order.

[Start]: Starts slide show playback.

[Effect]: Allows you to select the screen effects when

switching from one picture to the next.

[Setup]: [Duration]/[Repeat]/[Sound]

[Duration]: Sets the duration to play an image.

[Duration] can be set only when [Effect] is set to

[OFF].

[Repeat]: Sets repeat playback.

[Sound]: If you select [AUTO], music will be

played for still pictures, and audio will be played

for videos. You can also select a setting to play

just one of the two or neither.

Operations during slide show

: Plays/pauses.

You can also perform the same operation by touching

[

: Move to the previous image

: Move to the next image

: Ends the slide show

: Adjusts the volume

You can also perform the same operation by touching

[

] or [ ].

• When [Video Only] is set, [Duration] is not available.

[Playback Mode]

[Normal Play]/[Picture Only]/[Video Only]

Filters the type of images to play back.

364

13. Menu Guide

[Protect]

[Single]/[Multi]/[Cancel]

You can set protection for images so that they will not be

deleted by mistake.

However, if you format the card, the protected images will

also be deleted.

• For information about how to select images, refer to page

362.

• Be careful because the [Protect] setting may be disabled

on a device other than this camera.

[Rating]

[Single]/[Multi]/[Cancel]

If you set any of the five different rating levels for images,

you can do the following:

• Deleting all images except for those with ratings.

• Check the rating level in the file details display in

operating systems such as Windows 10, Windows 8.1,

and Windows 8. (JPEG images only)

Select an image. (362)

Press to select a rating level (1 to 5) and then

press

• When [Multi] is selected, repeat Steps

1 and 2.

• To cancel the setting, set the rating level to [OFF].

365

13. Menu Guide

[Title Edit]

You can enter characters (titles etc.) on a recorded picture.

After text has been registered, it can be stamped in prints

using [Text Stamp] (367).

Select a still picture (362).

• [

] is displayed for pictures with texts already

stamped.

Enter characters.

• For details on how to enter characters, refer to

“Entering Characters” (372).

• To delete texts, delete all the characters in the

character input screen.

• You can print out texts using the “PHOTOfunSTUDIO”

software.

• You can set up to 100 pictures at one time with [Multi].

• [Title Edit] is not available for images recorded using the

following functions:

– Video recording, [4K PHOTO], [Post Focus]

– [

], [ ], [ ] ([Quality])

366

13. Menu Guide

[Face Rec Edit]

[REPLACE]/[DELETE]

Edit or delete the recognition information for pictures with

incorrect information.

Use to select picture and press .

Use to select a person and press .

• If [DELETE], go to step

Use to select the person to replace for

another and press

Use to select [Yes] and press .

• When Face Recognition information is deleted, it cannot

be restored.

[RAW Processing]

Processes pictures taken in RAW format on the camera and

saves them in JPEG format.

• For details, refer to page 288.

[4K PHOTO Bulk

Saving]

You can save any 5 second period of pictures from a 4K

burst file all at once.

• For details, refer to page 177.

[Light Composition]

Select multiple frames from 4K burst files that you wish

to combine. Parts of the image that are brighter than the

preceding frame will be superimposed on the preceding

frame to combine the frames into one picture.

• For details, refer to page 282.

[Sequence

Composition]

Selects multiple frames from a 4K burst file to create a

sequence composition of a moving subject into one picture.

• For details, refer to page 284.

[Clear Retouch]

Erases unnecessary parts recorded on the pictures taken.

• For details, refer to page 286.

367

13. Menu Guide

[Text Stamp]

You can stamp the recording date and time, names, travel

destination, travel dates, etc. on the recorded still pictures.

Select a still picture (362).

• [

] is displayed on the screen if the picture is

already stamped with [Text Stamp].

Select the content to stamp.

• Use

to select [Set] and press .

[Shooting Date]: [W/O TIME] (recording date)/

[WITH TIME] (recording date and time)

[Name]: [

] (Name registered in Face

Recognition)/[

] (Name registered in [Profile

Setup])

[Location]: Location registered in [Setup] menu’s

[Travel Date]

[Travel Date]: Number of days that have elapsed

since the travel date set in [Setup] menu’s [Travel

Date]

[Title]: Text registered in [Title Edit]

Press [ ].

Use to select [OK] and press .

• Do not request date printing in store or make date

printing on printer for still pictures with date stamps.

(Date printing may be overlapped.)

• You can set up to 100 pictures at one time with [Multi].

• The picture quality may be coarser.

• [Text Stamp] is not available for images recorded using

the following functions:

– Video recording, [4K PHOTO], [Post Focus]

– [

] ([Quality])

– [Text Stamp]

• Date information cannot be stamped on images recorded

without setting the clock.

368

13. Menu Guide

[Resize]

[Single]/[Multi]

Reduce the picture size of JPEG images and save them as

different images to enable them to be easily used for web

pages or sent as email attachments.

• For information about how to select images, refer to page

362.

– When [Single] is selected, after choosing the image,

press

to select the size, then press .

– When [Multi] is selected, before choosing the images,

press

to select the size, then press .

• You can set up to 100 images at once with [Multi].

• The image quality of the resized image becomes lower.

• [Resize] is not available for images recorded using the

following functions:

– Video recording, [4K PHOTO], [Post Focus]

– Group images

– [

] ([Quality])

– [Text Stamp]

369

13. Menu Guide

[Cropping]

Enlarge your still pictures and crop unwanted areas.

Use to select a still picture and press .

Select area to crop and press .

Operations during cropping

: Enlarges/reduces the screen.

You can also perform the same operation by

touching [

]/[ ].

: Moves the enlarged area.

You can perform the same operation by

dragging on the screen.

• Original Face Recognition information will not be copied

when still pictures are cropped.

• Picture quality is reduced after cropping.

• Edit group pictures one by one.

• [Cropping] is not available for images recorded using the

following functions:

– Video recording, [4K PHOTO], [Post Focus]

– [

] ([Quality])

– [Text Stamp]

[Rotate]

Rotate images manually in 90° steps.

[

]: Rotates 90° clockwise.

[

]: Rotates 90° counter-clockwise.

• For information about how to select images, refer to page

362.

[Video Divide]

Divide a recorded video or 4K burst file into two.

• For details, refer to page 292.

370

13. Menu Guide

[Time Lapse Video]

This creates videos from group images recorded with [Time

Lapse Shot].

Press to select a group images recorded with

[Time Lapse Shot] and then press

Select the options for creating a video to combine the

pictures into a video.

• For details, refer to page 195.

[Stop Motion Video]

This creates videos from group images recorded with [Stop

Motion Animation].

Press to select a group images recorded with

[Stop Motion Animation] and then press

Select the options for creating a video to combine the

pictures into a video.

• For details, refer to page 195.

[Rotate Disp.]

[ON]/[OFF]

Automatically displays pictures vertically if they were

recorded when holding the camera vertically.

[Picture Sort]

[FILE NAME]/

[DATE/TIME]

This sets the order in which the camera displays images

during playback.

[FILE NAME]: Displays images by folder name/file name.

[DATE/TIME]: Displays images by recording date.

• If you insert another card, it may take some time to read

all data, therefore pictures may not be displayed in the

set order.

371

13. Menu Guide

[Delete

Confirmation]

["Yes" first]/

["No" first]

This sets which option, [Yes] or [No], will be highlighted

first when the confirmation screen for deleting an image is

displayed.

["Yes" first]: [Yes] is highlighted first.

["No" first]: [No] is highlighted first.

[Delete All Images]

[Delete All]/[Delete All Non-rating]

Deletes all images in a card.

[Delete All]: Deletes all images in a card.

[Delete All Non-rating]: Deletes all images except those

with a rating set.

• [Delete All] can be used when [Playback Mode] is set to

[Normal Play].

• Images cannot be restored once they have been deleted.

Carefully confirm the images before deletion.

• Depending on the number of images to be deleted, it may

take some time to delete them.

372

13. Menu Guide

Entering Characters

Follow the steps below when the character entry screen is displayed.

Enter characters.

● Press to select characters

and then press

until the

character to enter is displayed.

(Repeat this)

• To repeatedly enter the same character,

rotate

or to the right to move the

entry position cursor.

• If you select an item and press , you can perform the following operations:

– [

]: Change the character type to [A] (upper case characters), [a] (lower

case characters), [1] (numbers), and [&] (special characters)

– [

]: Enter a blank

– [Delete]: Delete a character

– [

]: Move the entry position cursor to the left

– [

]: Move the entry position cursor to the right

Complete entering.

● Select [Set] and then press .

• A maximum of 30 characters can be entered (maximum of 9 characters

when setting names in [Face Recog.]).

• A maximum of 15 characters can be entered for [

], [ ], [ ], [ ] and [ ]

(maximum of 6 characters when setting names in [Face Recog.]).

373

14. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth

This chapter explains the Wi-Fi

and Bluetooth

functions of the camera.

Remote Operations from a Smartphone

You can use the “LUMIX

Sync” for remote recording

and image transfers.

375

Transferring Images from This Camera

Send recorded images to a

device connected via Wi-Fi by

operating the camera.

402

This document refers to both smartphones and tablets as smartphones.



Checking operation of the Wi-Fi and Bluetooth functions

The Bluetooth function is set to on, or there is a connection

(The Wi-Fi icon will be displayed when a function connecting to Wi-Fi is used after

Bluetooth connection, such as [Auto Transfer].)

The Wi-Fi function is set to on, or there is a connection

When image data is sent using a camera operation, [

] is displayed on the monitor.

WIRELESS connection lamp (Blue)

Lit: When the Wi-Fi/Bluetooth function is ON or

connected.

Blinking: When sending picture data.

374

14. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth

• Do not remove the card or battery or move to an area without any reception

while sending images.

• The camera cannot be used to connect to a public wireless LAN connection.

• We strongly recommend that you set an encryption to maintain information

security.

• We recommend that you use a sufficiently charged battery when sending

images.

• When the remaining battery level is low, it may not be possible to connect to

or maintain communication with other devices.

(A message such as [Communication error] is displayed.)

• Images may not be completely sent depending on radio wave conditions. If

the connection is terminated while sending images, images with parts that

cannot be displayed may be sent.

375

14. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth

Connecting to a Smartphone

You can perform remote recording and transfer images using the

smartphone app “Panasonic LUMIX Sync” (hereinafter referred to as

“LUMIX Sync”).

Flow of connecting a smartphone

Install “LUMIX Sync” on your smartphone. (376)

Connect to a smartphone.

Using a smartphone that supports

Bluetooth Low Energy

• Bluetooth connection (377)

Using a smartphone that does not

support Bluetooth Low Energy

• Wi-Fi connection (382)

Operate the camera using the smartphone. (388)

• [Remote shooting] (389)

• [Shutter Remote Control] (391)

• [Import images] (393)

• [Auto Transfer] (395)

• [Location Logging] (397)

• [Remote Wakeup] (398)

• [Auto Clock Set] (399)

• You can also use the camera to transfer images to a smartphone.

(402)

376

14. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth

Installing “LUMIX Sync”

“LUMIX Sync” is an application for smartphones provided by Panasonic.

Supported OS

Android™: Android 5 or higher

iOS: iOS 11 or higher

Connect the smartphone to a network.

(Android) Select “Google Play™ Store”.

(iOS) Select “App Store”.

Enter “Panasonic LUMIX Sync” or “LUMIX” into the

search box.

Select and install the “Panasonic LUMIX Sync” .

• Use the latest version.

• Supported OSs are current as of June 2020 and are subject to change.

• Read the [Help] in the “LUMIX Sync” menu for further details on how to

operate.

• The app may not operate correctly depending on your smartphone.

For information on the “LUMIX Sync”, refer to the following support site:

https://panasonic.jp/support/global/cs/dsc/

(English only)

377

14. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth

Connecting to a Smartphone (Bluetooth Connection)

Follow a simple connection setup procedure (pairing) to connect to a

smartphone that supports Bluetooth Low Energy.

When pairing is set up, the camera also automatically connects to the

smartphone via Wi-Fi.

• For the first-time connection, pairing settings are required.

For information about connecting for the second and subsequent times, refer to

page 380.

• Supported smartphones

Android™: Android 5 or higher with Bluetooth 4.0 or higher

(excluding those that do not support Bluetooth Low Energy)

iOS: iOS 11 or higher

• Turn on the smartphone’s Bluetooth function in advance.

On the smartphone, start up

“LUMIX Sync”.

● A message regarding device

(camera) registration is displayed.

Select [Next].

• If you have closed the message, select

[

], then register the camera using

[Camera registration (pairing)].

Check the content in the displayed guide and select

[Next] until the screen to register the camera is

displayed.

378

14. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth

Operating the camera in accordance with the smartphone guide.

Set the camera to Bluetooth

pairing standby state.

● [ ] [Bluetooth]

[Bluetooth]

[SET] [Pairing]

● The camera enters pairing standby

state and the device name

displayed.

On the smartphone, select the

camera’s device name.

• (iOS devices) When a message to

confirm the change of destination is

displayed, select [Join].

When a message indicating

that device registration is

complete, select [OK].

● A Bluetooth connection between the

camera and the smartphone will be

made.

379

14. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth

• The paired smartphone is registered as a paired device.

• During Bluetooth connection, [

] is displayed in the recording screen.

When the Bluetooth function is enabled, but a connection is not established

with the smartphone, [

] appears translucent.

• Up to 16 smartphones can be registered.

If you try to register more than 16 smartphones, the registration information

will be deleted from the oldest first.



End Bluetooth Connection

To terminate the Bluetooth connection, turn off the Bluetooth function of

the camera.

[ ] [Bluetooth] [Bluetooth] Select [OFF]

• Even if you terminate the connection, the pairing information for it will not

be deleted.

380

14. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth



Connecting to a Paired Smartphone

Connect paired smartphones using the following procedure.

Enable the Bluetooth function of the camera.

• [ ] [Bluetooth] [Bluetooth] [ON]

On the smartphone, start up “LUMIX Sync”.

• If a message is displayed indicating that the smartphone is searching for

cameras, close the message.

Select [ ].

Select [Bluetooth Setup].

Turn Bluetooth ON.

From [Camera registered] items, select

the camera’s device name.

• Even if you set up pairing with more than one smartphone, you can only

connect to one smartphone at a time.

• When pairing takes some time, canceling the pairing settings on both the

smartphone and camera and re-establishing the connection may result in

the camera being detected correctly.

381

14. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth



Canceling Pairing

Cancel the pairing setting of the camera.

• [ ] [Bluetooth] [Bluetooth] [SET] [Delete]

Select the smartphone for which to cancel the pairing.

• Also cancel the pairing setting on the smartphone.

• When [Reset Network Settings] in the [Setup] menu is used to reset the

network settings, the information for registered devices is deleted.

382

14. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth

Connecting to a Smartphone (Wi-Fi connection)

Use Wi-Fi to connect the camera and a smartphone.

With default settings, simple connection with smartphones is possible

without entering a password.

You can also use password authentication for enhanced connection

security.

Set the camera to Wi-Fi

connection standby status.

● [ ] [Wi-Fi] [Wi-Fi

Function]

[New Connection]

[Remote Shooting & View]

● The SSID of the camera is

displayed on the screen.

• You can also perform the same operation

by pressing the Fn button assigned with

[Wi-Fi].

For information about the Fn button, refer

to page 294.

In the setting menu of the

smartphone, turn the Wi-Fi

function ON.

Select the SSID displayed on

the camera.

383

14. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth

On the smartphone, start up

“LUMIX Sync”.

(At the first connection)

Confirm the device name

displayed on the camera and

then select [Yes].

• When a device different than the one you want to connect to is displayed,

the camera will automatically connect to that device if you select [Yes].

If there are other Wi-Fi connection devices nearby, we recommend using

either QR code or manual password input to connect with password

authentication. (384)

384

14. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth



Using Password Authentication to Connect

You can enhance Wi-Fi connection security by using password

authentication through either QR code or manual input.

Scanning QR code to connect

Set [Wi-Fi Password] on the camera to [ON].

• [ ] [Wi-Fi] [Wi-Fi Setup] [Wi-Fi Password] [ON]

Display the QR code .

• [ ] [Wi-Fi] [Wi-Fi Function]

[New Connection] [Remote Shooting

& View]

• You can also perform the same operation

by pressing the Fn button assigned with

[Wi-Fi].

For information about the Fn button, refer

to page 294.

• Press

to enlarge the QR code.

On the smartphone, start up “LUMIX Sync”.

• If a message is displayed indicating that the smartphone is searching for

cameras, close the message.

Select [ ].

Select [Wi-Fi connection].

Select [QR code].

Scan the QR code displayed on the screen of the camera using “LUMIX

Sync”.

• (iOS devices) When a message to confirm the change of destination is

displayed, select [Join].

385

14. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth

Manually entering a password to connect

Display the screen in Step on page 384.

In the setting menu of the smartphone,

turn the Wi-Fi function ON.

On the Wi-Fi setup screen, select the

SSID

displayed on the camera.

(At the first connection)

Enter the password

displayed on the

camera.

On the smartphone, start up “LUMIX

Sync”.

386

14. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth



Connection Methods Other Than the Default Settings

When connecting with [Via Network], or [WPS Connection] in [Direct],

follow the steps below:

Display the connection method setting screen for the camera.

• [ ] [Wi-Fi] [Wi-Fi Function] [New Connection] [Remote

Shooting & View]

Press [DISP.].

Connecting via network

Select [Via Network] and then press .

• Follow the connection method on page 420 to connect the camera to a wireless

access point.

In the setting menu of the smartphone, turn the Wi-Fi function ON.

Connect the smartphone to the wireless access point that the camera is

connected to.

On the smartphone, start up “LUMIX Sync”.

Connecting directly

Select [Direct] and then press .

• Select [WPS Connection], and follow the connection method on page 423 to

connect the camera to a smartphone.

On the smartphone, start up “LUMIX Sync”.

387

14. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth

Terminating the Wi-Fi Connection

To end the Wi-Fi connection between the camera and smartphone, follow

the steps below.

Set the camera to recording

mode.

● Press the shutter button halfway.

Terminate the Wi-Fi

connection.

● [ ] [Wi-Fi]

[Wi-Fi Function]

[Yes]

• You can also perform the same operation

by pressing the Fn button assigned with

[Wi-Fi].

For information about the Fn button, refer

to page 294.

On the smartphone, close the “LUMIX Sync”.

388

14. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth

Operating the Camera with a

Smartphone

This explains the functions for operating the camera from a smartphone.

Functions described in this document with the (

) symbol require

a smartphone that supports Bluetooth Low Energy.

Getting started:

• Connect the camera to a smartphone. (377, 382)

• On the smartphone, start up “LUMIX Sync”.



Home Screen

When you start up “LUMIX Sync”, the home screen is displayed.

App settings

(380, 384, 398)

This allows connection

settings, camera power

operations, and displays

Help.

[Import images] (393)

[Remote shooting]

(389)

[Shutter Remote Control]

(391)

389

14. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth

[Remote shooting]

You can use the smartphone to record from a remote location while

viewing the live view images from the camera.

Select [ ] ([Remote shooting]) in the home screen.

• (iOS devices) When a message to confirm the change of destination is

displayed, select [Join].

Start recording.

Takes a picture

Starts/ends the video recording

• The recorded image is saved on the

camera.

• Certain features, including some settings, may not be available.

390

14. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth



Operation Method During Remote Recording

Set either the camera or the smartphone as the priority control device to

be used during remote recording.

[ ] [Wi-Fi] [Wi-Fi Setup] Select [Priority of Remote Device]

[Camera]

Operation is possible on both the camera and the

smartphone.

• The camera’s dial settings, etc. cannot be changed with

the smartphone.

[Smartphone]

Operation is possible only on the smartphone.

• The camera’s dial settings, etc. can be changed with the

smartphone.

• To end remote recording, press any of the buttons on the

camera to turn on the screen, and select [End].

• The default setting is [Camera].

• The setting of this function cannot be changed while the connection is

active.

391

14. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth

[Shutter Remote Control]

You can use the smartphone as a remote control for the shutter.

Select [ ] ([Shutter Remote Control]) in the home

screen.

Start recording.

Starts/ends the video recording

Takes a picture

• Bulb recording (391)



Bulb Recording

The shutter can be kept open from the start to end of recording, which is

useful for recording of starry skies or night scenery.

Getting started:

• Set the camera to [

] mode. (100)

• Set the camera shutter speed to [T] (Time). (102)

Touch [ ] to start recording (keep touching, without removing your

finger).

Remove your finger from [ ] to end recording.

• Slide [ ] in the direction of [LOCK] to record with the shutter button locked in

a fully-pressed state.

(Slide [

] back to its original position or press the camera shutter button to

end recording)

• During [B] (Bulb) recording, if the Bluetooth connection is broken, then carry out

Bluetooth connection again, then end recording from the smartphone.

392

14. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth



Shortening the Return Time from [Sleep Mode]

You can shorten the time it takes for the camera to return from [Sleep

Mode] when the [Shutter Remote Control] is used.

Getting started:

• Set [Remote Wakeup] in [Bluetooth] to [ON]. (398)

[ ] [Bluetooth] Select [Returning from Sleep Mode]

[Import / Remote

Priority]

Shortens the time to return when using [Import

images] or [Remote shooting].

[Shutter Remote

Priority]

Shortens the time to return when using [Shutter

Remote Control].

• To use the [Shutter Remote Control] to cancel [Sleep Mode] on the camera,

set [Bluetooth] in the [Setup] menu as follows, then connect via Bluetooth:

– [Remote Wakeup]: [ON] (398)

– [Auto Transfer]: [OFF] (395)

• The camera cannot be turned on by using [Shutter Remote Control].

393

14. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth

[Import images]

Transfer an image stored on the card to the smartphone connected via

Wi-Fi.

Select [ ] ([Import images]) in the home screen.

• (iOS devices) When a message to confirm the change of destination is

displayed, select [Join].

Select the image to transfer.

Transfer the image.

● Select [ ].

• If the image is a video, you can play it

back by touching [

] at the center of

the screen.

394

14. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth

• When a video is played back, this has a small data size and is transmitted

using “LUMIX Sync”, therefore its image quality will differ from that of the

actual video recording.

Depending on the smartphone and on the usage conditions, the image

quality may deteriorate or the sound may skip during video or picture

playback.

• Files larger than 4 GB cannot be sent.

• Images recorded using the following functions cannot be transferred:

– [4K PHOTO], [Post Focus]

395

14. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth

[Auto Transfer]

You can automatically transfer recorded pictures to a smartphone as they

are taken.

Enable [Auto Transfer] on the

camera.

● [ ] [Bluetooth] [Auto

Transfer]

[ON]

• If a confirmation screen is displayed

on the camera asking you to terminate

the Wi-Fi connection, select [Yes] to

terminate it.

On the smartphone, select [Yes] (for Android devices) or

[Join] (for iOS devices).

• The camera automatically makes a Wi-Fi connection.

Check the send settings on the

camera and then press

• To change the send setting, press [DISP.].

(426)

• The camera will enter a mode where it

can automatically transfer images and

[

] will be displayed on the recording

screen.

Record with the camera.

• [ ] is displayed in the recording screen of the camera while a file is being

sent.

396

14. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth



To Stop the Automatic Transfer of Images

[ ] [Bluetooth] [Auto Transfer] Select [OFF]

● A confirmation screen is displayed, asking you to terminate the Wi-Fi

connection.

• If the [Bluetooth] and [Auto Transfer] settings of the camera are [ON], the

camera automatically connects to the smartphone via Bluetooth and Wi-Fi

when you turn on the camera.

Start up the “LUMIX Sync” on the smartphone to connect to the camera.

• When [Auto Transfer] is set to [ON], [Wi-Fi Function] cannot be used.

• If the camera is turned off during image transfer, and the file sending is

interrupted, then turn on the camera to restart the sending.

– If the storage status of unsent files changes, then sending of files may no

longer be possible.

– If there are many unsent files, then sending of all files may not be

possible.

• Images recorded with the following functions cannot be transferred

automatically:

– Video recording, [4K PHOTO], [Post Focus]

397

14. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth

[Location Logging]

The smartphone sends its location information to the camera via

Bluetooth, and the camera performs recording while writing the acquired

location information.

Getting started:

• Enable the GPS function on the smartphone.

Enable [Location Logging] on

the camera.

● [ ] [Bluetooth] [Location

Logging]

[ON]

• The camera will enter a mode where

location information can be recorded

and [

] is displayed in the recording

screen of the camera.

Record images with the camera.

• Location information will be written to the recorded images.

• When [ ] on the recording screen appears translucent, location

information cannot be acquired, therefore data cannot be written.

Smartphone GPS positioning may not be possible if the smartphone is

within a building, a bag, or similar. Move the smartphone to a position

affording a wide view of the sky to improve positioning performance.

In addition, refer to the operating instructions of your smartphone.

• Images with location information are indicated with [

• Be sure to pay special attention to the privacy, the likeness rights, etc. of the

subject when you use this function. Use at your own risk.

• The smartphone drains its battery faster while acquiring location information.

398

14. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth

[Remote Wakeup]

Even when the camera is turned off, the smartphone can be used to start

the camera and record images, or check the recorded images.

Getting started:

Enable [Remote Wakeup] on the camera.

• [ ] [Bluetooth] [Remote Wakeup] [ON]

Set the camera on/off switch to [OFF].

On the smartphone, start up “LUMIX Sync”.



Turning On the Camera

Select [Remote shooting] in the “LUMIX Sync” home screen.

• (iOS devices) When a message to confirm the change of destination is displayed,

select [Join].

• The camera turns on, and automatically connects using Wi-Fi.



Turning Off the Camera

Select [ ] in the “LUMIX Sync” home screen.

Select [Turn off the camera].

Select [Power OFF].

• When [Remote Wakeup] has been set, the Bluetooth function continues

to work even if the camera on/off switch is set to [OFF], so the battery will

drain.

399

14. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth

[Auto Clock Set]

Synchronize the clock and the time zone setting of the camera with those

of a smartphone.

Enable [Auto Clock Set] on the

camera.

● [ ] [Bluetooth]

[Auto Clock Set]

[ON]

400

14. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth

Displaying still pictures on a TV

You can display still pictures on a TV that is compatible with a DLNA

(DMR) function.

Select [Playback on TV].

● [ ] [Wi-Fi] [Wi-Fi

Function]

[New Connection]

[Playback on TV]

Connect the camera to the TV

via Wi-Fi.

● Select [Via Network] (420) or

[Direct] (423) to connect.

Select the device you wish to connect to.

Take or play back still pictures on this unit.

● To end the connection, follow the steps below:

[ ] [Wi-Fi] [Wi-Fi Function] [Yes]

401

14. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth

• When you display the pictures on a TV using the Wi-Fi function, they are not

output using 4K resolution. To output pictures using 4K resolution, connect

this unit to the TV using an HDMI micro cable. (436)

• When a TV is connected to this unit, the TV screen may temporarily return

to the status before the connection. Pictures are displayed again when you

take or play back pictures.

• Even if [Effect] and [Sound] are set on this unit, these settings are disabled

when the pictures are played back on a TV during Slide Show playback.

• Video and 4K burst files cannot be played back.

• The pictures displayed on “Multi Playback” screen or some screens of the

camera are not displayed on the TV.

• When [Auto Transfer] in the [Bluetooth] is set to [ON], [Wi-Fi Function] is

disabled.

402

14. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth

Sending Images from the Camera

Operate the camera to send recorded images to a device connected by

Wi-Fi.

Operation flow

Select the sending method.

Select the sending method from the [Send Images

While Recording] and [Send Images Stored in the

Camera] camera menus.

Select the destination (type of the

destination device).

– [Smartphone] (406)

– [PC] (409)

– [Printer] (412)

– [AV device] (414)

– [Web service] (416)

– [Cloud Sync. Service] (418)

Select the connection method and then

connect by Wi-Fi.

– [Via Network] (420)

– [Direct] (423)

Check the send settings.

– Image send settings (426)

[Send Images While Recording]

[Send Images Stored in the

Camera]

Take pictures.

This automatically sends the

recorded pictures as they are taken.

Select an image.

Send the selected images.

403

14. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth

Refer to the following pages for the steps common to all devices.

– Wi-Fi connections: [Via Network] (420)/[Direct] (423)

– Image send settings (426)

– Selecting images (428)

• When recording, recording is prioritized so it will take time for sending to

complete.

• If the camera is turned off, or the Wi-Fi is disconnected before sending is

completed, then sending will not restart.

• You may not be able to delete files or use the [Playback] menu while

sending.

• The camera is disconnected from Wi-Fi during [Time Lapse Shot] recording.

• When [Auto Transfer] in [Bluetooth] is set to [ON], [Wi-Fi Function] is not

available.

404

14. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth



Images That Can be Sent

Images that can be sent differ depending on the destination device.

Destination device

Images that can be sent

[Send Images While

Recording]

[Send Images Stored in

the Camera]

[Smartphone] (406)

JPEG/RAW JPEG/RAW/MP4

[PC] (409)

JPEG/RAW

JPEG/RAW/MP4/

4K burst files/

Post-Focus images

[Cloud Sync. Service]

(418)

JPEG JPEG/MP4

[Web service] (416)

JPEG/RAW

JPEG/MP4/RAW

[AV device] (414)

JPEG JPEG

[Printer] (412)

— JPEG

1 Files larger than 4 GB cannot be sent.

2 Sending is possible when the destination web service supports the sending of

RAW images from this camera.

• You will need an Android with an operating system of 7.0 or higher to send/save

RAW images to an Android device. The pictures, however, may not be displayed

correctly on some smartphones or some versions of operating systems.

• 4K videos cannot be sent to [Cloud Sync. Service], and [Web service].

• Sending may not be possible depending on your device.

• It may not be possible to send images recorded with devices other than this

camera, or images edited or processed on a PC.

405

14. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth



Fn Button Assigned with [Wi-Fi]

You can perform the following operations by pressing the Fn button

assigned with [Wi-Fi] after connecting to Wi-Fi.

For information on Fn buttons, refer to page 294.

[Terminate the

Connection]

Terminates the Wi-Fi connection.

[Change the Destination]

Terminates the Wi-Fi connection, and allows you to

select a different Wi-Fi connection.

[Change Settings for

Sending Images]

Sets the image size, file format, and other items for

sending recorded images. (426)

[Register the Current

Destination to Favorite]

Registers the current connection destination or

method so that you can easily connect with the same

connection settings next time.

[Network Address]

Displays the MAC address and IP address of the

camera. (430)

• Depending on the Wi-Fi function being used or the connection destination, you may

not be able to perform some of these operations.

406

14. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth

[Smartphone]

Transfer recorded images to a smartphone connected using Wi-Fi.

Getting started:

• Install “LUMIX Sync” on your smartphone. (376)

Select the method for sending

the images on the camera.

● [ ] [Wi-Fi]

[Wi-Fi Function]

[New

Connection]

[Send Images While

Recording]/[Send Images Stored in

the Camera]

Set the destination to

[Smartphone].

Connect the camera to a

smartphone by Wi-Fi.

● Select [Via Network] (420) or

[Direct] (423), and then connect.

On the smartphone, start up “LUMIX Sync”.

Select the destination smartphone on the camera.

407

14. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth

Check the send settings and then press .

• To change the send settings of images, press [DISP.]. (426)

When [Send Images While Recording] is selected:

Take pictures.

• [ ] is displayed in the recording screen of the camera while a file is being

sent.

• To end the connection, follow the steps below:

[ ] [Wi-Fi] [Wi-Fi Function] [Yes]

When [Send Images Stored in the Camera] is selected:

Select an image.

• To end the connection, select [Exit].

408

14. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth



Sending Images on the Camera to a Smartphone with

Simple Operations

You can transfer pictures to a smartphone connected by Bluetooth just by

pressing [

] ([Send Image (Smartphone)]) button during playback.

You can also use the menu to connect easily.

• Use the Fn button registered with [Send Image (Smartphone)] to operate. In default

settings, this is registered in [Fn4].

For information about the Fn button, refer to page 294.

Getting started:

• Install “LUMIX Sync” on your smartphone. (376)

• Connect the camera to a smartphone by Bluetooth. (377)

• Press [

] on the camera to display the playback screen.

Send a single image

Press to select the image.

Press [ ].

Select [Single Select].

• To change the send settings of

images, press [DISP.]. (426)

On the smartphone, select [Yes]

(for Android devices) or [Join]

(for iOS devices).

• This connects automatically using

Wi-Fi.

Send multiple images

Press [ ].

Select [Multi Select].

• To change the send settings of

images, press [DISP.]. (426)

Select the images and then

transfer.

: Select images

: Set/Cancel

[DISP.]: Transfer

On the smartphone, select [Yes]

(for Android devices) or [Join]

(for iOS devices).

• This connects automatically using

Wi-Fi.

409

14. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth

Using the menu to transfer easily

[ ] [Bluetooth] [Send Image (Smartphone)]

Settings: [Single Select]/[Multi Select]

• If [Single Select], press to select the image and then press to execute.

• If [Multi Select], use the same operation as with “Send multiple images”.

• This function is not available when [Auto Transfer] in [Bluetooth] is set to

[ON].

[PC]

Send recorded images to the PC connected with Wi-Fi.

Supported OS

Windows: Windows 10/Windows 8.1/Windows 8

Mac: OS X v10.5 to v10.11, macOS 10.12 to macOS 10.15

Getting started:

• If the workgroup of the destination PC has been changed from the standard setting,

change the corresponding setting of the camera in [PC Connection]. (429)



Create a Destination Folder for Images

When using Windows (Example for Windows 10)

Select the destination folder and then right-click.

Select [Properties] and then enable folder sharing.

• You can also use “PHOTOfunSTUDIO” to create folders.

For details, refer to the operating instructions for “PHOTOfunSTUDIO”.

410

14. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth

When using Mac (Example for OS X v10.14)

Select the destination folder and then click the items in the following

order.

[File]

[Get Info]

Enable folder sharing.

• Create a PC account name (up to 254 characters) and password (up to

32 characters) consisting of alphanumeric characters.

A destination folder may not be created if the account name includes non-

alphanumeric characters.

• When the computer name (NetBIOS name for Mac) contains a space (blank

character), etc., it may not be recognized.

In that case, we recommend changing the name to one consisting only of

15 or less alphanumeric characters.

• Refer to the operating instructions for your PC or Help on the OS for

detailed setting procedures.

Select the method for sending

images on the camera.

● [ ] [Wi-Fi]

[Wi-Fi Function]

[New

Connection]

[Send Images While

Recording]/[Send Images Stored in

the Camera]

Set the destination to [PC].

411

14. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth

Connect the camera and PC by

Wi-Fi.

● Select [Via Network] (420) or

[Direct] (423), and then connect.

Enter the computer name

of the PC name you want

to connect to (for Mac, the

NetBIOS name).

Select a folder for storing

images.

• Folders sorted by sent date will be

created in the selected folder, and images

will be saved there.

Check the send settings and then press .

• To change the send setting, press [DISP.]. (426)

412

14. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth

When [Send Images While Recording] is selected:

Take pictures.

• [ ] is displayed in the recording screen of the camera while a file is being

sent.

• To end the connection, follow the steps below:

[ ] [Wi-Fi] [Wi-Fi Function] [Yes]

When [Send Images Stored in the Camera] is selected:

Select an image.

• To end the connection, select [Exit].

• If the screen for a user account and password entry appears, enter the one

you set on your PC.

• When the firewall of the OS, security software, etc. is enabled, connecting to

the PC may not be possible.

[Printer]

You can send images to a PictBridge (wireless LAN)

-supported printer

connected by Wi-Fi for printing.

1 DPS over IP standard-compliant

Select the method for sending

images on the camera.

● [ ] [Wi-Fi]

[Wi-Fi Function]

[New

Connection]

[Send Images Stored

in the Camera]

413

14. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth

Set the destination to [Printer].

Connect the camera to a

printer by Wi-Fi.

● Select [Via Network] (420) or

[Direct] (423), and then connect.

Select the destination printer.

Select and print images.

• The procedure for selecting images is the same as the one for when the USB

connection cable is connected. (446)

• To terminate the connection, press [

• For details about PictBridge (wireless LAN-compatible) printers, contact

their manufacturers.

• When [Auto Transfer] in [Bluetooth] is set to [ON], [Wi-Fi Function] is not

available.

414

14. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth

[AV device]

Still pictures and video can be sent to AV devices in the home (home AV

devices), such as DLNA compatible recorders.

Home AV device

Wireless access point

Select the method for sending

images on the camera.

● [ ] [Wi-Fi]

[Wi-Fi Function]

[New

Connection]

[Send Images While

Recording]/[Send Images Stored in

the Camera]

Set the destination to [AV

device].

Connect the camera and PC by

Wi-Fi.

● Select [Via Network] (420) or

[Direct] (423), and then connect.

Select the device you wish to connect to.

415

14. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth

Check the send settings, and select [Set].

• To change the send setting, press the [DISP.]. (426)

When [Send Images While Recording] is selected:

Take pictures.

• [ ] is displayed in the recording screen of the camera while a file is being

sent.

• To end the connection, follow the steps below:

[ ] [Wi-Fi] [Wi-Fi Function] [Yes]

When [Send Images Stored in the Camera] is selected:

Select an image.

• To end the connection, select [Exit].

• Sending may fail depending on the operational status of the AV device. Also,

sending may take a while.

• When [Auto Transfer] in the [Bluetooth] is set to [ON], [Wi-Fi Function] is

disabled.

416

14. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth

[Web service]

You can use “LUMIX CLUB” to upload recorded images to web services

such as social networking sites.

Getting started:

• Register with “LUMIX CLUB”. (430)

• Before sending images to a service, register that web service. (432)

Select the method for sending

images on the camera.

● [ ] [Wi-Fi]

[Wi-Fi Function]

[New

Connection]

[Send Images While

Recording]/[Send Images Stored in

the Camera]

Set the destination to [Web

service].

Connect to the web service.

● Select [Via Network] and then

connect. (420)

Select the web service.

Check the send settings and

then press

• To change the send settings of images,

press [DISP.]. (426)

417

14. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth

When [Send Images While Recording] is selected:

Take pictures.

• [ ] is displayed in the recording screen of the camera while a file is being

sent.

• To end the connection, follow the steps below:

[ ] [Wi-Fi] [Wi-Fi Function] [Yes]

When [Send Images Stored in the Camera] is selected:

Select an image.

• To end the connection, select [Exit].

• If image sending fails, a report email outlining the failure will be sent to the

email address registered in the “LUMIX CLUB”.

• Panasonic assumes no responsibility for any damages resulting from the

leakage, loss, etc. of images uploaded on web services.

• When uploading images to a web service, do not delete images from the

camera, even after they have finished sending, until you have checked that

they have been properly uploaded to the web service.

Panasonic assumes no responsibility for any damages resulting from the

deletion of images stored on the camera.

• Images may contain information that can be used to identify the user, such

as recording dates and times, and location information. Check carefully

when uploading the images to a web service.

418

14. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth

[Cloud Sync. Service]

This camera can automatically transfer recorded images to a cloud sync

service via “LUMIX CLUB” to send them to a PC or smartphone.

To use [Cloud Sync. Service] (As of June 2020)

• You need to register to the “LUMIX CLUB” (430) and set up cloud

synchronization to send images to a cloud folder.

To set up cloud synchronization, use “PHOTOfunSTUDIO”.

• Sent images are temporarily saved in the cloud folder. These can be

synchronized with your PC, smartphone, and other devices.

• A cloud folder stores sent images for 30 days (up to 1000 images).

Please note that the images will be deleted automatically in the following

cases:

– If 30 days have passed after sending (even if within 30 days of the

transfer, if images have been downloaded to all specified devices, then

these may be deleted)

– If there are in excess of 1000 images (depending on the [Cloud Limit]

(427) setting)

Select the method for sending

images on the camera.

● [ ] [Wi-Fi]

[Wi-Fi Function]

[New

Connection]

[Send Images While

Recording]/[Send Images Stored in

the Camera]

Set the destination to [Cloud

Sync. Service].

419

14. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth

Connect to the cloud sync

service.

● Select [Via Network] and then

connect. (420)

Check the send settings and then press .

• To change the send settings of images, press [DISP.]. (426)

When [Send Images While Recording] is selected:

Take pictures.

• [ ] is displayed in the recording screen of the camera while a file is being

sent.

• To end the connection, follow the steps below:

[ ] [Wi-Fi] [Wi-Fi Function] [Yes]

When [Send Images Stored in the Camera] is selected:

Select one or more images.

• To end the connection, select [Exit].

420

14. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth

Wi-Fi Connections

When [New Connection] has been

selected in [Wi-Fi Function] in [Wi-Fi] of

the [Setup] menu, select the connection

method from either [Via Network] or

[Direct] to connect.

On the other hand, when you use [Select

a destination from History] or [Select a

destination from Favorite], the camera

connects to the selected device with the

previously-used settings.

[Via Network]

Connect the camera and destination device through the wireless access

point.

Select the method for connecting

to a wireless access point.

Settings: [WPS (Push-Button)]/[WPS (PIN

code)]/[From List] (421)

• After selecting [Via Network] once, the camera will connect to the

previously-used wireless access point.

To change the wireless access point used for connection, press [DISP.] and

change the connection destination.

• Check the operating instructions and settings of the wireless access point.

421

14. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth



[WPS (Push-Button)]

Press the WPS button on the wireless access

point to set up a connection.

Press the wireless access point WPS button

until it switches to WPS mode.

Example)



[WPS (PIN code)]

Enter a PIN code into the wireless access point to set up a connection.

On the camera screen, select the wireless access point you are

connecting to.

Enter the PIN code displayed on the camera screen into the wireless

access point.

Press of the camera.

422

14. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth



[From List]

Searches for a wireless access point to use, and connects to this.

• Confirm the encryption key of the wireless access point.

Select the wireless access point you

are connecting to.

• Press [DISP.] to run a wireless access point

search again.

• If no wireless access point is found, refer to

“Connecting by Manual Input” on page 422.

(If network authentication is encrypted)

Enter the encryption key.



Connecting by Manual Input

• Check the SSID, network authentication, encryption, and encryption key of

the wireless access point you are using.

In the screen in Step of “[From List]”, select [Manual Input]. (422)

Enter the SSID of the wireless access point you are connecting to, and

then select [Set].

Select the network authentication.

[WPA2-PSK]

Supported encryption: [TKIP], [AES]

[WPA2/WPA-PSK]

[No Encryption] —

(When other than [No Encryption] is selected)

Enter the encryption key and then select [Set].

423

14. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth

[Direct]

Directly connect the camera and the destination device.

Select the method for connecting

with the destination device.

[WPS

Connection]

[WPS (Push-

Button)]

Press the WPS button on the destination

device to connect.

• On the camera, press [DISP.] to extend

the connection wait time.

[WPS (PIN code)]

Enter the PIN code into the camera, and

connect.

[Manual

Connection]

Search for the camera on the destination device to connect.

Enter the SSID and password displayed on the camera into the

device.

• If the destination is set to [Smartphone],

the password is not displayed. Select the

SSID to establish a connection. (382)

• Please also refer to the operating instructions for the device to be

connected.

424

14. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth

Connect to Wi-Fi Using Previously Saved Settings

Use the Wi-Fi connection history to connect using the same settings as

previously.

Display the Wi-Fi connection

history.

● [ ] [Wi-Fi]

[Wi-Fi Function]

[Select a

destination from History]/[Select a

destination from Favorite]

Select the History item to

connect to.

• Press [DISP.] to confirm details of the

connection history.



You can register the Wi-Fi connection history to Favorite.

Display the Wi-Fi connection history.

• [ ] [Wi-Fi] [Wi-Fi Function] [Select a destination from History]

Select the History item to register and then press .

Enter a registration name and then select [Set].

• A maximum of 30 characters can be entered. A two-byte character is treated as

two characters.

425

14. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth



Editing Items Registered in Favorite

Display items registered to Favorite.

• [ ] [Wi-Fi] [Wi-Fi Function] [Select a destination from Favorite]

Select the History item to edit in Favorite and then press .

[Remove from Favorite] —

[Change the Order in

Favorite]

Specify the destination location of the desired item

to change the display order.

[Change the Registered

Name]

Enter characters to change the registered name.

• The number of items that can be saved in History is limited. Register

frequently-used connection settings to Favorite.

• When [Reset] in the [Setup] menu is used to reset the network settings, the

content registered in History and Favorite is deleted.

• If the device you want to connect to (smartphone, etc.) is connected to a

wireless access point other than the camera, you cannot connect the device

to the camera using [Direct].

Change the Wi-Fi settings of the device you want to connect to so that the

access point to be used is set to the camera. You can also select [New

Connection] and reconnect the devices. (382)

• It may be difficult to connect to networks to which many devices are

connected. In these cases, connect using [New Connection].

426

14. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth

Send Settings and Selecting Images

Image Send Settings

Set the size, file format, and other items for sending the image to the

destination device.

After Wi-Fi connection, the

send settings confirmation

screen will be displayed, so

press [DISP.].

Change the send settings.

427

14. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth

[Size]

Resize the image to send.

[Original]/[Auto]/[Change] ([M], [S], or [VGA])

• The [Auto] image size changes depending on the

status of the destination device.

(This can be set when the destination is [Web

service])

[File Format]

Sets the file format of images to send.

[JPG]/[RAW+JPG]/[RAW]

• This setting is possible when the destination supports

the sending of RAW images from this camera.

(404)

[Delete Location Data]

Select whether to delete the location information from

images before sending them.

• This can be set when the destination is [Cloud Sync.

Service] or [Web service].

• This operation only deletes the location information

from the images that are set to be sent.

[Cloud Limit]

You can select whether to send images when the cloud

folder runs out of free space.

[ON]: Does not send images.

[OFF]: Deletes images from the oldest ones, then

sends new images.

• This can be set when the destination is [Cloud Sync.

Service].

428

14. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth

Selecting Images

When sending by [Send Images Stored in the Camera], select the images

using the following procedure.

Select [Single Select] or [Multi Select].

Select the image.

[Single Select] setting

Press to select an image.

SetSet

Press .

[Multi Select] setting

Press to select an image and

then press

. (Repeat this)

• To cancel the setting, press again.

2 3

4 5 6

OKOK

Press [DISP.] to execute.

429

14. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth

[Wi-Fi Setup] Menu

This configures the settings required for the Wi-Fi function.

The settings cannot be changed when connected to Wi-Fi.

Displaying the [Wi-Fi Setup] menu.

● [ ] [Wi-Fi] [Wi-Fi Setup]

[Priority of Remote

Device]

This sets either the camera or the smartphone as

the priority control device to be used during remote

recording. (390)

[Wi-Fi Password]

You can use a password to connect for enhanced

security. (384)

[LUMIX CLUB]

This acquires or changes the “LUMIX CLUB” login ID.

(431)

[PC Connection]

You can set the workgroup.

To send images to a PC, you need to connect to the

same workgroup as the destination PC.

(The default setting is “WORKGROUP”.)

• To change the workgroup name, press

and enter

the new workgroup name.

• To return to the default settings, press [DISP.].

[Device Name]

You can change the name (SSID) of the camera.

• To change the SSID name, press [DISP.] and enter the

new SSID name.

• A maximum of 32 characters can be entered.

430

14. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth

[Wi-Fi Function Lock]

To prevent incorrect operation and use of the Wi-

Fi function by a third party and to protect personal

information in the camera and included with images,

protect the Wi-Fi function with a password.

[Setup]: Enter any 4-digit numbers as the password.

[Cancel]: Cancel the password.

• Once a password is set, you are required to enter it

each time you use the Wi-Fi function.

• If you forget your password, you can use [Reset

Network Settings] in the [Setup] menu to reset the

network settings and thereby reset the password.

[Network Address]

Displays the MAC address and IP address of the

camera.

“LUMIX CLUB”

Refer to the “LUMIX CLUB” site for details.

https://lumixclub.panasonic.net/eng/c/

• The service may be suspended due to regular maintenance or unexpected

troubles, and the service contents may be changed or added, without prior

notice to the users.

The service may also be stopped in whole or in part with a reasonable

period of advance notice.

431

14. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth



Acquire a New Login ID from the Camera

From the camera menu, acquire a “LUMIX CLUB” login ID.

Follow the menu path.

• [ ] [Wi-Fi] [Wi-Fi Setup]

[LUMIX CLUB]

[Set/Add Account]

[New account]

• Connect to the network.

Proceed to the next page by selecting

[Next].

Select and set the method for connecting to a wireless access point,

and set. (420)

• Except for the first-time connection, the camera will connect to the previously-

used wireless access point.

To change the connection destination, press [DISP.].

• Proceed to the next page by selecting [Next].

Read through the “LUMIX CLUB” terms of use and then select [Agree].

• Switch pages:

• Zoom: Rotate to the right (to restore: rotate to the left)

• Move the enlarged area:

• Cancel without registering: [ ]

Enter a password.

• Enter any combination of 8 to 16 characters and numbers for the password.

Check the login ID and then select [OK].

• Be sure to make a note of the login ID and

password.

• The login ID (12-digit number) will be

displayed automatically.

432

14. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth



• Confirm web services supported by “LUMIX CLUB” in “FAQ/Contact us” at

the following site:

https://lumixclub.panasonic.net/eng/c/lumix_faqs/

Getting started:

• Make sure that you have created an account on the web service you want to use,

and have the login information available.

Connect to the “LUMIX CLUB” site using a smartphone or PC.

https://lumixclub.panasonic.net/eng/c/

Enter your “LUMIX CLUB” login ID and password to log in.

• If you have not registered your email address to the “LUMIX CLUB” yet, please

Select and register the web service you want to use for web service link

settings.

• Follow the on-screen instructions to perform the registration.



Confirm/Change Login ID or Password

Getting started:

• When using the acquired login ID, check the ID and password.

• Access the “LUMIX CLUB” site from your PC to change the password.

Follow the menu path.

• [ ] [Wi-Fi] [Wi-Fi Setup]

[LUMIX CLUB]

[Set/Add Account] [Set

• The login ID and password are displayed.

• The password is displayed as “

”.

Select the item to change.

Enter the login ID or password.

Select [Exit].

433

14. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth



Checking the “LUMIX CLUB” Terms of Use

Check the details if the terms of use have been updated, for example.

[ ] [Wi-Fi] [Wi-Fi Setup] [LUMIX CLUB] Select [Terms of

use]



Deleting Your Login ID and Closing Your “LUMIX CLUB”

Account

Delete the login ID from the camera when transferring it to another party

or disposing of it.

You can also close your “LUMIX CLUB” account.

• You can only change or delete the login ID acquired with the camera.

Follow the menu path.

• [ ] [Wi-Fi] [Wi-Fi Setup] [LUMIX CLUB] [Delete account]

• A message is displayed. Select [Next].

Select [Yes] on the login ID delete confirmation screen.

• A message is displayed. Select [Next].

Select [Yes] on the confirmation screen asking whether to close the

“LUMIX CLUB” account.

• A message is displayed. Select [Next].

• To continue without closing the account, select [No] to delete only the login ID.

Select [OK].

434

15. Connecting to Other Devices

This chapter describes connections with other devices, such as TVs and

PCs.

[HDMI] socket

Connect the camera and TV with a commercially available HDMI micro

cable.

• Use a “High Speed HDMI micro cable” with the HDMI logo.

Cables that do not comply with the HDMI standards will not work.

“High Speed HDMI micro cable” (Type D - Type A plug, up to 2 m (6.6 feet) long)

435

15. Connecting to Other Devices

[USB/CHARGE] socket

Use a USB connection cable to connect the camera to a PC, recorder, or

printer.

• Do not use any other USB connection cables except the supplied one.

• Check the direction of the terminals and plug in/out straight holding onto the

plug. (Inserting these at an angle may cause deformation or malfunction)

• Do not connect the cable to the wrong terminals. This may cause a

malfunction.

436

15. Connecting to Other Devices

Viewing on a TV

You can connect the camera to a TV to view recorded pictures and videos

on the TV.

Getting started:

• Turn off the camera and TV.

Connect the camera and TV with a commercially

available HDMI micro cable. (434)

Turn on the TV.

Switch the TV input to HDMI input.

Turn on the camera.

Display the playback screen.

● Press [ ].

● The recorded images are displayed

on the TV. (The monitor and

viewfinder of the camera will turn

off.)

437

15. Connecting to Other Devices

• With the default settings, pictures are output at the optimal resolution for the

connected TV.

The output resolution can be changed in [HDMI Mode (Play)]. (359)

• To play back 24p videos, set [HDMI Mode (Play)] to [AUTO]. Otherwise, the

picture is not output at 24 frames per second.

• Depending on the aspect ratio, gray bands may be displayed on the top and

bottom or the left and right of images.

• Wi-Fi connection is not available while using the HDMI output.

• Some of setting screens are not output through the HDMI connection.

• HDMI output will be canceled if a USB connection cable is connected

simultaneously.

• Change the screen mode on your TV if images are displayed with the top or

bottom cut off.

• Depending on the connected TV, 4K burst files may not be played back

correctly.

• Please also refer to the operating instructions for the TV.



Using VIERA Link

VIERA Link (HDAVI Control™) is a function that allows you to use your

remote control for the Panasonic TV for easy operations when the camera

has been connected to a VIERA Link compatible device using an HDMI

micro cable for automatic linked operations.

(Not all operations are possible.)

• To use VIERA Link, you need to also configure the settings on the TV.

For the setting procedure, refer to the operating instructions for the TV.

438

15. Connecting to Other Devices

Connect the camera to a Panasonic TV compatible with VIERA Link

using a commercially available HDMI micro cable. (434)

Turn on the camera.

Turn on the VIERA Link.

• [ ] [TV Connection] [VIERA Link] [ON]

Display the playback screen.

• Press [ ].

Operate with the remote control for the TV.

Power off link

If you turn off the TV with its remote control, the camera will also turn off.

Automatic input switching

If you turn on the camera and then press [ ], the input of the TV automatically

switches to input to which this camera is connected.

Furthermore, when the TV power is in the standby state, it turns on automatically.

(When “Power on link” on the TV is set to “Set”)

• VIERA Link is a unique Panasonic function built on an HDMI control function

using the standard HDMI CEC (Consumer Electronics Control) specification.

Linked operations with HDMI CEC compatible devices made by other

companies are not guaranteed.

• The camera supports “VIERA Link Ver.5”. “VIERA Link Ver.5” is the standard

for Panasonic’s VIERA Link compatible devices. This standard is compatible

with Panasonic’s conventional VIERA Link devices.

• Operation using the buttons on the camera will be limited.

439

15. Connecting to Other Devices

Recording while monitoring camera images

When using the HDMI output, you can

take pictures while monitoring the camera

image on a TV, etc.

• The monitor and viewfinder of the camera will turn off.

• When using the AF mode [

] or MF assist, the screen cannot be enlarged

in windowed mode.

• The aspect ratio setting is fixed to [16:9].

• An electronic sound or shutter sound will not sound.

• Wi-Fi connection is not available while using the HDMI output.

• Some of setting screens are not output through the HDMI connection.

• When the following functions are being used, HDMI output is not available:

– Video recording, [4K PHOTO], [Post Focus]

• You can change the recording information to be outputted via HDMI, from

constant display to display only during operations or not to be displayed:

[

] [TV Connection] [HDMI Info Display (Rec)] (360)

440

15. Connecting to Other Devices

Importing Images to a PC

If you connect the camera to a PC, you can copy the recorded images to

the PC.

• When using Windows, you can also copy using the “PHOTOfunSTUDIO” software

for LUMIX. (443)

• When using Mac, you can copy using “iMovie”.

For details about iMovie, please contact Apple Inc.

Copying Images to a PC

• The camera can be connected to a PC running any of the following OSs

which can detect mass storage devices.

Supported OS

Windows: Windows 10/Windows 8.1/Windows 8

Mac: OS X v10.5 to v10.11, macOS 10.12 to macOS 10.15

Getting started:

• Turn on the camera and PC.

Connect the camera and PC with the USB connection

cable. (435)

Press to select [PC(Storage)] and then press .

● Windows: A drive (“LUMIX”) is displayed in [This PC].

● Mac: A drive (“LUMIX”) is displayed on the desktop.

Drag the files and folders from the camera to the PC.

441

15. Connecting to Other Devices



Folder Structure Inside Card

LUMIX

DCIM

100XXXXX

PXX

X0001.JPG

DCIM: Images

Folder number

Color space P: sRGB

_: AdobeRGB

File number

JPG: JPEG format pictures

RW2: RAW format pictures

MP4: MP4 videos,

4K burst files

442

15. Connecting to Other Devices



Copying Images to a PC Using “PHOTOfunSTUDIO”

Getting started:

• Turn on the camera and PC.

• Install “PHOTOfunSTUDIO” on PC. (442)

Connect the camera and PC with the USB connection cable. (435)

Press to select [PC(Storage)] and then press .

Copy images to the PC using “PHOTOfunSTUDIO”.

• Do not delete or move the copied files and folders in, for example, Windows

Explorer.

Playback and editing using “PHOTOfunSTUDIO” will become no longer

possible.

• If [USB Mode] is set to [PC(Storage)] in the [Setup] menu, the camera will

be automatically connected to the PC without the [USB Mode] selection

screen being displayed. (359)

• Take care not to turn off the camera while images are being imported.

• After importing of the images is completed, perform the operation to safely

remove the USB connection cable on the PC.

• Turn off the camera and disconnect the USB connection cable before

removing the card from the camera. Otherwise, the recorded data may be

damaged.

Installing Software

Install the software to perform operations such as organizing and

correcting recorded images, processing RAW images, and editing videos.

• To download the software, your PC needs to be able to connect to the

internet.

• Supported OS versions as of June 2020. Supported OS versions may be

changed without prior notice.

443

15. Connecting to Other Devices



PHOTOfunSTUDIO 10.0 AE

This software allows you to manage your images. For example, it allows

you to import pictures and videos to your PC and then sort them by

recording date, model name.

You can also perform operations such as writing images to a DVD,

correcting images, and editing videos.

Check the following site and then download and install the software:

https://panasonic.jp/support/global/cs/soft/download/d_pfs10ae.html

(English only)

Download expiration: July 2025

Operating environment

Supported OS

Windows 10 (32-bit/64-bit)

Windows 8.1 (32-bit/64-bit)

• For 4K videos and 4K photos, a 64-bit version of the

Windows 10/Windows 8.1 OS is required.

CPU Pentium

4 (2.8 GHz or higher)

Display 1024×768 or higher (1920×1080 or higher is recommended)

Installed memory 1 GB or more for 32-bit, 2 GB or more for 64-bit

Free hard disk

space

450 MB or more for installing the software

• A high-performance PC environment is required to use the playback and editing

functions for 4K videos or the picture cropping function for 4K photos.

For details, refer to the operating instructions for “PHOTOfunSTUDIO”.

• “PHOTOfunSTUDIO” is not available for Mac.

444

15. Connecting to Other Devices



SILKYPIX Developer Studio SE

This software processes and edits RAW images.

Edited images can be saved in a format (JPEG, TIFF, etc.) that can be

displayed on a PC.

Check the following site and then download and install the software:

http://www.isl.co.jp/SILKYPIX/english/p/

Operating environment

Supported OS

Windows

Windows 10 (64-bit recommended)

Windows 8.1 (64-bit recommended)

Mac

OS X v10.10 to v10.11

macOS 10.12 to macOS 10.15

• For more information such as how to use “SILKYPIX Developer Studio”, refer to the

Help or the Ichikawa Soft Laboratory’s support site.



30-Day Full Trial Version of “LoiLoScope” (Free)

This software allows you to easily edit videos.

Check the following site and then download and install the software:

http://loilo.tv/product/20

Operating environment

Supported OS Windows

Windows 10

Windows 8.1

Windows 8

• For more information on how to use “LoiLoScope”, refer to the “LoiLoScope”

manual available for download at the site.

• “LoiLoScope” is not available for Mac.

445

15. Connecting to Other Devices

Storing on a Recorder

By connecting the camera to a Panasonic Blu-ray disc recorder or DVD

recorder, you can store the pictures and videos.

Getting started:

• Turn on the camera and recorder.

Connect the camera and recorder with the USB

connection cable. (435)

Press to select [PC(Storage)] and then press .

Operate the recorder to store the images.

• If [USB Mode] is set to [PC(Storage)] in the [Setup] menu, the camera

will be automatically connected to the recorder without the [USB Mode]

selection screen being displayed. (359)

• Take care not to turn off the camera while storage is in progress.

• Images such as 4K videos may not be supported depending on your

recorder.

• Turn off the camera and disconnect the USB connection cable before

removing the card from the camera. Otherwise, the recorded data may be

damaged.

• For the storage and playback procedures, refer to the operating instructions

for the recorder.

446

15. Connecting to Other Devices

Printing

If you connect the camera to a printer that supports PictBridge, you can

select pictures on the camera’s monitor and then print them.

Getting started:

• Turn on the camera and printer.

• Set the print quality and other settings on the printer.

Display the playback screen.

● Press [ ].

Connect the camera and printer with the USB connection

cable. (435)

Press to select [PictBridge(PTP)] and then press .

Press to select a picture

and then press

● To print multiple pictures, press ,

set the picture selection method,

and then select pictures.

Multi Print

[Multi Select]

Selects the picture to print.

Press to select a picture and then press .

• To cancel the setting, press

again.

Press [DISP.] to end selection.

[Select All] Prints all the stored pictures.

[Rating]

Prints all pictures with [Rating] levels from [★1] to [★5].

447

15. Connecting to Other Devices

Set the print settings.

[Print with Date]

Sets printing with date.

• If the printer does not support printing with date, the date

cannot be printed.

[Num.of prints] Sets the number of prints to be printed (up to 999).

[Paper Size] Sets the paper size.

[Page Layout]

Sets whether to add borders and how many images to be

printed on each sheet of paper.

Start printing.

● Select [Print start] and then press

448

15. Connecting to Other Devices

• If [USB Mode] is set to [PictBridge(PTP)] in the [Setup] menu, the camera

will be automatically connected to the printer without the [USB Mode]

selection screen being displayed. (359)

• Take care not to turn off the camera while printing is in progress.

• Do not disconnect the USB connection cable while [

] (Cable disconnect

prohibit icon) is displayed.

• Disconnect the USB connection cable after printing.

• Turn off the camera and disconnect the USB connection cable before

removing the card from the camera. Otherwise, the recorded data may be

damaged.

• To print images with paper size and layout settings not supported by the

camera, set the [Paper Size] and [Page Layout] to [

] and then select the

desired settings on the printer.

(For details, refer to the operating instructions for your printer.)

• If a yellow [

] is displayed, the camera is receiving an error message from

the printer. Check that there is no problem with the printer.

• If the number of prints is high, the pictures may be printed in batches. In this

case, the remaining number of prints indicated may differ from the number

set.

• You cannot print RAW images.

• Images recorded with the following functions cannot be printed:

– Video recording, [4K Burst], [Post Focus]

449

16. Materials

Using Optional Accessories

• For information on the tripod grip, refer to page 72.

External Flash (optional)

After attaching the flash (DMW-FL580L, DMW-FL360L,

DMW-FL200L: optional), the effective range will be

increased when compared to the camera’s built-in

flash.

Close the built-in flash and set the Camera on/off switch

to [OFF].

Attach the external flash to the hot shoe and then turn on

the camera and the external flash.

• Refer to (238) for changing the settings for external flashes on the camera.

• Refer to (236) about the settings for the wireless flash.



Removing the Hot Shoe Cover

Before attaching the Flash (optional), remove the hot shoe cover.

Refer to the operating instructions for the Flash for details about how to

attach it.

Remove the hot shoe cover by pulling it in the direction

indicated by arrow

while pressing it in the direction

indicated by arrow

450

16. Materials

• When an external flash is attached, do not carry the camera by holding only

the external flash. It may become detached.

• When using a commercially available external flash, do not use one with

reversed polarity or function for communicating with a camera.

It may cause the camera to malfunction, or it may not operate correctly.

• If you take pictures close to the subject while taking wide-angle pictures, the

light of the flash is obstructed by the lens and the bottom of the screen may

be dark.

• Refer to the operating instructions of the external flash for further details.

External Microphones (Optional)

With a Stereo Shotgun Microphone (DMW-

MS2: optional) or Stereo Microphone

(VW-VMS10: optional), you can record

higher-quality audio compared to the built-

in microphone.

Close the built-in flash and set the Camera on/off switch

to [OFF].

Connect the camera and

external microphone.

• Remove the hot shoe cover. (449)

• Insert the cord in the direction shown in

the figure.

• If the cord has too much slack, you can

secure it by tucking it into the cord holder.

451

16. Materials

• While the external microphone is connected, [ ] is displayed on the

screen. Make sure that the external microphone is connected properly

before you start recording.

• Do not use the stereo microphone cables with the length of 3 m (9.8 feet)

or more.

• When an external microphone is connected, [Sound Rec Level Disp.]

automatically turns [ON], and the recording level is displayed on the screen.

• When the external microphone is attached, do not carry the camera by

holding the external microphone. It may become detached.

• When an external microphone is attached to the camera, do not open the

built-in flash.

• If noises are recorded when using the AC adaptor, use the battery.

• For details, refer to the operating instructions for the external microphone.

452

16. Materials



Setting the Sound Pickup Range (DMW-MS2: Optional)

When the Stereo Shotgun Microphone (DMW-MS2: optional) is

connected, you can set the microphone sound pickup range.

Select [Special Mic.].

● [ ] [Special Mic.]

[STEREO] Picks up sound over a wide area.

[LENS AUTO]

Picks up sound from a range automatically set by the lens

angle of view.

[SHOTGUN]

Helps prevent picking up background noise, and records

sound from a specific direction.

[S.SHOTGUN]

Narrows the sound pickup range more than with

[SHOTGUN].

[MANUAL] Sets the range manually for sound pickup.

(When [MANUAL] is selected)

Press

to adjust the sound pickup range and then press .

• You can register the [MANUAL] sound pickup range setting in an Fn button:

[

] [ ] [Fn Button Set] [Setting in REC mode] [Special Mic.

Directivity Adjust] (295)



Reduction of Wind Noise

This reduces wind noise when an external microphone is connected.

[ ] Select [Wind Cut]

Settings: [HIGH]/[STANDARD]/[LOW]/[OFF]

• Setting [Wind Cut] may alter the usual sound quality.

453

16. Materials

AC Adaptor (Optional)/DC Coupler (Optional)

With an AC Adaptor (DMW-AC10: optional) and DC Coupler (DMW-

DCC11: optional), you can perform recording and playback without

worrying about the remaining battery charge.

• Be sure to purchase both an AC Adaptor and a DC Coupler as a set.

They cannot be used independently of one another.

• When the DC Coupler is being mounted, the DC Coupler cover opens, so

the structure ceases to be dust and splash resistant.

Do not allow sand, dust and water droplets to adhere to or enter the camera.

After use, confirm that no foreign objects are adhering to the DC Coupler

cover, then firmly close the cover.

• For details, refer to the operating instructions for the AC Adaptor and DC

Coupler.

454

16. Materials

Monitor/Viewfinder Displays

• The screen is an monitor display example of when [LVF/Monitor Disp. Set] is set

to [

Recording Screen

Recording mode (54)

Photo Style (223)

Flash mode (229)

Flash setting (234, 236)

Extended Tele Conversion

(when recording video)

(156)

Recording quality (241)

[Snap Movie] (257)

[Aspect Ratio] (119)/

[Picture Size] (120)

Extended Tele Conversion

(154)

[Quality] (121)

[S&Q Effect] (256)

AFS AFF

AFC MF

Focus mode (126, 148)

Focus Bracket (201)

AFL

AF Lock (212)

AF mode (131)

[Face Recog.] (351)

Drive mode (159)

Battery indication (35)

Automatic switching

between viewfinder and

monitor (58)

Focus Peaking (344)

[Highlight Shadow]

(318)

[HDR] (325)/

[iHDR] (314)

455

16. Materials

Live View Composite

recording (103)

Multiple exposures

(327)

[Digital Zoom] (157)

(DC-G100 only)

Electronic shutter (204)

Picture-taking during

video recording (Photo

Priority) (244)

Temperature rise warning

icon (465)

Image stabilizer (206)

Camera shake alert

(208)

Pre-Burst recording

(167)

Focus (turns green)

(52)/

Recording state (turns

red) (240)

Focus (in low light AF

situations) (129)

Focus (Starlight AF)

(129)

Filter setting (226)

Filter effect adjustment

(113, 226)

Card (displayed only

during recording) (39)

XXmXXs

Elapsed recording time

(240)

Simultaneous recording

indicator (245)

Name

(351)

Travel elapsed days

(355)

Location

(355)

Age in years/months

(351)

Current date/time

Travel destination setting

(354)

Exposure meter (347)

Focal distance display (158)

Step zoom (158)

Image being sent (395)

AF area (131)

Spot metering target

(209)

Center marker (346)

Self-timer (186)

Histogram (345)

Audio recording level

display (265)

Built-in microphone setting

(88, 267)

External microphone

(450)

Silent mode (203)

Metering mode (209)

AEL

AE Lock (212)

Shutter speed (52)

F3.5

Aperture value (52)

3.5

Aperture Bracket (200)

456

16. Materials

1 This is displayed for about 5 seconds when the camera is turned on if the [Profile

Setup] setting is set.

2 This is displayed for about 5 seconds when the camera is turned on, after setting

the clock and after switching from Playback Mode to Recording mode.

Exposure compensation

value (210)

Exposure Bracket (200)

Brightness (exposure)

(83, 117)

Manual Exposure Assist

(101)

ISO sensitivity (214)

AWBc

AWBw

White balance (217)

White Balance Bracket

(202)

Adjusting the white

balance (221)

Coloring (83)

Connected to Wi-Fi

(373)

Connected to Bluetooth

(379)

Location logging (397)

Number of pictures that

can be taken (489)

r20

Number of pictures that

can be taken continuously

(162)

RXXmXXs

Available recording time

(489)

----- No card

457

16. Materials

Touch Tab (341)

Touch Zoom (155)

Touch AF, Touch Shutter (70)

Touch AE (71)

Focus Peaking (344)

Self Shot Mode (85)

Fn button (298)

/ / / /

Coloring (83)

Defocus control function

(84, 117)

Brightness (exposure)

(83, 117)

Type of defocus ([Miniature

Effect]) (115)

One Point Color (116)

Light source position

([Sunshine]) (116)

Filter effect adjustment

(118, 226)

Filter on/off (226)

Filter setting (226)

Aperture value (248, 254)

Shutter speed (248, 254)

Exposure compensation

(248, 254)

ISO sensitivity (248, 254)

Sound recording level

adjustment (248)

[S&Q Effect] (254)

Scene Guide Mode

[Clear Portrait]

([Soft Skin], [Slimming Mode])

(109)

458

16. Materials

F3.51/60



Monitor recording information screen

Recording mode (54)

1/60

Shutter speed (52)

F3.5

Aperture value (52)

Battery indication (35)

ISO sensitivity (214)

Exposure compensation

value (210)/

Manual Exposure Assist

(101)

Flash setting (233, 234,

236)/

Flash mode (229)

Drive mode (159)

AFS

Focus mode (126, 148)

AF mode (131)

[Quality] (121)

Recording quality (241)

[Aspect Ratio] (119)/

[Picture Size] (120)

[S&Q Effect] (256)

Wi-Fi/Bluetooth

connection state (373)

Fn button settings (294)

Photo Style (223)

AWB

White balance (217)

[i.Dynamic] (319)

Metering mode (209)

Number of pictures that

can be taken (489)

r20

Number of pictures that

can be taken continuously

(162)

RXXmXXs

Available recording time

(489)

---- No card

459

16. Materials

15 pic.15 pic.

1ST DAY

11 months 20 days

Playback Screen

Playback mode (363)

Protected picture (364)

Location logging (397)

Rating (364)

Cable disconnect prohibit

icon (448)

Video playback (274)

Saving pictures from a 4K

burst file (170)

Saving pictures from a

Post-Focus image (181)

Text stamped display

(367)

XXmXXs

Elapsed playback time

(274)

Icon indicating the

presence of a marker

(172, 174)

4K Photo (4K burst file)

(164)

[Post Focus] (178)

[Focus Stacking] (183)

[Aspect Ratio] (119)/

[Picture Size] (120)

Recording quality (241)

[Snap Movie] (257)

[Quality] (121)

[S&Q Effect] (256)

Battery indication (35)

1/98

Image number/Total

number of images

Wi-Fi/Bluetooth

connection state (373)

15 pic. Number of group images

XXmXXs

Video recording time

(274)

XXmXXs

S&Q playback time/

recording time (256)

460

16. Materials

Clear Retouch completed

icon (286)

Obtaining information

Playback (Video) (274)

1ST DAY

Travel elapsed days

(355)

Group images (280)

Silent mode (203)

1 It is displayed in order of [Title], [Location], [Name] ([Baby1]/[Baby2], [Pet]),

[Name] ([Face Recog.]).

Name

(351, 353)

Location

(355)

Title

(365)

Age in years/months (351, 353)

Recording information

461

16. Materials

1/5

100-0001

2020.12.1 10:00

3/5

100-0001

Standard

Contrast

Sharpness

Noise Reduction

Saturation

2020.12.1 10:00

4/5

A B

2020.12.1 10:00

100-0001

Auto White Balance

5/5

2020.12.1 10:00

100-0001

Focal Length

12mm

Long Shtr NR

OFF

Shading Comp.

OFF

35mm Focal Length

24mm

LUMIX G VARIO 12-32

/F3.5-5.6

2/5

2020.12.1 10:00

100-0001

Detailed information display

Photo style,

Highlight shadow display

White balance display

Lens information displayHistogram display

Recording information (basic)

Recording date and time (47)

Folder/file number (441)

Recording information (advanced)

462

16. Materials

Message Displays

Meanings of main messages displayed on the camera screen, and

response methods.



Card

[Memory Card Error]/[Format this card?]

• It is a format that cannot be used with the camera.

Either insert another card, or back up any necessary data before formatting. (40)

[Memory Card Error]/[This memory card cannot be used]

• Use a card compatible with the camera. (24)

[Insert SD card again]/[Try another card]

• Unable to access the card. Reinsert the card.

• Insert a different card.

[Read Error]/[Write Error]/[Please check the card]

• Failure to read or write data.

Turn off the camera, reinsert the card, and then turn it on again.

• The card may be broken.

• Insert a different card.

[Recording was cancelled due to the limitation of the writing speed of

the card]

• Insufficient card write speed. Use a card of a supported Speed Class. (24)

• If the recording stops even when you are using a card that meets the specified

Speed Class rating, the data writing speed of the card is getting slow. We

recommend backing up data, and formatting (40).

463

16. Materials



Lens

[The lens is not attached properly. Do not push lens release button

while lens is attached.]

• Remove the lens once, and then attach it again without pressing the lens release

button. (41)

Turn on the camera again, and if it is still displaying, contact the dealer.

[Lens attachment failed. Please make sure the lens is attached

correctly.]

• Remove the lens from the camera body and gently wipe the contacts on the lens

and the camera body using a dry cotton swab.

Attach the lens, turn on the camera again, and if it is still displaying, contact the

dealer.



Battery

[This battery cannot be used]

• Use a genuine Panasonic battery.

If this message is displayed even when a genuine Panasonic battery is used,

contact the dealer.

• If the terminal of the battery is dirty, remove the dirt and dust from the terminal.

464

16. Materials



Others

[Some pictures cannot be deleted]/[This picture cannot be deleted]

• Images that do not comply with the DCF standard cannot be deleted.

Back up any necessary data before formatting the card. (40)

[A folder cannot be created]

• The maximum number of folder numbers has been reached, so new folders cannot

be created.

Back up any necessary data before formatting the card. (40)

After formatting, execute [No.Reset] in the [Setup] menu to reset the folder number

to 100. (125)

[Please turn camera off and then on again]/[System Error]

• Turn off and on the camera.

If the message is displayed even when doing this several times, contact the dealer.

465

16. Materials

Troubleshooting

First, try out the following procedures (465 to 475).

If the problem is not resolved, it may be improved by selecting

[Reset] (69) on the [Setup] menu.

Power, Battery

The camera turns off automatically.

• [Economy] is enabled. (37)

The battery becomes flat too quickly.

• When [4K Pre-Burst] or [Pre-Burst Recording] is set, the battery drains faster. Set

these settings only when recording.

• When connected to Wi-Fi, the battery drains quickly.

Turn the camera off frequently such as by using [Economy] (37).

Recording

Recording stops before finishing.

Cannot record.

Cannot use some functions.

• In high ambient temperatures or if the camera is used for continuous recording, the

temperature of the camera will rise.

To protect the camera against a rise in temperature, after [

] is displayed,

recording will be stopped, and the following functions will not be available for a

time. Wait until the camera cools down.

– [4K PHOTO]

– [Post Focus]

– Video recording

466

16. Materials

Cannot record images.

The shutter will not operate immediately when the shutter button is

pressed.

• If [Focus/Release Priority] is set to [FOCUS], then recording will not take place until

focus is achieved. (336)

The recorded image is whitish.

• Images may look whitish when the lens or image sensor gets dirty with fingerprints

or similar.

If the lens is dirty, turn the camera off, then wipe the lens surface with a soft, dry

cloth.

For information about how to clean the image sensor, refer to page 477.

The recorded image is too bright or dark.

• Ensure AE Lock is not set where it is not appropriate. (212)

Multiple images are recorded at once.

• When drive mode is set to [ ] (Burst), pressing and holding the shutter button

will take burst pictures. (159)

• When [Bracket] is set, then pressing the shutter button records multiple images

while automatically changing the settings. (197)

The subject is not focused properly.

• Confirm the following details:

– Is the subject outside of the focus range?

– Is [Shutter AF] set to [OFF]? (333)

– Is [Focus/Release Priority] set to [RELEASE]? (336)

– Is AF Lock (212) set where it is not appropriate?

The recorded image is blurred.

The image stabilizer is not effective.

• The shutter speed will become slower and the image stabilizer function may not

work properly when recording in dark places.

In these cases, use a tripod and the self-timer when recording.

467

16. Materials

The recorded image looks rough.

Noise appears on the picture.

• Try the following:

– Reduce the ISO sensitivity. (214)

– Increase [Noise Reduction] of [Photo Style] to the positive direction, or adjust

each item other than [Noise Reduction] to the negative direction. (224)

– Set [Long Shtr NR] to [ON]. (322)

The subject appears distorted on the image.

• When a moving subject is recorded while using the following functions, the subject

may appear distorted in the picture:

– [ESHTR]

– Video recording

– [4K PHOTO]

This is a characteristic of the CMOS sensor that is the image sensor of the camera,

and is not a malfunction.

Striping or flicker may appear under lighting such as fluorescent or LED

lighting.

• This is characteristic of CMOS sensors which serve as

the camera’s pickup sensors.

This is not a malfunction.

• When using the electronic shutter (204), lowering the

shutter speed may reduce the effect of the horizontal

stripes.

• If flicker or horizontal stripes are noticeable when

recording video, this can be mitigated by fixing the

shutter speed.

Either set [Flkr Decrease] (331), or record in [

]

mode (246).

Stripes appear in high ISO sensitivity.

• Stripes may appear in high ISO sensitivity or depending on the lens you use.

Decrease the ISO sensitivity. (214)

468

16. Materials

The brightness or coloring of the recorded image is different from the

actual scene.

• When recording under lighting such as fluorescent or LED lighting, increasing the

shutter speed may introduce slight changes to brightness or coloring.

These are a result of the characteristics of the light source and do not indicate a

malfunction.

• When recording subjects in extremely bright locations or recording under lighting

such as fluorescent, LED, mercury, or sodium lighting, the coloring or screen

brightness may change or horizontal striping may appear on the screen.

Bright spot not in subject is recorded.

• Pixels may be missing from the image sensor.

Perform [Pixel Refresh]. (361)

Video

Cannot record videos.

• When using a large capacity card, you may not be able to record for a while after

turning on the camera.

Video recording stops in the middle.

• Recording video requires a card of a supported speed class. Use a compatible

card. (24)

Playback sound of the video is small.

• This camera has a wide dynamic range to improve the sound quality and can play

a wide range of sounds. For that reason, depending on the environment recorded,

the playback sound may feel small but this is not a malfunction.

469

16. Materials

In videos, abnormal clicking and buzzing sounds are recorded.

The recorded audio is very quiet.

• Depending on the recording conditions or the lens used, the sound of aperture and

focus actions may be recorded in videos.

You can set the focus operation during video recording to [OFF] in [Continuous AF]

(261).

• Do not block the microphone hole during video recording.

An operation sound is recorded in a video.

• We recommend setting the [ ] mode and record with touch operation if you are

bothered about the operation sounds during recording. (248)

Parts that are not in focus are indicated with Peaking.

• When you are using a [Photo Style] setting which uses an adjusted gamma curve,

such as [V-Log L], the camera may incorrectly detect noise on images as contrast

and indicate it with Peaking. We recommend checking focus with MF Assist before

recording.

Lens

When the lens is attached to another digital camera, manual focus

operation cannot be performed.

• You can use Manual Focus with the interchangeable lens (H-FS12032) only if your

model is compatible with the lens.

Refer to the support website below for details:

http://panasonic.jp/support/global/cs/dsc/

(This Site is English only.)

470

16. Materials

Playback

Cannot play back.

There are no recorded pictures.

• Folders and images processed on a PC cannot be played on the camera.

We recommend using the software “PHOTOfunSTUDIO” to write images from the

PC to the card.

• Some images are not displayed when the [Playback Mode] is set. Set to [Normal

Play]. (363)

Red part of the recorded image has changed color to black.

• When Red-Eye Removal ([ ] or [ ]) is performed, red parts may be

corrected to black.

We recommend recording images with the flash mode set to [

] or [Red-Eye

Removal] set to [OFF]. (235)

Monitor/Viewfinder

The monitor/viewfinder turns off when the camera is turned on.

• If no operations are performed during the set time period, [Auto LVF/Monitor Off]

(37) is activated, and the monitor/viewfinder turns off.

• When an object or your hand is positioned near the eye sensor, the monitor display

may switch to the viewfinder display.

It may flicker for an instant or the brightness of the screen may change

significantly for an instant.

• This occurs when the shutter button is pressed halfway, or when the subject

brightness changes, making the lens aperture change.

This is not a malfunction.

Cannot switch between the monitor and viewfinder even when [LVF] is

pressed.

• In Self Shot Mode, the display automatically switches to monitor display, and the

[LVF] and eye sensor are disabled.

471

16. Materials

Flash

The flash does not fire.

• The flash becomes unavailable in the following cases.

– The flash is closed.

– Flash set to [

] (Forced Flash Off). (231)

• The flash does not fire when using the following functions:

– [

] mode

– Video recording (240), [4K PHOTO] (164), [Post Focus] (178)

– [ESHTR] (204)

– [Silent Mode] (203)

– [Filter Settings] (226)

472

16. Materials

Wi-Fi Function

A Wi-Fi connection cannot be established.

Radio waves get disconnected.

Wireless access point is not displayed.

General tips for using a Wi-Fi connection

• Use within the communication range of the device to be connected.

• Usage near devices that utilize the 2.4 GHz frequency such as microwave ovens

and cordless telephones may result in the radio wave being lost.

Use the camera at a sufficient distance from these devices.

• When the remaining battery level is low, it may not be possible to connect to or

maintain communication with other devices.

(A message such as [Communication error] is displayed.)

• If you place the camera on a metal table or shelf, the radio waves may be

adversely affected. In such cases, you may not be able to establish a connection.

Move the camera away from the metal surface.

Wireless access point

• Confirm that the connected wireless access point can be used.

• Confirm the radio wave conditions of the wireless access point.

– Move the camera closer to the wireless access point.

– Change the location and angle of the wireless access point.

• Depending on the wireless access point, the radio wave may not be displayed even

though it is present.

– Turn off and then on the wireless access point.

– If the wireless channel of the wireless access point cannot be set automatically,

manually set the channel supported by the camera.

– If the wireless access point SSID is set not to broadcast, it may not be detected.

Enter the SSID, and then connect. (422)

• Depending on the wireless access point, connection may be automatically

disconnected after specific time has passed.

Reconnect the connection again.

473

16. Materials

Connection to a wireless access point cannot be established.

• The wireless access point information set on the camera is wrong.

Check the authentication type and encryption key. (422)

• Radio waves from other devices may block the connection to a wireless access

point.

Check the status of other devices that are connected to the wireless access point

as well as the status of other wireless devices.

(iOS devices) Wi-Fi connection attempt fails.

• Follow the message displayed to allow connection to the camera. If you still

cannot connect, select the SSID of the camera on the Wi-Fi setup screen of the

smartphone to connect. If the SSID is not displayed, turn off and on the camera,

then perform the connection settings again.

Connection to a smartphone via Wi-Fi cannot be established.

• Change the access point to connect to in the smartphone Wi-Fi settings to the

camera.

When trying to connect to a PC by Wi-Fi, this does not recognize the

user name and password, and connection is not possible.

• Depending on the version of the OS, there are two types of user account (local

account/Microsoft account).

Ensure you use the local account user name and password.

474

16. Materials

The PC is not recognized when I use a Wi-Fi connection.

The camera cannot be connected to the PC using the Wi-Fi function.

• At the time of purchase, this camera is set to use a workgroup name of

“WORKGROUP”.

If you have changed the workgroup name of the PC, this will not be recognized.

In the [Wi-Fi Setup] menu, [PC Connection], change the workgroup name of the PC

to which to connect. (429)

• Check that the login name and password are correctly typed.

• When the clock settings of the PC connected to the camera differs considerably

from those of the camera, the camera cannot be connected to the PC depending

on the OS.

It takes time to transmit an image to the web service.

Transmission of the image fails midway.

Some images cannot be transmitted.

• Is the size of the image too large?

– Reduce the image size at [Size] (427), and then send.

– Transmit after dividing the video with [Video Divide] (292).

• File format of the video that can be sent differs depending on the destination.

(404)

I have forgotten the password for the Wi-Fi.

• Reset network settings. (361)

However, all information set in [Wi-Fi Setup] and [Bluetooth] will also be reset.

(With the exception of [LUMIX CLUB])

475

16. Materials

TV, PC, Printer

No image on the TV.

The TV screen is blurry or not colored.

• Confirm the connection with the TV. (436)

VIERA Link is not working.

• Check that the [VIERA Link] of the camera is set to [ON]. (360)

• Check the VIERA Link setting on the connected device.

• Turn off and on the camera.

Cannot communicate with the PC.

• Set the [USB Mode] of the camera to [PC(Storage)]. (359)

• Turn the camera off and on.

Cannot print when the camera is connected to a printer.

• Pictures cannot be printed using a printer that does not support PictBridge.

• Set the camera’s [USB Mode] to [PictBridge(PTP)]. (359)

Others

There is rattling noise from the lens when the camera is turned on or

off, or when the camera is swung.

There is a sound from the lens when recording.

• This is the sound of the lens moving and aperture operation. It is not a malfunction.

An unreadable language was selected by mistake.

• Reselect the language from the menu using the following procedure:

[ ] [ ] Select desired language (360)

The camera becomes warm.

• The camera surface and back of the monitor may become warm during use, but

this does not indicate a problem with performance or quality.

476

16. Materials

Cautions for Use



The camera

Keep this unit as far away as possible from electromagnetic

equipment (such as microwave ovens, TVs, video games etc.).

• If you use this unit on top of or near a TV, the pictures and/or sound on this unit

may be disrupted by electromagnetic wave radiation.

• Do not use this unit near cell phones because doing so may result in noise

adversely affecting the pictures and/or sound.

• Recorded data may be damaged, or pictures may be distorted, by strong magnetic

fields created by speakers or large motors.

• Electromagnetic wave radiation may adversely affect this unit, disturbing the

pictures and/or sound.

• If this unit is adversely affected by electromagnetic equipment and stops

functioning properly, turn this unit off and remove the battery or disconnect AC

adaptor. Then reinsert the battery or reconnect AC adaptor and turn this unit on.

Do not use this unit near radio transmitters or high-voltage lines.

• If you record near radio transmitters or high-voltage lines, the recorded pictures

and/or sound may be adversely affected.

Always use the supplied cords and cables.

If you use optional accessories, use the cords and the cables

supplied with them.

Do not extend the cords or the cables.

Do not keep objects such as credit cards that may be influenced

magnetically close to this unit. The data on these objects may

become corrupted and unusable.

477

16. Materials

Do not spray the camera with insecticides or volatile chemicals.

• If the camera is sprayed with such chemicals, the body of the camera may be

damaged and the surface finish may peel off.

Do not keep products made of rubber, PVC or similar materials in

contact with the camera for a long period of time.



Cleaning

Before cleaning the camera, remove the battery or the DC Coupler,

and disconnect the power plug from the electrical outlet. Then wipe

the camera with a dry, soft cloth.

• When the camera is soiled badly, it can be cleaned by wiping the dirt off with a

wrung wet cloth, and then with a dry cloth.

• Do not use solvents such as benzine, thinner, alcohol, kitchen detergents, etc., to

clean the camera, since it may deteriorate the external case or the coating may

peel off.

• When using a chemical cloth, be sure to follow the accompanying instructions.



Dirt on the image sensor

If dirt gets inside the mount when changing lenses, depending on the

recording conditions, it may adhere to the image sensor and appear on

the recorded picture.

To prevent debris or dust adhering to internal parts of the body, avoid

changing the lens in a dusty environment and always fit the body cap or a

lens when storing the camera.

Remove any dirt on the body cap before attaching it.

478

16. Materials

Removing dirt on the image sensor

The image sensor is very precise and delicate, so be sure to observe the

following when you do have to clean it yourself.

• Blow dust off the surface of the image sensor using a commercially available

blower. Do not blow the dust off with excessive power.

• Do not put the blower brush further inside than the lens mount as the image sensor

may get scratched.

• Do not use any objects except a blower brush to clean the image sensor.

• If you cannot remove the dirt or dust with the blower, consult the dealer or

Panasonic.



Cleaning the Viewfinder

• As the eye cup cannot be removed, blow away the dust on the viewfinder surface

with a blower (commercially available), gently wipe it with a dry and soft cloth, and

be careful not to remove it.

• If you wipe the eye cup too hard and it is removed, consult the dealer or

Panasonic.



Monitor/Viewfinder

• Do not push hard on the monitor.

This may cause irregular coloration or malfunction.

• Extremely high precision technology is employed to produce the monitor/viewfinder

screen. However there may be some dark or bright spots, or spots that light

constantly (red, blue, or green) on the screen.

This is not a malfunction.

Though the monitor/viewfinder screen parts are produced with highly controlled

precision technology, some pixels may be inactive or always lit.

The spots will not be recorded on images on a card.

479

16. Materials



Lens

• Do not press the lens with excessive force.

• Do not leave the camera with the lens facing the

sun as rays of light from the sun may cause it to

malfunction. Also, be careful when placing the

camera outside or near a window.

• When there is dirt (water, oil, and fingerprints, etc.) on

the surface of the lens, the picture may be affected.

Lightly wipe the surface of the lens with a soft, dry

cloth before and after taking pictures.

• Do not place the lens mount facing downwards. Do

not allow the lens mount contacts

to become dirty.

480

16. Materials



Battery

The battery is a rechargeable lithium ion battery.

It is highly sensitive to temperature and humidity, and the effect on

performance increases as the temperature rises or drops.

Keep the contacts

of the charger and battery

clean.

• Wipe them with a dry cloth if they get dirty.

Always remove the battery after use.

• Place the removed battery in a plastic bag, etc., and keep away from metallic

objects (clips, etc.) for storage or transport.

If you drop the battery accidentally, check to see if the body of the

battery and the contacts are deformed.

• Damage to the camera will result if a battery with deformed contacts is inserted into

the camera.

Dispose of unusable battery.

• The battery has a limited life.

• Do not throw the battery into fire because it may cause an explosion.

Do not allow battery terminals to come into contact with metal

objects (such as necklaces, hairpins, etc.).

• This can cause short-circuiting or heat generation and you may be badly burned if

you touch a battery.

481

16. Materials



AC Adaptor

• The [CHARGE] light may blink under the influence of static electricity or

electromagnetic wave, depending on the charging environment. This phenomenon

has no effects on charging.

• If you use the AC adaptor near a radio, the radio reception may be disturbed.

Keep the AC adaptor 1 m (3.3 feet) or more away from radio.

• During usage, the AC adaptor may emit an electrical hum; this is not a malfunction.

• After use, be sure to disconnect the power plug from the electrical outlet.

(A very small amount of current is consumed if it is left connected.)



Card

Do not leave the card in areas with high temperatures, direct

sunlight, or areas prone to electromagnetic waves and static.

Do not bend or drop the card.

Do not subject the card to strong vibration.

• Otherwise, the card and recorded data may be damaged.

• Put the card in the card case or the storage bag after use and when storing or

carrying the card.

• Do not allow dirt, water or other foreign objects to get into the contacts on the card.

Additionally, do not touch the contacts with your hands.

482

16. Materials



Personal Information

Personal information is stored within the camera and in recorded images.

We recommend that you enhance security by setting a Wi-Fi password

and Wi-Fi function lock to protect personal information. (429, 430)

• Images may contain information that can be used to identify the user, such as

recording dates and times, and location information.

Confirm details carefully before uploading images to a web service.

Disclaimer

• Information including personal information may be altered or vanish due to

erroneous operation, effect of static electricity, accident, malfunction, repair, or

other handlings.

Please note in advance that Panasonic is not liable in any way for any direct

or indirect damage from the alteration or vanishing of information or personal

information.

When requesting a repair or transferring/disposing of the camera

• After making a copy of personal information, be sure to delete information,

including personal information, such as wireless LAN connection settings that you

have registered or saved within the camera with [Reset Network Settings] (361),

and [Delete account] ([LUMIX CLUB]). (433)

• Reset the settings to protect the personal information. (69)

• Remove the card from the camera.

• Settings may return to factory default when camera is repaired.

• Please contact the dealer where you purchased the camera or Panasonic if above

operations are not possible due to malfunction.

Points to remember when disposing of/transferring the memory card

Format or delete using the camera or a PC will only modify the file management

information, so it will not delete the data in the card completely.

We recommend physically destroying the card or using commercially available

PC data deletion software to delete the card data completely when disposing of/

transferring the card.

You are responsible for handling of data on cards.

483

16. Materials



When Not Using the Camera for a Long Period of Time

• Ensure you remove the battery and card from the camera.

If the battery is left in the camera, it may over-discharge, and be rendered unusable

even after charging.

• Store the battery in a cool and dry place with a relatively stable temperature.

(Recommended temperature: 15 °C to 25 °C (59 °F to 77 °F); recommended

humidity: 40%RH to 60%RH)

• If storing for a long period of time, it is recommended that the battery be charged

once per year, fully drained in the camera, then removed from the camera and then

stored again.

• We recommend storing the camera with a desiccant (silica gel) when you keep it in

a closet or a cabinet.

• Check all the parts before recording when you have not used the camera for a long

period of time.



Image Data

• Recorded data may be damaged or lost if the camera breaks down due to

inappropriate handling.

Panasonic will not be liable for any damage caused due to loss of recorded data.



Tripod/Unipod

• Make sure the tripod/unipod is stable when the camera is attached to it.

• You may not be able to remove the card or the battery when using a tripod or

unipod.

• Care is required because tightening the screw excessively may damage the

camera, or cause the rating label to come off.

• When using this unit with a large-diameter lens, the lens may come into contact

with the pedestal depending on the tripod/unipod. Tightening the screw with the

lens and pedestal in contact with each other may damage this unit or the lens.

Therefore it is recommended to attach the tripod adaptor (DMW-TA1: optional)

before mounting on the tripod/unipod.

• Please also refer to the operating instructions for the tripod/unipod.

484

16. Materials



Shoulder Strap

• If you attach a heavy interchangeable lens to the camera body, do not carry the

camera by the shoulder strap.

Hold the camera and the lens when carrying them.



Wi-Fi Function

Use the camera as a wireless LAN device

When using devices or computer systems that require more reliable

security than wireless LAN devices, ensure that the appropriate measures

are taken for safety designs and defects for the systems used.

Panasonic will not take any responsibility for any damage that arises when

using the camera for any purpose other than as a wireless LAN device.

Use of the Wi-Fi function of the camera is presumed to be in

countries where it is sold

There is the risk that the camera violates the radio wave regulations if

used in countries other than those where it is sold, and Panasonic takes

no responsibility for any violations.

There is the risk that data sent and received via radio waves may be

intercepted

Please note that there is the risk that data sent and received via radio

waves may be intercepted by a third party.

Do not use the camera in areas with magnetic fields, static electricity

or interference

• Do not use the camera in areas with magnetic fields, static electricity or

interference, such as near microwave ovens.

These may cause the interruption of the radio waves.

• Using the camera near devices such as microwave ovens or cordless telephones

that use the 2.4 GHz radio wave band may cause a decrease in performance in

both devices.

485

16. Materials

Do not connect to the wireless network you are not authorized to use

When the camera utilizes its wireless LAN function, wireless networks

(SSID) that you are not authorized to use may be displayed, however

do not attempt to connect to the network as it may be considered as an

unauthorized access.

486

16. Materials

Number of Pictures That Can Be Taken

and Available Recording Time with the

Battery

Listed below are the numbers of pictures that can be taken and the time

lengths available for recording when the supplied battery is being used.

• The number of pictures that can be taken is according to the CIPA (Camera &

Imaging Products Association) standards.

• Using a Panasonic SDHC memory card.

• The values listed are approximate.



Recording Pictures (When using monitor)

When the interchangeable lens (H-FS12032) is used

Number of recordable pictures 270

When the interchangeable lens (H-FS35100) is used

Number of recordable pictures 270



Recording Pictures (When using viewfinder (LVF))

When the interchangeable lens (H-FS12032) is used

Number of recordable pictures 250 (900)

When the interchangeable lens (H-FS35100) is used

Number of recordable pictures 250 (900)

• The numbers in parentheses indicate the values that result when [Time] in [Power

Save LVF Shooting] is set to [1SEC] and the [Power Save LVF Shooting] function

works as intended.

(Based on the test conditions derived from the CIPA standard and specified by

Panasonic)

487

16. Materials



Recording Videos (When Using the Monitor)

• Recording with picture quality set to [4K/100M/30p] or [4K/100M/25p].

When the interchangeable lens (H-FS12032) is used

Continuous available recording time (minutes) 80

Actual available recording time (minutes) 40

When the interchangeable lens (H-FS35100) is used

Continuous available recording time (minutes) 70

Actual available recording time (minutes) 35

• Recording with picture quality set to [FHD/28M/60p] or [FHD/28M/50p].

When the interchangeable lens (H-FS12032) is used

Continuous available recording time (minutes) 90

Actual available recording time (minutes) 45

When the interchangeable lens (H-FS35100) is used

Continuous available recording time (minutes) 90

Actual available recording time (minutes) 45

• Recording with picture quality set to [FHD/24M/24p].

When the interchangeable lens (H-FS12032) is used

Continuous available recording time (minutes) 130

Actual available recording time (minutes) 65

When the interchangeable lens (H-FS35100) is used

Continuous available recording time (minutes) 120

Actual available recording time (minutes) 60

• Actual available recording time is the time available for recording when repeating

actions such as turning the camera on and off, starting/stopping recording, etc.

488

16. Materials



Playback (When Using the Monitor)

When the interchangeable lens (H-FS12032) is used

Playback time (minutes) 220

When the interchangeable lens (H-FS35100) is used

Playback time (minutes) 210

• The number of pictures that can be taken and the available recording time

vary depending on the surrounding environment and the usage conditions.

For example, these will reduce in the following case:

– When the flash is used repeatedly.

– In low-temperature environments, such as on ski slopes.

• If the usage duration drops significantly even when the battery is fully

charged, then the battery is at the end of its service life.

Replace with a new battery.

489

16. Materials

Number of Still Images That Can Be

Taken and Video Recording Time with

Cards

Listed below are the numbers of pictures and the time lengths of videos

that can be recorded on a card.

• The values listed are approximate.



Number of Still Images That Can Be Taken

• When [Aspect Ratio] is set to [4:3]

[Picture Size] L (20M) M (10M) S (5M)

[Quality]

[

]

[

]

[

]

[

]

[

]

[

]

16 GB 1450 450 2630 520 4600 570

32 GB 2910 900 5280 1050 9220 1150

64 GB 5810 1810 10510 2110 17640 2290

128 GB 11510 3590 20810 4180 34940 4550



Video Recording Time

• “h” is an abbreviation for hour, “m” for minute and “s” for second.

• Video recording time is the total time of all videos that have been recorded.

[Rec Quality]

[4K/100M/30p]

[4K/100M/25p]

[4K/100M/24p]

[FHD/28M/60p]

[FHD/28M/50p]

[FHD/20M/30p]

[FHD/20M/25p]

[FHD/24M/24p]

[HD/10M/30p]

[HD/10M/25p]

16 GB 20m00s 1h10m 1h35m 1h25m 3h05m

32 GB 41m00s 2h25m 3h15m 2h50m 6h20m

64 GB 1h25m 5h00m 6h40m 5h50m 12h45m

128 GB 2h45m 9h55m 13h15m 11h35m 25h20m

• Depending on the recording conditions and the type of card, number of still

images that can be taken, video recording time vary.

• [9999+] is displayed on the recording screen if the remaining number of still

images that can be taken is 10000 or more.

• The continuous recordable time for videos is displayed on the screen.

490

16. Materials

List of Functions That Can Be Set in

Each Recording Mode

[Rec] menu

[Aspect Ratio]

[Picture Size]

[Quality]

[Focus Mode]

[AF Sensitivity(Photo)]

[Photo Style]

[Filter Settings]

[Filter Effect]

[Simultaneous Record w/o

Filter]

[Color Space]

[Metering Mode]

[Highlight Shadow]

[i.Dynamic]

[i.Resolution]

[Flash]

[Flash Mode]

[Flash Synchro]

[Flash Adjust.]

[Auto Exposure Comp.]

[Wireless]

[Wireless Channel]

[Communication Light]

[Wireless Setup]

[Red-Eye Removal]

491

16. Materials

[ISO Sensitivity

(photo)]

[ISO Auto Lower Limit

Setting]

[ISO Auto Upper Limit

Setting]

[Min. Shtr Speed]

[Long Shtr NR]

[Shading Comp.]

[Diffraction Compensation]

[Stabilizer]

[Operation Mode]

[E-Stabilization (Video)]

[Ex. Tele Conv.] ([Rec])

[Digital Zoom] (DC-G100 only)

[Burst Rate]

[4K PHOTO]

[Rec Method]

[Pre-Burst Recording]

[Self Timer]

[Time Lapse Shot]

[Stop Motion Animation]

[Live View Composite]

[Silent Mode]

[Shutter Type]

[Shutter Delay]

[Bracket]

[HDR]

[Multi Exp.]

[Auto Gain]

[Overlay]

492

16. Materials

[Motion Picture] Menu

[Rec Quality]

[Snap Movie]

[Focus Mode]

[Continuous AF]

[AF Custom Setting(Video)]

[Photo Style]

[Filter Settings]

[Filter Effect]

[Simultaneous Record w/o

Filter]

[Luminance Level]

[Metering Mode]

[Highlight Shadow]

[i.Dynamic]

[i.Resolution]

[ISO Sensitivity

(video)]

[ISO Auto Lower Limit

Setting]

[ISO Auto Upper Limit

Setting]

[Diffraction Compensation]

[Stabilizer]

[Operation Mode]

[E-Stabilization (Video)]

[Flkr Decrease]

[Ex. Tele Conv.] ([Motion Picture])

[Digital Zoom] (DC-G100 only)

[Picture Mode in Rec.]

[Self Timer]

[Sound Rec Level Disp.]

[Sound Rec Level Adj.]

[Wind Noise Canceller]

493

16. Materials

[Wind Cut]

[Lens Noise Cut]

[Built-in Mic]

[Built-in Mic Indicator]

[Special Mic.]

1 This item is available only when using an external microphone (optional).

2 This item is available only when using an interchangeable lens supporting power

zoom.

3 This item is available only when using stereo shotgun microphone (DMW-MS2:

optional).

494

16. Materials

Specifications

The specifications are subject to change for performance enhancement.

Digital camera body (DC-G100/DC-G110):

Information for your safety

Power source: 8.4 V

Power consumption: 2.9 W (when recording with the monitor),

2.0 W (when playing back with the monitor)

2.9 W (when recording with the monitor),

2.1 W (when playing back with the monitor)

Type

Type Digital Single Lens Mirrorless camera

Recording media SD memory card / SDHC memory card

/ SDXC

memory card

1 Compliant with UHS-I UHS Speed Class 3

Lens mount Micro Four Thirds mount

Image sensor

Image sensor 4/3″ Live MOS sensor, a total of 21,770,000 pixels,

primary color filter

Effective number of

pixels of the camera

20,300,000 pixels

Recording format for still images

File format for still

images

JPEG (DCF compliant, Exif 2.31 compliant) / RAW

File format for 4K

photos

MP4 (H.264/MPEG-4 AVC, AAC (2ch))

495

16. Materials

Picture size

(pixels)

When the aspect ratio setting is [4:3]

[L]: 5184×3888, [M]: 3712×2784, [S]: 2624×1968

4K photo: 3328×2496

When the aspect ratio setting is [3:2]

[L]: 5184×3456, [M]: 3712×2480, [S]: 2624×1752

4K photo: 3504×2336

When the aspect ratio setting is [16:9]

[L]: 5184×2920, [M]: 3840×2160, [S]: 1920×1080

4K photo: 3840×2160

When the aspect ratio setting is [1:1]

[L]: 3888×3888, [M]: 2784×2784, [S]: 1968×1968

4K photo: 2880×2880

Quality Fine / Standard / RAW+Fine / RAW+Standard / RAW

Recording format for video

Video format MP4 (H.264/MPEG-4 AVC, AAC (2ch))

Image quality for

video

For details, refer to page 241.

Viewfinder

System Aspect ratio 4:3, 0.4 inches, approx. 3,680,000 dots

equivalent, Color LCD Live Viewfinder

(field of view ratio about 100%)

Magnification Approx. 0.73× (35 mm film camera equivalent)

(–1.0 m

–1

50 mm at infinity, with aspect ratio set to [4:3])

Eye point Approx. 20 mm (at –1.0 m

–1

)

Diopter adjustment

range

–4.0 to +2.0 diopter

496

16. Materials

Monitor

System Aspect ratio 3:2, 3.0 inches,

approx. 1,840,000 dots monitor, capacitive touch screen

(field of view ratio about 100%)

Focus

AF type TTL type based on image detection (Contrast AF)

Focus mode AFS / AFF / AFC / MF

AF mode Face/Eye Detection, Tracking, 49-area-focusing,

Custom Multi, 1-area-focusing, Pinpoint-focusing

(Focus area selection is possible by touching.)

Exposure control

Light metering

system,

Light metering mode

1728-zone metering,

multi-metering / center-weighted metering / spot

metering

Metering range EV 0 to EV 18

(F2.0 lens, ISO100 conversion)

Exposure Program AE (P) / Aperture-Priority AE (A) / Shutter-

Priority AE (S) / Manual Exposure (M)

Exposure

compensation

1/3 EV steps, ±5 EV

ISO sensitivity

(standard output

sensitivity)

AUTO / Intelligent ISO / 200 to 25600,

When [Extended ISO] is set: AUTO / 100 to 25600,

1/3 EV steps

White balance

AWB / AWBc / AWBw / Daylight / Cloudy / Shade / Incandescent lights / Flash /

White set 1, 2, 3, 4 / Color temperature 1, 2, 3, 4

497

16. Materials

Shutter

Format Electronically-controlled, Single curtain focal-plane

shutter

Shutter speed Pictures:

Electronic front curtain: Time (max. approx.

60 seconds), 60 seconds to 1/500 of a second

Electronic shutter: 1 second to 1/16000 of a second

Videos:

1/25

of a second to 1/16000 of a second

2 When [Exposure Mode] is set to [M] in [ ] mode

and focus mode is set to [MF], this can be set up

to 1/2

Burst recording

Electronic front

curtain

High

speed

6 frames/second ([AFS], [MF]) /

5 frames/second ([AFF], [AFC])

Medium

speed

4 frames/second

Low

speed

2 frames/second

Electronic shutter High

speed

10 frames/second

Medium

speed

4 frames/second

Low

speed

2 frames/second

Maximum number of

frames recordable

Without RAW files: 480 frames or more

With RAW files: 20 frames or more

(When recording is performed under the test conditions

specified by Panasonic)

Minimum illumination

Approx. 9 lx (when i-Low light is used, the shutter speed is 1/25th of a second)

Approx. 12 lx (when i-Low light is used, the shutter speed is 1/25th of a second)

498

16. Materials

Flash

Flash TTL AUTO Built-in pop up flash GN 5.1 equivalent

(ISO200·m)

[GN 3.6 equivalent (ISO100·m)]

Flash mode Auto, Auto/Red-Eye, Forced Flash On,

Forced On/Red-Eye, Slow Sync., Slow Sync./Red-Eye,

Forced Flash Off

Flash

synchronization

speed

Equal to or smaller than 1/50 of a second

Flash range Approx. 0.4 m (1.3 feet) to 4.1 m (13 feet)

<When the Interchangeable lens (H-FS12032) is

mounted, WIDE, [ISO AUTO] is set>

Approx. 0.9 m (3.0 feet) to 3.6 m (12 feet)

<When the Interchangeable lens (H-FS35100) is

mounted, WIDE, [ISO AUTO] is set>

Zoom

Digital Zoom

(DC-G100 only)

Max. 2x

Extended Tele

Conversion

When taking still pictures:

Max. 2.0x (When a picture size of [S] is selected.)

When recording video:

2.7x (FHD)/4.0x (HD)

Microphone / Speaker

Microphone Stereo

Speaker Monaural

Interface

[HDMI] micro HDMI Type D

[USB/CHARGE] USB 2.0 (High Speed)/USB 2.0 Micro-B

• Data from the PC cannot be written to the camera

using the USB connection cable.

[MIC] Ø 3.5 mm stereo mini jack

499

16. Materials

External dimensions / Mass

External dimensions Approx. 115.6 mm (W)×82.5 mm (H)×54.2 mm (D)

(4.55″ (W)×3.24″ (H)×2.13″ (D))

(excluding the projecting parts)

Mass Approx. 345 g/0.76 lb (with one card and the battery)

Approx. 303 g/0.66 lb (only camera body)

Operating environment

Recommended

operating

temperature

0 °C to 40 °C (32 °F to 104 °F)

Permissible relative

humidity

10%RH to 80%RH

This camera complies with the “Design rule for Camera File system” (DCF) and

“Exchangeable Image File Format” (Exif) standards established by “Japan Electronics

and Information Technology Industries Association” (JEITA). The camera cannot play

back files that do not comply with the DCF standard. Exif is a file format for pictures

which allows recording information, etc. to be added.

500

16. Materials

Interchangeable

Lens

H-FS12032

“LUMIX G VARIO

12–32 mm/F3.5–5.6 ASPH./

MEGA O.I.S.”

H-FS35100

“LUMIX G VARIO

35–100 mm/F4.0–5.6

ASPH./MEGA O.I.S.”

Focal length f=12 mm to 32 mm (35 mm

film camera equivalent:

24 mm to 64 mm)

f=35 mm to 100 mm (35 mm

film camera equivalent:

70 mm to 200 mm)

Aperture type 7 diaphragm blades/circular

aperture diaphragm

7 diaphragm blades/circular

aperture diaphragm

Maximum aperture F3.5 (Wide) to F5.6 (Tele) F4.0 (Wide) to F5.6 (Tele)

Minimum aperture

value

F22 F22

Lens construction 8 elements in 7 groups

(3 aspherical lenses, 1 ED

lens)

12 elements in 9 groups

(1 aspherical lens, 2 ED

lenses)

In focus distance 0.2 m (0.66 feet) to

(from

the focus distance reference

line) (focal length 12 mm to

20 mm), 0.3 m (0.98 feet) to

(from the focus distance

reference line) (focal length

21 mm to 32 mm)

0.9 m (3.0 feet) to

(from

the focus distance reference

line)

Maximum image

magnification

0.13x (35 mm film camera

equivalent: 0.26x)

0.11x (35 mm film camera

equivalent: 0.22x)

Optical Image

Stabilizer

Available Available

Mount Micro Four Thirds mount Micro Four Thirds mount

Angle of view 84° (Wide) to 37° (Tele) 34° (Wide) to 12° (Tele)

Filter diameter 37 mm 46 mm

Max. diameter Ø 55.5 mm (2.2 inch) Ø 55.5 mm (2.2 inch)

Overall length Approx. 24 mm (0.94 inch)

(from the tip of the lens to

the base side of the lens

mount when the lens barrel

is recessed)

Approx. 50 mm (2.0 inch)

(from the tip of the lens to

the base side of the lens

mount when the lens barrel

is recessed)

Mass Approx. 67 g/0.15 lb Approx. 135 g/0.38 lb

501

16. Materials

Recommended

operating

temperature

0 °C to 40 °C (32 °F to

104 °F)

0 °C to 40 °C (32 °F to

104 °F)

Permissible relative

humidity

10%RH to 80%RH 10%RH to 80%RH

Tripod grip: DMW-SHGR1

Carrying capacity

(Total mass of the

loading camera

body, lens, battery,

and other attached

accessories)

Maximum 1.2 kg/2.65 lb

External dimensions

(Legs folded)

Approx. 53.7 mm (W)×144.7 mm (H)×45.5 mm (D)

(2.11″ (W)×5.70″ (H)×1.79″ (D))

(excluding the projecting parts)

External dimensions

(Legs opened)

Approx. 150.5 mm (W)×113.7 mm (H)×133.4 mm (D)

(5.93″ (W)×4.48″ (H)×5.25″ (D))

(excluding the projecting parts)

Length of the

connection cable

Approx. 160 mm (6.30″)

Mass Approx. 102 g/0.22 lb

Recommended

operating

temperature

0 °C to 40 °C (32 °F to 104 °F)

Permissible relative

humidity

10%RH to 80%RH

502

Index

Numerics

1-Area (AF) ........................................ 141

49-Area (AF) ...................................... 137

4K Burst ............................................. 165

4K Burst (Wide-angle) ......................... 90

4K burst files ...................................... 170

4K Burst (S/S).................................... 165

4K Live Cropping ....................... 249, 314

4K PHOTO ................................ 164, 323

4K PHOTO Bulk Saving ............ 177, 366

4K PHOTO Play ................................ 297

4K Pre-Burst ...................................... 165

5-Axis Hybrid Image Stabilizer .......... 207

AC adaptor ................................ 453, 481

AF ...................................................... 128

AF After Countdown .......................... 350

AF Area Display ................................. 337

AF Assist Lamp.................................. 335

AF Custom Setting(Video) ......... 262, 329

AF Mode ............................................ 131

AF Sensitivity(Photo) ......................... 130

AF/AE Lock................................ 212, 333

AF/AE Lock Hold ............................... 333

AF+AE ............................................... 145

AF+MF ............................................... 338

AFC ................................................... 126

AFF .................................................... 126

AF-ON ............................................... 213

AFS.................................................... 126

Android .............................................. 376

Aperture Bracket................................ 200

Aperture Ring Increment ................... 350

Aperture-Priority AE mode ................... 95

Appetizing Food..................................111

Artistic Nightscape .............................. 110

Aspect Ratio ...............................119, 316

Auto Clock Set ........................... 356, 399

Auto exposure compensation .... 235, 320

Auto focus.......................................... 128

Auto LVF/Monitor Off ................... 37, 357

Auto Marking function ........................ 176

Auto Review ...................................... 342

Auto Transfer ............................. 356, 395

Auto White Balance ........................... 218

Automatic scene detection .................. 78

AV device (Wi-Fi Connections) .......... 414

Available recording time .................... 486

Available recording time

(for video recording) .......................... 489

Backlight compensation....................... 77

Backlit Softness ................................. 109

Battery ......................................... 31, 480

Beep .................................................. 356

Bleach Bypass .................................... 114

Blinking Highlights ............................. 346

Bluetooth ................................... 356, 377

Bracketing.................................. 197, 325

Bright Blue Sky ...................................110

Built-in Mic. ........................................ 267

Built-in Mic Indicator .......................... 268

Built-in microphone setting

(Self Shot)............................................ 88

Bulb ................................................... 391

Burst rate ................................... 161, 323

Burst Shot .......................................... 160

503

Index

Calendar Playback ............................ 279

Card ....................................... 24, 39, 481

Center Marker.................................... 346

Center-weighted metering ................. 209

Charge ................................................. 31

Cinelike D .......................................... 223

Cinelike V .......................................... 223

Cleaning ............................................ 477

Clear Night Portrait ............................. 111

Clear Nightscape ................................110

Clear Portrait ..................................... 109

Clear Retouch.................................... 286

Clear Sports Shot ...............................111

Clock Set ..................................... 47, 354

Cloud Limit......................................... 427

Cloud sync service ............................ 418

Color Space ............................... 317, 441

Color Tone ......................................... 224

Communication Light ................. 239, 320

Compression rate ...................... 121, 316

Condensation ...................................... 21

Constant Preview .............................. 343

Continuous AF ........................... 261, 329

Continuous available recording time

........................................................... 487

Contrast ............................................. 224

Control dial .......................................... 55

Cool Night Sky .................................... 110

Creating a picture from a video ......... 276

Creative Control menu....................... 315

Creative Control mode........................112

Creative Video menu ......................... 314

Creative Video mode ......................... 246

Cropping ............................................ 369

Cross Process ....................................114

Custom menu .................................... 333

Custom mode .................................... 305

Custom Mode menu .......................... 306

Custom set memory .................. 305, 354

Cute Dessert.......................................111

DC Coupler ........................................ 453

DCF standard .................................... 499

Defocus control function ...............84, 117

Delete ................................................ 281

Delete All Images............................... 371

Delete Confirmation ........................... 371

Delete Location Data ......................... 427

Delete Single ..................................... 281

Demo Mode ....................................... 361

Device Name ..................................... 429

Dial Operation Switch Setup...... 299, 340

Dial Setting ........................................ 340

Diffraction Compensation .................. 323

Digital Zoom .............................. 157, 323

Diopter adjustment .............................. 57

Direct Focus Area .............................. 336

Distinct Scenery..................................110

Drive mode ........................................ 159

Dynamic Monochrome........................114

Economy...................................... 37, 357

Electronic front curtain ............... 204, 324

Electronic shutter ....................... 204, 324

Enlarged Display ............................... 277

Entering characters ........................... 372

E-Stabilization (Video) ............... 207, 323

Exposure Bracket .............................. 200

Exposure compensation .................... 210

504

Index

Exposure Compensation Display Setting

........................................................... 339

Exposure Compensation Reset ......... 333

Exposure Meter ................................. 347

Exposure Mode ......................... 246, 314

Expressive ..........................................114

Extended ISO .................................... 333

Extended Tele Conversion

........................................... 154, 323, 331

External flash ..................................... 449

External microphone.......................... 450

Eye cup.............................................. 478

Eye sensor......................................... 358

Eye Sensor AF................................... 334

Face Rec Edit .................................... 366

Face recognition ................................ 351

Face/Eye Detection ........................... 133

Fantasy ............................................... 114

File number................ 123, 125, 441, 461

Filter Effect .........................113, 226, 316

Filter Settings............................. 226, 316

Firmware update.................................. 20

Firmware Version............................... 360

Flash .................................................. 228

Flash adjustment ....................... 233, 320

Flash Mode ................................ 229, 320

Flash setting .............................. 229, 320

Flash Synchro............................ 234, 320

Flicker Decrease................................ 331

Fn button ........................................... 294

Fn Button Set............................. 295, 339

Focus ......................................... 128, 261

Focus Area Set .................................. 296

Focus Bracket.................................... 201

Focus mode ....................................... 126

Focus Ring Lock ................................ 341

Focus Stacking .................................. 183

Focus Switching for Vert/Hor ............. 337

Focus/Release Priority ...................... 336

Folder number ........... 123, 125, 441, 461

Folder/File Settings.................... 123, 361

Forced Flash Off ................................ 229

Format ......................................... 40, 361

Frame Marker ............................ 270, 346

Freeze Animal Motion .........................111

Front dial.............................................. 55

Gamma setting (Photo Style) ............ 223

Glistening Water .................................110

Glittering Illuminations ........................110

Grain Effect ........................................ 225

Group image ...................................... 280

Guide Line ......................................... 345

Half Press Release ............................ 333

Handheld Night Shot ..........................111

HDAVI Control™ ................................ 437

HDMI Info Display (Rec) .................... 360

HDMI micro cable .............. 434, 436, 438

HDMI Mode (Play) ............................. 359

HDMI socket ...................................... 434

HDR ................................................... 325

High Dynamic .....................................114

High Key .............................................114

Highlight Shadow............................... 318

Histogram .......................................... 345

Hot shoe cover .................................. 449

i.Dynamic ........................................... 319

505

Index

i.ISO................................................... 215

i.Resolution ........................................ 319

iHandheld Night Shot................... 81, 314

iHDR ............................................ 81, 314

Image Quality .................................... 224

Image Stabilizer ......................... 206, 323

Impressive Art ..................................... 114

Intelligent Auto menu ......................... 314

Intelligent Auto mode ........................... 76

Intelligent Auto Plus Mode ................... 79

Intelligent ISO .................................... 215

iOS..................................................... 376

ISO Displayed Setting ....................... 339

ISO Increments.................................. 333

ISO sensitivity .................................... 214

ISO Sensitivity (photo) ....................... 321

ISO Sensitivity (video) ............... 264, 330

L.Monochrome................................... 223

L.Monochrome D ............................... 223

Language........................................... 360

Lens ............................................... 23, 41

Lens Fn Button Setting ...................... 349

Lens hood ............................................ 44

Lens Noise Cut .................................. 266

Lens Position Resume....................... 349

Level Gauge ...................................... 296

Level Gauge Adjustment ................... 361

Light Composition .............................. 282

Live View Boost ................................. 343

Live View Composite Recording ........ 103

Location Logging ....................... 356, 397

Log recording..................................... 271

Long Exposure NR ............................ 322

Looped Focus Frame ........................ 337

Low illumination AF............................ 129

Low Key .............................................. 114

Luminance Level ....................... 263, 330

LUMIX CLUB ..................................... 430

LUMIX Sync....................................... 376

LVF Display Speed ............................ 357

LVF Luminance .................................. 358

LVF/Monitor Display Set .................... 347

LVF/Monitor Display Style ................. 296

LVF/Monitor Switch ............................ 358

Manual Exposure mode..................... 100

Manual focus ..................................... 148

Menu Guide ....................................... 348

Metering Mode........................... 209, 317

MF ............................................. 126, 148

MF Assist ........................................... 338

MF Assist Display .............................. 338

MF Guide ........................................... 347

Miniature Effect ...................................114

Minimum Shutter Speed .................... 321

Monitor......................................... 46, 454

Monitor Display .................................. 358

Monitor Display Speed ...................... 357

Monitor Luminance ............................ 358

Monitor recording information screen

............................................... 60, 65, 458

Monochrome............................... 111, 114

Monochrome (Photo Style) ................ 223

Monochrome Live View ..................... 342

Motion Picture menu.......................... 329

Multi-metering .................................... 209

Multiple Exposure .............................. 327

My Menu ............................................ 307

My Menu Setting................................ 308

506

Index

Natural (Photo Style) ......................... 223

Network Address ............................... 430

No.Reset.................................... 125, 361

Noise Reduction ................................ 224

Number of pictures that can be taken

........................................................... 486

Number of pictures that can be taken

continuously....................................... 162

Number of prints ................................ 447

Number of still images that can be taken

........................................................... 489

Old Days ............................................. 114

One Point Color ..................................114

One Push AE ..................................... 296

Online Manual ................................... 354

Operation Lock Setting ...................... 341

Optical zoom...................................... 153

Page Layout ...................................... 447

Paper Size ......................................... 447

PC connection ................... 409, 429, 440

Peaking.............................................. 344

Photo Style ................................ 223, 316

PHOTOfunSTUDIO ........................... 443

PictBridge .......................................... 446

Picture mode in recording.................. 331

Picture Size ............................... 120, 316

Picture Sort ........................................ 370

Pinpoint (AF)...................................... 142

Pinpoint AF Setting ............................ 334

Pixel Refresh ..................................... 361

Play back ........................................... 272

Play back picture ............................... 272

Play back video ................................. 274

Playback menu .................................. 362

Playback Mode .................................. 363

Portrait (Photo Style) ......................... 223

Post-Focus ........................................ 178

Power Save LVF Shooting ........... 37, 357

Power Zoom Lens ..................... 158, 349

Pre-Burst Recording .................. 167, 323

Preview .............................................. 106

Print ........................................... 412, 446

Print with Date ................................... 447

Profile Setup ...................................... 353

Program AE mode ............................... 93

Program Shift....................................... 94

Protect ............................................... 364

Q.MENU .............................. 63, 301, 339

Quality ....................................... 121, 316

Quick AF ............................................ 334

Quick menu ................................. 63, 301

Rating ................................................ 364

RAW .................................................. 121

RAW Processing ....................... 288, 366

Rec Area ............................................ 348

Rec Menu .......................................... 316

Rec Quality (Video) ................... 241, 329

Rec/Playback Switch ......................... 297

Recording distance reference............ 152

Recording mode .................................. 54

Recording videos ............................... 240

Recording with Time Lapse Shot

................................................... 189, 324

Red REC Frame Indicator ................. 348

507

Index

Red-Eye Removal ..................... 235, 321

(Wi-Fi connection) ............................. 424

Relaxing Tone ..................................... 110

Remaining display ............................. 348

Remote shooting ............................... 389

Remote Wakeup ........................ 356, 398

Reset ........................................... 69, 361

Reset Network Settings ..................... 361

Resize................................................ 368

Restore to default .............................. 297

Retro ................................................... 114

Returning from Sleep Mode....... 356, 392

Romantic Sunset Glow .......................110

Rotate ................................................ 369

Rotate Display ................................... 370

Rough Monochrome ...........................114

S&Q Effect ......................................... 256

S&Q Exposure Mode ......................... 255

S&Q Recording Frame Rate.............. 255

Saturation .......................................... 224

Scene Guide menu ............................ 315

Scene Guide mode ............................ 107

Scene Switch ..................................... 315

Scenery (Photo Style)........................ 223

SD Speed Class .................................. 24

Self Shot ............................................ 350

Self Shot Mode .................................... 85

Self Timer Auto Off ............................ 350

Self-timer ................................... 186, 324

Send Image (Smartphone)

........................................... 356, 406, 408

Sending file format............................. 427

Sending size ...................................... 427

Sepia ..................................................114

Sequence Composition ..................... 284

Setup menu ....................................... 354

Shading compensation ...................... 322

Sharpness ......................................... 224

Shoulder strap ..................................... 30

Shutter AF.......................................... 333

Shutter Delay ............................. 104, 325

Shutter Remote Control ..................... 391

Shutter Type .............................. 204, 324

Shutter-Priority AE mode ..................... 98

Silent Mode................................ 203, 324

Silky Monochrome ..............................114

Silky Skin ........................................... 109

Simultaneous Record w/o Filter

............................................113, 227, 315

Sleep Mode ................................. 37, 357

Sleep Mode (Wi-Fi)...................... 37, 357

Slide show ......................................... 363

Slow & Quick Menu ................... 255, 315

Slow & Quick Mode ........................... 252

Snap Movie........................................ 257

Soft Focus ..........................................114

Soft Image of a Flower .......................111

Sound recording level adjustment

................................................... 265, 331

Sound recording level display.... 265, 331

Special Mic. ............................... 332, 452

Spot metering .................................... 209

Standard (Photo Style) ...................... 223

Star Filter ............................................114

Starlight AF ........................................ 129

Stereo Shotgun Microphone ...... 332, 450

Stop Motion Animation............... 192, 324

Stop Motion Video ............................. 370

Storage (recorder) ............................. 445

Sunshine.............................................114

508

Index

T (Time) ............................................. 102

Text Stamp......................................... 367

Thumbnail screen .............................. 278

Time Lapse Video .............................. 370

Title Edit ............................................. 365

Touch AE ............................................. 71

Touch AF.............................. 70, 144, 341

Touch Pad AF ............................ 146, 341

Touch screen ....................................... 56

Touch Settings ................................... 341

Touch Shutter ...................................... 70

Touch Tab .......................................... 341

Touch Zoom ....................................... 155

Toy Effect ............................................114

Toy Pop...............................................114

Tracking (AF) ............................... 80, 135

Travel Date ........................................ 355

Tripod ................................................ 483

Tripod grip ........................................... 72

TV Connection ................................... 359

TV playback ....................................... 436

UHS Speed Class................................ 24

USB connection cable

..................... 33, 359, 435, 440, 445, 446

USB Mode ......................................... 359

USB/CHARGE socket ................. 33, 435

Vertical orientation detection function

............................................................. 51

Video Divide .............................. 292, 369

Video rec. button ................. 53, 240, 341

Video Speed Class .............................. 24

VIERA Link ................................ 360, 437

Viewfinder ............................ 57, 358, 454

Vivid ................................................... 223

Vivid Sunset Glow ..............................110

V-Log L .............................................. 271

Warm Glowing Nightscape .................110

Web service ....................................... 416

White balance .................................... 217

White balance adjustment ................. 221

White Balance Bracket ...................... 202

Wi-Fi .......................................... 355, 373

Wi-Fi Function ........................... 355, 373

Wi-Fi Function Lock ........................... 430

Wi-Fi network settings ....................... 356

Wi-Fi Password ................................. 429

Wi-Fi Setup menu ...................... 355, 429

Wind Cut .................................... 332, 452

Wind Noise Canceller ................ 266, 332

Wireless ..................................... 237, 320

Wireless Channel ...................... 237, 320

Wireless Connection Lamp........ 356, 373

Wireless flash .................................... 236

Wireless printing ................................ 412

Wireless Setup .......................... 238, 320

World Time ........................................ 354

WPS .......................................... 420, 423

Zebra Pattern............................. 269, 346

Zoom ................................................. 153

509

Trademarks and Licenses

• Micro Four Thirds™ and Micro Four Thirds Logo marks are trademarks or

registered trademarks of Olympus Corporation, in Japan, the United States, the

European Union and other countries.

• Four Thirds™ and Four Thirds Logo marks are trademarks or registered

trademarks of Olympus Corporation, in Japan, the United States, the European

Union and other countries.

• SDXC Logo is a trademark of SD-3C, LLC.

• The terms HDMI and HDMI High-Definition Multimedia Interface, and the HDMI

Logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing Administrator,

Inc. in the United States and other countries.

• HDAVI Control™ is a trademark of Panasonic Corporation.

• Adobe is a trademark or registered trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated in

the United States and/or other countries.

• Pentium is a trademark of Intel Corporation in the U.S. and/or other countries.

• Windows is either registered trademark or trademark of Microsoft Corporation in

the United States and/or other countries.

• iMovie, Mac, OS X and macOS are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S.

and other countries.

• App Store is a service mark of Apple Inc.

• Google, Android and Google Play are trademarks of Google LLC.

510

Trademarks and Licenses

• The Bluetooth

word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by

Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by Panasonic Corporation is under

license. Other trademarks and trade names are those of their respective owners.

• The Wi-Fi CERTIFIED™ Logo is a certification mark of Wi-Fi Alliance

• The Wi-Fi Protected Setup™ Logo is a certification mark of Wi-Fi Alliance

• “Wi-Fi

” is a registered trademarks of Wi-Fi Alliance

• “Wi-Fi Protected Setup™”, “WPA™”, and “WPA2™” are trademarks of Wi-Fi

Alliance

• This product uses “DynaFont” from DynaComware Corporation. DynaFont is a

registered trademark of DynaComware Taiwan Inc.

• DLNA, the DLNA Logo and DLNA CERTIFIED are trademarks, service marks, or

certification marks of the Digital Living Network Alliance.

• QR Code is a registered trademark of DENSO WAVE INCORPORATED.

• Other names, company names, and product names mentioned in these instructions

are trademarks or registered trademarks of the companies concerned.

511

Trademarks and Licenses

This product is licensed under the AVC Patent Portfolio License for the personal use

of a consumer or other uses in which it does not receive remuneration to (i) encode

video in compliance with the AVC Standard (“AVC Video”) and/or (ii) decode AVC

Video that was encoded by a consumer engaged in a personal activity and/or was

obtained from a video provider licensed to provide AVC Video. No license is granted

or shall be implied for any other use. Additional information may be obtained from

MPEG LA, L.L.C.

See http://www.mpegla.com

Disposal of Old Equipment and Batteries

Only for European Union and countries with recycling systems

These symbols on the products, packaging, and/or

accompanying documents mean that used electrical and

electronic products and batteries must not be mixed with

general household waste.

For proper treatment, recovery and recycling of old products

and used batteries, please take them to applicable collection

points in accordance with your national legislation.

By disposing of them correctly, you will help to save valuable

resources and prevent any potential negative effects on human

health and the environment.

For more information about collection and recycling, please

contact your local authority.

Penalties may be applicable for incorrect disposal of this waste,

in accordance with national legislation.

Note for the battery symbol (bottom symbol):

This symbol might be used in combination with a chemical

symbol. In this case it complies with the requirement set by the

Directive for the chemical involved.

Report abuse

Libble takes abuse of its services very seriously. We're committed to dealing with such abuse according to the laws in your country of residence. When you submit a report, we'll investigate it and take the appropriate action. We'll get back to you only if we require additional details or have more information to share.

Product:

Forumrules

To achieve meaningful questions, we apply the following rules:

First, read the manual;
Check if your question has been asked previously;
Try to ask your question as clearly as possible;
Did you already try to solve the problem? Please mention this;
Is your problem solved by a visitor then let him/her know in this forum;
To give a response to a question or answer, do not use this form but click on the button 'reply to this question';
Your question will be posted here and emailed to our subscribers. Therefore, avoid filling in personal details.

new questions and answers
new manuals

You will receive an email to register for one or both of the options.

Get your user manual by e-mail

Enter your email address to receive the manual of Panasonic DC-G100 in the language / languages: English as an attachment in your email.

The manual is 8,76 mb in size.

You will receive the manual in your email within minutes. If you have not received an email, then probably have entered the wrong email address or your mailbox is too full. In addition, it may be that your ISP may have a maximum size for emails to receive.

Others manual(s) of Panasonic DC-G100

Panasonic DC-G100 User Manual - German - 512 pages

Panasonic DC-G100 User Manual - Dutch - 512 pages

Panasonic DC-G100 User Manual - French - 513 pages

The manual is sent by email. Check your email

If you have not received an email with the manual within fifteen minutes, it may be that you have a entered a wrong email address or that your ISP has set a maximum size to receive email that is smaller than the size of the manual.

The email address you have provided is not correct.

Please check the email address and correct it.

Your question is posted on this page

Would you like to receive an email when new answers and questions are posted? Please enter your email address.

Info

Panasonic DC-G100 Manual

Product: